Read econs07.pdf text version

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Economics...................................................... 9 Operations/Decision Advanced.Macroeconomics............................................ 43 . Sciences.......................................................... 47 Advanced.Microeconomics............................................. 44

Asian.Economics............................................................. 46 Econometrics................................................................... 34 Economic.Growth.and.Development. ............................. 44 . Economics.for.Business................................................... 28 Economics.Issues............................................................. 28 Environmental.Economics............................................... 34 . History.of.Economic.Thought.......................................... 40 Industrial.Organization.................................................... 40 Intermediate.Macroeconomics. ....................................... 30 . Intermediate.Microeconomics......................................... 31 International.Economics.................................................. 38 Labor.Economics............................................................. 41 Managerial.Economics. ................................................... 32 . Mathematical.Economics................................................. 36 Money.and.Banking........................................................ 37 Principles.of.Economics.-.Software.................................. 17 Principles.of.Economics.-.Supplementary........................ 17 . Principles.of.Economics.-.Textbooks................................ 11 Principles.of.Macroeconomics.-.Textbooks...................... 19 Principles.of.Microeconomics.-.Textbooks....................... 23 Public.Finance. ............................................................... 43 . Regional.Economics........................................................ 45 Statistics.for.Economics................................................... 46 . Survey.of.Economics....................................................... 26 Urban.Economics............................................................ 42

Business/Systems.Dynamics. ........................................... 49 . Data.Mining.................................................................... 65

Enterprise.Resource.Planning. ......................................... 65 . Global.Operations.Management...................................... 66 Introductory.Operations.Management............................. 49 Logistics.&.Supply.Chain.Management.(Prof.Ref.)............ 67 Management.Science.-.Text............................................. 54 Operation.Management.Software.................................... 53 Operation.Management.Supplement............................... 52 Operation.Research......................................................... 66 Production./.Inventory.Control........................................ 57 Project.Management. ...................................................... 57 . Project.Management.(Prof.Ref.)....................................... 67 . Purchasing.and.Supply.Chain.Management..................... 62 Quality.Control./.Management........................................ 59 Quantitative.Method.-.Text.............................................. 56 Service.Operations.Management..................................... 61 Upper.Level.Operations.Management............................. 56

Business Statistics......................... 69

Business.Forecasting........................................................ 75 Business.Research.Method.............................................. 76 Business.Statistics.-.Supplements..................................... 74 Business.Statistics.-.Textbook........................................... 70 Linear.Statistics./.Regression............................................ 77 Others............................................................................. 78

Business Math..................................... 79

Business.Math................................................................. 80 Business.Math.Software................................................... 81

Indexes........................................................... 82

Title.Index....................................................................... 82. Author.Index................................................................... 85.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2007-2008 NEW Economics Titles

Economics ~ Contents

2007 New Titles

.

.

Advanced.Macroeconomics............................................ 43 . Advanced.Microeconomics............................................. 44 Asian.Economics............................................................. 46 Econometrics................................................................... 34 Economic.Growth.and.Development. ............................. 44 . Economics.for.Business................................................... 28 Economics.Issues............................................................. 28 Environmental.Economics............................................... 34 . History.of.Economic.Thought.......................................... 40 Industrial.Organization.................................................... 40 Intermediate.Macroeconomics. ....................................... 30 . Intermediate.Microeconomics......................................... 31 International.Economics.................................................. 38 Labor.Economics............................................................. 41 Managerial.Economics. ................................................... 32 . Mathematical.Economics................................................. 36 Money.and.Banking........................................................ 37 Principles.of.Economics.-.Software.................................. 17 Principles.of.Economics.-.Supplementary........................ 17 . Principles.of.Economics.-.Textbooks................................ 11 Principles.of.Macroeconomics.-.Textbooks...................... 19 Principles.of.Microeconomics.-.Textbooks....................... 23 Public.Finance. ............................................................... 43 . Regional.Economics........................................................ 45

BALDWIN The Economics of European Integration, 2e..............45.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-711119-9./.MHID:.0-07-711119-2.... [MH.UK.Title]

.

.

BEGG Economics for Business, 2e.......................................28. .

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-711451-0./.MHID:.0-07-711451-5.... [MH.UK.Title]

.

.

BEGG Foundations of Economics, 3e...................................27.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-711423-7./.MHID:.0-07-711423-X... . [MH.UK.Title]

.

BRICKLEY Managerial Economics and Organizational Architecture, 4e........................................................32.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-352301-9./.MHID:.0-07-352301-1

.

BRUE Essentials of Economics............................................26.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-301967-3./.MHID:.0-07-301967-4

.

COLE Annual Editions: Economics, 34e. ............................17. .

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-352843-4./.MHID:.0-07-352843-9

.

.

DORNBUSCH Macroeconomics, 2e..................................................30..

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-471568-0./.MHID:.0-07-471568-2.... [MH.Australia.Title]

.

.

FRANK Principles of Economics...........................................14.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-710831-1./.MHID:.0-07-710831-0..... [MH.UK.Title]

.

FRANK Principles of Economics, 3e. ....................................12. .

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-312567-1./.MHID:.0-07-312567-9....

.

FRANK Principles of Macroeconomics, 3e............................20.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-323061-0./.MHID:.0-07-323061-8.

Statistics.for.Economics................................................... 46 . Survey.of.Economics....................................................... 26 Urban.Economics............................................................ 42

.

FRANK Principles of Microeconomics, 3e.............................23.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-323060-3./.MHID:.0-07-323060-X.

.

GUELL Issues in Economics Today, 3e...................................28. .

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-313752-0./.MHID:.0-07-313752-9

.

.

JACKSON Macroeconomics, 8e.................................................21.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-471698-4./.MHID:.0-07-471698-0.... [MH.Australia.Title]......

.

O'SULLIVAN Urban Economics, 6e.................................................42.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-298476-7./.MHID:.0-07-3298476-7

.

PUGEL International Economics, 13e.....................................38.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-352302-6./.MHID:.0-07-352302-X

2007-2008 NEW Economics Titles

2007 New Titles

2008 New Titles

.

.

RICHARD The Economics of Organizations and Strategy.........33.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-710813-7./.MHID:.0-07-710813-2

.

BORJAS Labor Economics, 4e................................................41..

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-340282-6./.MHID:.0-07-340282-6

.

SCHILLER Essentials of Economics, 6e......................................26.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-340279-6./.MHID:.0-07-340279-6

.

McCONNELL Economics, 17e........................................................11.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-312663-0./.MHID:.0-07-312663-2

.

ROSEN Public Finance, 8e....................................................43..

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-351128-3./.MHID:.0-07-351128-5

.

SLAVIN Economics, 8e..........................................................12.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-351127-6./.MHID:.0-07-351127-7

.

SLAVIN Microeconomics, 8e.................................................23.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-328147-6./.MHID:.0-07-328147-6

.

SLAVIN Macroeconomics, 8e................................................19.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-328148-3./.MHID:.0-07-328148-4

.

THOMAS Managerial Economics, 9e. ......................................32.. .

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-340281-9./.MHID:.0-07-340281-8

2007-2008 NEW Operations/Decision Science Titles

Operations/Decision Science ~ Contents

Business/Systems.Dynamics. ........................................... 49 . Data.Mining.................................................................... 65 Enterprise.Resource.Planning. ......................................... 65 . Global.Operations.Management...................................... 66 Introductory.Operations.Management............................. 49 Logistics.&.Supply.Chain.Management.(Prof.Ref.)............ 67 Management.Science.-.Text............................................. 54 Operation.Management.Software.................................... 53 Operation.Management.Supplement............................... 52 Operation.Research......................................................... 66 Production./.Inventory.Control........................................ 57 Project.Management. ...................................................... 57 . Project.Management.(Prof.Ref.)....................................... 67 .

2007 New Titles

.

BENTON Purchasing and Supply Management.........................63.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-352514-3./.MHID:.0-07-352514-6

.

BOWERSOX Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e...................63. .

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-294788-5./.MHID:.0-07-294788-8

.

.

DEWHURST Quantitative Methods for Business, 2e......................56.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-710902-8./.MHID:.0-07-710902-3.... [MH.UK.Title]

.

FINCH Interactive Models for Operations and Supply Chain Management..................................................52..

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-285710-8./.MHID:.0-07-285710-2

.

GRYNA Quality Planning and Analysis, 5e............................59..

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-296662-6./.MHID:.0-07-296662-9

.

HAYEN SAP R/3 Enterprise Software................................ 3,.65.. 5

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-299067-6./.MHID:.0-07-299067-8

Purchasing.and.Supply.Chain.Management..................... 62 Quality.Control./.Management........................................ 59 Quantitative.Method.-.Text.............................................. 56 Service.Operations.Management..................................... 61 Upper.Level.Operations.Management............................. 56 .

IRWIN/MH Operations Management Video Series Vol. . XII DVD, 9e.............................................................50..

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-326881-X./.MHID:.0-07-326881-X

.

OLSON Introduction to Business Data Mining.......................65.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-295971-0./.MHID:.0-07-295971-1

.

SCHROEDER Operations Management, 3e.....................................50.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-313706-3./.MHID:.0-07-313706-5

.

STEVENSON Introduction to Management Science.......................54. .

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-299066-9./.MHID:.0-07-299066-X

.

STEVENSON Operations Management, 9e.....................................51.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-110916-1./.MHID:.0-07-110916-1

.

THOMKE Managing Project and Service Development: Text and Cases..........................................................58. .

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-302301-4./.MHID:.0-07-302301-9

.

.

VOHRA Quantitative Techniques in Management, 3e............55.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-061193-1./.MHID:.0-07-061193-9...... [Tata.MH.Title]

2007-2008 NEW Operations/Decision Science Titles

2008 New Titles

.

.

FINCH Operations Now, 3e.................................................49.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-329705-7./.MHID:.0-07-329705-4

.

GRAY Project Management, 4e..........................................57.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-352515-0./.MHID:.0-07-352515-4

.

JACOBS Operations and Supply Management.......................50.. .

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-329473-5./.MHID:.0-07-329473-X

.

SIMCHI-LEVI Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e..................................................................62..

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-298239-8./.MHID:.0-07-298239-X

2007-2008 NEW Business Statistics Titles

Business Statistics ~ Contents

2007 New Titles

.

BOWERMAN Business Statistics in Practice, 4e.............................71.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-297747-9./.MHID:.0-07-297747-7

Business.Forecasting........................................................ 75 Business.Research.Method.............................................. 76 Business.Statistics.-.Supplements..................................... 74 Business.Statistics.-.Textbook........................................... 70 Linear.Statistics./.Regression............................................ 77 Others............................................................................. 78 .

.

DOANE Applied Statistics in Business and Economics with Student CD-ROM.............................................72..

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-321575-4./.MHID:.0-07-321575-9

.

ORRIS Basic Statistics Using Excel and MegaStat................72..

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-321158-9./.MHID:.0-07-321158-3

.

WILSON Business Forecasting, 5e...........................................75.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-320398-0./.MHID:.0-07-320398-X

2008 New Titles

.

.

BOWERMAN Essentials of Business Statistics, 2e...........................70.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-297748-6./.MHID:.0-07-297748-5

.

LIND Basic Statistics Using Excel for use with Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e........................................................74..

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-303026-5./.MHID:.0-07-303026-0

.

LIND Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e.........................................................70.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-327296-2./.MHID:.0-07-327296-5

2007-2008 NEW Business Math Titles

Business Math ~ Contents

2007 New Titles

. NELSON Essential of Math with Business . Applications, Student Edition, 7e..............................80.

ISBN-13:.978-0-07-298599-3./.MHID:.0-07-298599-2

Business.Math................................................................. 80 Business.Math.Software................................................... 81

2007-2008 NEW Economics Titles

Economics ~ Contents

2007 New Titles

BALDWIN The Economics of European Integration, 2e .............45

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711119-9 / MHID: 0-07-711119-2 [MH UK Title]

Advanced Macroeconomics............................................ 43 Advanced Microeconomics ............................................ 44 Asian Economics ............................................................ 46 Econometrics .................................................................. 34 Economic Growth and Development .............................. 44 Economics for Business .................................................. 28 Economics Issues ............................................................ 28 Environmental Economics............................................... 34 History of Economic Thought ......................................... 40 Industrial Organization ................................................... 40 Intermediate Macroeconomics ........................................ 30 Intermediate Microeconomics ........................................ 31 International Economics ................................................. 38 Labor Economics ............................................................ 41 Managerial Economics .................................................... 32 Mathematical Economics ................................................ 36 Money and Banking ....................................................... 37 Principles of Economics - Software ................................. 17 Principles of Economics - Supplementary........................ 17 Principles of Economics - Textbooks ............................... 11 Principles of Macroeconomics - Textbooks ..................... 19 Principles of Microeconomics - Textbooks ...................... 23 Public Finance ................................................................ 43 Regional Economics ....................................................... 45 Statistics for Economics................................................... 46 Survey of Economics ...................................................... 26 Urban Economics ........................................................... 42

BEGG Economics for Business, 2e.......................................28

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711451-0 / MHID: 0-07-711451-5 [MH UK Title]

BEGG Foundations of Economics, 3e ..................................27

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711423-7 / MHID: 0-07-711423-X [MH UK Title]

BRICKLEY Managerial Economics and Organizational Architecture, 4e .......................................................32

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352301-9 / MHID: 0-07-352301-1

BRUE Essentials of Economics ...........................................26

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301967-3 / MHID: 0-07-301967-4

COLE Annual Editions: Economics, 34e .............................17

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352843-4 / MHID: 0-07-352843-9

DORNBUSCH Macroeconomics, 2e .................................................30

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471568-0 / MHID: 0-07-471568-2 [MH Australia Title]

FRANK Principles of Economics ..........................................14

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710831-1 / MHID: 0-07-710831-0 [MH UK Title]

FRANK Principles of Economics, 3e .....................................12

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312567-1 / MHID: 0-07-312567-9

FRANK Principles of Macroeconomics, 3e ...........................20

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323061-0 / MHID: 0-07-323061-8

FRANK Principles of Microeconomics, 3e ............................23

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323060-3 / MHID: 0-07-323060-X

GUELL Issues in Economics Today, 3e...................................28

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313752-0 / MHID: 0-07-313752-9

JACKSON Macroeconomics, 8e ................................................21

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471698-4 / MHID: 0-07-471698-0 [MH Australia Title]

O'SULLIVAN Urban Economics, 6e ................................................42

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298476-7 / MHID: 0-07-3298476-7

PUGEL International Economics, 13e ....................................38

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352302-6 / MHID: 0-07-352302-X

2007-2008 NEW Economics Titles

2007 New Titles

2008 New Titles

RICHARD The Economics of Organizations and Strategy ........33

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710813-7 / MHID: 0-07-710813-2

BORJAS Labor Economics, 4e ...............................................41

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340282-6 / MHID: 0-07-340282-6

SCHILLER Essentials of Economics, 6e .....................................26

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340279-6 / MHID: 0-07-340279-6

McCONNELL Economics, 17e .......................................................11

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312663-0 / MHID: 0-07-312663-2

ROSEN Public Finance, 8e ...................................................43

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351128-3 / MHID: 0-07-351128-5

SLAVIN Economics, 8e .........................................................12

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351127-6 / MHID: 0-07-351127-7

SLAVIN Microeconomics, 8e ................................................23

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328147-6 / MHID: 0-07-328147-6

SLAVIN Macroeconomics, 8e ...............................................19

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328148-3 / MHID: 0-07-328148-4

THOMAS Managerial Economics, 9e .......................................32

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340281-9 / MHID: 0-07-340281-8

10

Economics

Principles of Economics - Textbooks

International Edition

ECONOMICS 17th Edition

Updated Consider This Boxes: These boxes are used to provide analogies, examples, or stories that help drive home central economic ideas in a student-oriented, real-world manner. New boxes include such disparate topics as fast food lines (Chapter 1), the Fed as a sponge (Chapter 14), art for art's sake (Chapter 28), and many more. Updated Last Word Boxes: These applications and case studies are located toward the end of each chapter. In this edition, we have included photos to pique student interest. New or relocated Last Words include those on pitfalls to sound economic reasoning (Chapter 1), the diminishing impact of oil prices on the overall economy (Chapter 10), and mandatory health insurance (Chapter 33), and many more. Updated Last Word Boxes: These applications and case studies are located toward the end of each chapter. In this edition, we have included photos to pique student interest. New or relocated Last Words include those on pitfalls to sound economic reasoning (Chapter 1), the diminishing impact of oil prices on the overall economy (Chapter 10), and mandatory health insurance (Chapter 33), and many more. Contemporary Discussions and Examples: The seventeenth edition references and discusses many current topics: the economics of the war in Iraq, China's rapid growth rate, large Federal budget deficits, recent Fed monetary policy, the debate over inflation targeting, the productivity acceleration, the recent profit paths of Wal-Mart and General Motors, rising oil prices, Health Savings Accounts (HSAs), immigration impacts, large U.S. trade deficits, off shoring of American jobs, and many more.

NEW

By Campbell McConnell, University of Nebraska and Stanley L Brue, Pacific Lutheran University 2008 (November 2006) / 832 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312663-0 / MHID: 0-07-312663-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110143-1 / MHID: 0-07-110143-8 [IE]

Website: http://www.mcconnell17.com McConnell and Brue's Economics: Principles, Problems, and Policies is the leading Principles of Economics textbook because it is innovative and teaches students in a clear, unbiased way. The 17th Edition builds upon the tradition of leadership with three main goals: help the beginning student master the principles essential for understanding the economizing problem, specific economic issues, and the policy alternatives; help the student understand and apply the economic perspective and reason accurately and objectively about economic matters; and promote a lasting student interest in economics and the economy. NEW TO THIS EDITION

New Analysis of Monetary Policy: The authors have revised the discussion of monetary policy to help the student understand the Fed's focus on the federal funds rate, and how changes in that rate affect other interest rates and the overall economy. In Chapter 14, the authors demonstrate how the Fed targets a specific federal funds rate and then uses open-market operations to drive the rate to that level and hold it there (see Figure 14.3). This new analysis will help students interpret the news as it relates to Fed announcements about federal funds rates. Technology Advantage: McGraw-Hill aims to help instructors save time and acknowledge that students study differently now. It is their goal to provide technology solutions that meet those goals. To that end, they have developed the following core set of products and services: homework management, rich course cartridges, Prep Center, iPod Content, and easy to use response system content. Assessment-Ready Learning Objectives and Testing: Each chapter begins with measurable learning objectives. These learning objectives are cross-referenced to specific test bank questions to allow construction of measurement instruments. This direct link between objectives and content facilitates now common accreditation efforts necessary to meet assurance of learning requirements. Internet Chapters: Two new Internet chapters, along with a fully updated preexisting web chapter covering The Economics of Developing Countries (16Web), are available for free use at our website, www. mcconnell17.com. The first of these, "Financial Economics" (Chapter 14Web), examines ideas such as compound interest, present value, arbitrage, risk, diversification, and the risk-return relationship. The second new chapter, "Resource and Energy Economics" (Chapter 27Web) is particularly timely. It covers topics such as the optimal rate of extraction, resource substitution, resource sustainability, and oil prices. Consolidated Chapters: With overwhelming support of reviewers, the authors have consolidated the first two chapters of the prior edition into a single chapter, "Limits, Alternatives, and Choices" (Chapter 1). This new chapter quickly and directly moves the student into the subject matter of economics, demonstrating its methodology. We also combined the prior edition's separate chapters on fiscal policy and the public debt into single chapter, "Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and Debt" (Chapter 11). The topics are closely related, and consolidation integrates them into a smooth flow.

FEATURES

A Patient, Step-by-Step Approach: Realizing that this is the first introduction to economics for most students, the authors take a patient, step-by step approach to teaching the material. The authors explain the theory and models slowly and thoroughly. This approach is easier to follow than that of many other texts on the market which make assumptions and jump through material quickly, leaving students behind. Balanced Coverage: McConnell and Brue have stayed the number one selling text over the years because of their thorough and neutral coverage of the material--they present both sides and let instructors and students make up their own minds. Two-Path Macro: Because different teachers teach macro in different ways, the authors organized Chapters 8, 9, and 10 to provide two alternative paths through the macro. This way, instructors who focus exclusively on Aggregate Demand-Aggregate Supply Model can easily skip the Aggregate Expenditure (Keynesian) model, while those who teach both the AD/AS and AE models can do so in a logical manner. Multiple-choice "Quick Quizzes" to accompany the Key Graphs. Graphs that have special relevance are labeled "Key Graphs," and each includes a multiple-choice quiz. These 4-question quizzes allow students to test their understanding in the multiple-choice format. Answers are provided on the page, but upside down. Extensive Glossary: Over 30 pages with 1000 entries.

Figure Legends: Legends accompanying diagrams are often in-depth self-contained analyses of the concepts. The legends are quick synopses of important ideas. They help the students understand the visual representations more fully. Study Questions: 10-12 questions follow every chapter, one of which refers to the Last Word Essay; several of the questions are designated "key questions", are cited in the body of text, and answered at the book's end. Quick Review Boxes: 3-4 mini lists interspersed in each chapter used to review content. Students get a chance to review what they've read and as a result, retain more.

11

Economics

NEW

ECONOMICS 8th Edition

International Edition

NEW

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS 3rd Edition

By Stephen Slavin, Union College 2008 (August 2006) / 832 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351127-6 / MHID: 0-07-351127-7

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/slavin8e Steve Slavin's lively and comprehensive Economics has a student-friendly, step-by-step approach; value pricing; and a built-in Workbook/Study Guide. Instructors and students like the author's humorous anecdotes, direct language, and easy conversational style. The text encourages active rather than passive reading. NEW TO THIS EDITION

A Chapter Issues section at the end of each chapter gives practical application to at least one of the concepts covered in the chapter. Issues discussed include "The Internet Effect: A more perfect knowledge and lower prices," in Chapter 21 and "Will Social Security be there for you?" in Chapter 30. New discussions have been added to provide yet more practical application to the overall text, including a "Sports Strikes and Lockouts" box in Ch. 27 and "A College Degree Is the Ticket Out of Poverty" box in Ch. 28. The discussion of comparative advantage in Chapter 31 has been written for simplicity and clarity, making it easier for students to learn.

By Robert H. Frank, Cornell University-Ithaca and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University 2007 (December 2005) / 896 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312567-1 / MHID: 0-07-312567-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323059-7 / MHID: 0-07-323059-6 (with DiscoverEcon Code Card) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110815-7 / MHID: 0-07-110815-7 [IE with Discover Econ Code Card]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/frankbernanke3 In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign languages, and other fields have achieved dramatic pedagogical gains by abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach in favor of attempting to teach a short list of core principles in depth. Two well-respected writers and researchers, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory economics. Although recent editions of a few other texts have paid lip service to this new approach, Frank/Bernanke is by far the best thought out and best executed principles text in this mold. Avoiding excessive reliance on formal mathematical derivations, it presents concepts intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. The authors introduce a well-articulated short list of core principles and reinforcing them by illustrating and applying each in numerous contexts. Students are periodically asked to apply these principles to answer related questions and exercises. The text also encourages students to become "Economic Naturalists," people who employ basic economic principles to understand and explain what they observe in the world around them. An economic naturalist understands, for example, that infant safety seats are required in cars but not in airplanes because the marginal cost of space to accommodate these seats is typically zero in cars but often hundreds of dollars in airplanes. Such examples engage student interest while teaching them to see each feature of their economic landscape as the reflection of an implicit or explicit cost-benefit calculation. NEW TO THIS EDITION

"Incentives matter" is a new core principle: If we asked a thousand economists to provide their own versions of the most important economic principles, we'd get a thousand different lists. Yet to dwell on their differences would be to miss their essential similarities. It is less important to have exactly the best short list of principles than it is to use some well-thought-out list of this sort. New to our short list is the "incentives matter" principle, which we added to emphasize that costbenefit comparisons are relevant not only for identifying the decisions that rational people should make, but also for predicting the actual decisions they do make across numerous diverse domains. International trade chapter moved forward: Because the topic is so important, the chapter on international trade (Chapter 16 in our Second Edition) has been moved forward to appear at the end of the Part 2 (Competition and the Invisible Hand). This chapter (now Chapter 9) has been extensively rewritten to incorporate explicit analysis of how producer and consumer surplus are affected by trade and by policies such as tariffs and quotas. A new section addresses the question of which jobs are most vulnerable to outsourcing. More emphasis on monopolistic competition and oligopoly: In our Second Edition, the chapter on imperfect competition (Chapter 9 in that edition) briefly defined the three forms of imperfect competition and then focused exclusively on pure monopoly. In this edition, we have added more detailed descriptive accounts of monopolistic competition and oligopoly to this chapter (now Chapter 10). We have also added numerous additional examples involving these industry structures in the succeeding chapter on strategic choice (now Chapter 11).

FEATURES

Value Price: Slavin's low price continues to make it one of the best values on the market. It's approximately $25 less than other principles texts. Fun Writing Style: The author's humorous writing style and historical approach to economics are a hit with students who might otherwise find the subject dry or intimidating. Steve Slavin is an experienced and respected author--in addition to having over 30 years experience teaching the principles course, he has written 11 other math and economics books. Streamlined Text: The streamlined basis of the text has been retained from the previous version, and the more obscure passages have been simplified. Special In-Text Boxes: Dozens of self-help boxes anticipate and answer frequently asked questions. The book reviews math that students should have learned before college. The better prepared students can skip this material, but this review enables all students to start on a level playing field in the course. Many advanced work boxes provide more challenging material, giving adventurous students an opportunity to learn and master difficult material. This optional material can be easily skipped by instructors.

CONTENTS

1 A brief economic history of the united states. 2 Resource utilization. 3 Supply and demand. 4 The mixed economy. The household-consumption sector. 6 The business-investment sector. 7 The government sector. 8 The export-import sector. 9 Gross domestic product. 10 Economic fluctuations, unemployment, and inflation. 11 Classical and keynesian economics. 12 Fiscal policy and the national debt. 13 Money and banking. 14 The federal reserve and monetary policy. 15 A century of economic theory. 16 Economic growth and productivity. 17 Demand, supply, and equilibrium. 18 The elasticities of demand and supply. 19 The theory of consumer behavior. 20 Cost. 21 Profit, loss, and perfect competition. 22 Monopoly. 23 Monopolistic competition. 24 Oligopoly. 25 Corporate mergers and antitrust. 26 Demand in the factor market. 27 Labor unions. 28 Labor markets and wage rates. 29 Rent, interest, and profit. 30 Income distribution and poverty. 31 International trade. 32 International finance.

12

Economics

Added material on indifference curves: In our second edition, we offered an appendix on the indifference curve approach to the consumer choice problem on the text web site. But because a number of reviewers felt strongly that this material should me more accessible for those who want to use it, we've added it an extensively revised appendix to Chapter 5. This topic can be skipped at no compromise to the material in the succeeding chapters. Algebra appendixes added: To the basic review of the algebra and geometry of straight lines presented in the mathematical appendix to Chapter 1, we have added a basic primer on how to solve simple systems of two equations with two unknowns. In this edition, the treatment of supply and demand in the main text is carried out exclusively in verbal and graphical terms. But we have added an appendix to Chapter 3 that presents an algebraic treatment of supply and demand. We have also added a brief appendix to Chapter 10 showing how monopoly profit maximization can be treated in an algebraic framework. Additional Economic Naturalist drawings: For reasons best explained by educational psychologists, illustrations can be an enormously effective pedagogical tool, in part because of their ability to trigger rich networks of cognitive association. To exploit this tool more effectively, we commissioned line drawings by the renowned New Yorker cartoonist Mick Stevens and other artists to accompany many of the economic naturalist examples. For this edition, all of the economic naturalist examples are accompanied by such drawings. Expanded Discussion of Macroeconomic Policy: The revised monetary policy reaction function we introduce in Chapter 27 is a more realistic description of how the Fed actually conducts monetary policy and clarifies the Taylor rule. In Chapter 28 we use this policy reaction function to help students distinguish between a move along the aggregate demand curve and a shift in the aggregate demand curve resulting from a change in monetary policy. In a new Chapter 29, we provide a more complete analysis of the interaction between fiscal and monetary policy, illustrating the crucial role of the central bank in any long-run inflation. We also discuss how enhanced credibility can help to anchor inflationary expectations and explain the contributions of central bank independence, inflation targeting, and central bank reputation. In the last section of Chapter 29 we expand our discussion of the real-world difficulties in conducting macroeconomic policy. More Patient Presentation of Models: In Chapter 26 we explain the effects of tax cuts on planned aggregate expenditure more carefully. In an optional box we also solve a simple Keynesian model, leaving the full model in the appendix, as in the second edition. In the diagrams in Chapter 28 we include the transitional short-run aggregate supply lines to illustrate how the short-run aggregate supply line shifts when actual output deviates from potential output. Expanded Discussion of Supply-Side Economics: Most economists agree that changes in marginal tax rates can affect both aggregate demand and aggregate supply, but they disagree on the size of the effects. In Chapter 28 we describe this controversy in greater detail and present both the theoretical and empirical evidence of the effects of changes in marginal tax rates on aggregate supply. Greater Attention to Asset Prices: In Chapter 21 we provide a clearer explanation of the inverse relationship between bond prices and interest rates. We also discuss the effects of changes in asset prices (especially stocks and houses) on aggregate demand. Simpler Presentation of Exchange Rates: We use supply and demand curves to illustrate the determination of nominal exchange rates before we introduce the real exchange rate and purchasing-power-parity. Additional Material on China: At its current rate of growth the Chinese economy may become the largest economy in the world within the next generation. In this edition we expand our discussion of China in the world economy. We discuss the determinants of its success and its management of its exchange rate. New Material on the Acceleration of Productivity Growth: The productivity slowdown of 1973-1995 has been followed by surprisingly strong productivity growth. We present and discuss the reasons for this acceleration. Updated Discussion of Saving and Investment: In addition to emphasizing the importance of public and private saving and the relationship between the budget deficit, national saving, and capital flows, we discuss the recently divergent trends in business and household saving. Modern Macroeconomics: Recent developments have renewed interest in cyclical fluctuations while still paying attention to such long-run issues as growth, productivity, the evolution of real wages, and capital formation. Thus, we offer the following organization: A 5-chapter treatment of long-run issues prior to an analysis of short-run fluctuations followed by a modern treatment of short-term fluctuations and stabilization policy, emphasizing the important distinction between short- and long-run behavior of the economy. Consistent with both media reporting and recent research on the central bank reaction function, we treat the interest rate rather than the money supply as the instrument of Fed policy. The analysis of aggregate demand and aggregate supply relates output to inflation, rather than to the price level, sidestepping the necessity of a separate derivation of the link between the output gap and inflation. This book places a heavy emphasis on globalization, starting with an analysis of its effects on real wage inequality and progressing to such issues as the benefits of trade, the causes and effects of protectionism, the role of capital flows in domestic capital formation, the link between exchange rates and monetary policy, and the sources of speculative attacks on currencies.

FEATURES

An Emphasis on Core Principles: A few core principles do most of the work in economics. By focusing on these principles, the text assures that students leave the course with a deep mastery of them. In contrast, traditional encyclopedic texts so overwhelm students with detail that they often leave the course with little useful working knowledge at all. Economic Naturalism Introduced: The authors' ultimate goal is to produce "economic naturalists" ­people who see each human action as the result of an implicit or explicit cost-benefit calculation. The economic naturalist sees mundane details of ordinary existence in a new light and becomes actively engaged in the attempt to understand them. Why don't auto manufacturers make cars without heaters? Why are whales, but not chickens, threatened with extinction? Why do movie theaters give student discounts on the price of admission but not on the price of popcorn? Active Learning Stressed: The only way to lean to hit an overhead smash in tennis or to speak a foreign language is through repeated practice. The same is true for learning economics. Thus, the authors consistently introduce new ideas in the context of simple examples and then follow them with applications showing how they work in familiar settings. And frequently, the text poses exercises that both test and reinforce the understanding of these ideas. The end-of-chapter questions and problems are carefully crafted to help students internalize and extend core concepts. Students are prepared to apply the important concepts to solve "economic riddles" drawn from the real world. Well-Known Authors: Robert Frank and Ben Bernanke are renowned experts in their fields (micro and macro, respectively). Frank's research has looked at rivalry and cooperation in economic and social behavior. He is the author of a best-selling intermediate economics text, Microeconomics and Behavior, (McGraw-Hill/Irwin), and has published such award-winning books as The Winner-Take-All-Society and Luxury Fever. Bernanke is the co-author of a best-selling intermediate macroeconomics text and has done significant research on the causes of the Great Depression, the role of financial markets and institutions in the business cycle, and measuring the effects of monetary policy on the economy. He was a member of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors for more than two years and is now the Chairman of the President's Council of Economic Advisers. Modern Microeconomics: Economic surplus, introduced in Chapter 1 and applied repeatedly thereafter, is more fully developed here than in any other text. This concept underlies the argument for economic efficiency as an important social goal. Rather than speak of tradeoffs between efficiency and other goals, the authors stress that maximizing economic surplus facilitates the achievement of all goals. The tendency to ignore opportunity costs, the tendency not to ignore sunk costs, and

13

Economics

the tendency to confuse average and marginal costs and benefits--common decision pitfalls identified by 2002 Nobel Laureate Daniel Kahneman and others--are introduced early in Chapter 1. The book devotes a chapter to the economics of information, making available in intuitively accessible form key insights that earned the 2001 Nobel Prize in economics for George Akerlof, Joseph Stiglitz, and Michael Spence. Web site: Developed by Scott Simkins of North Carolina A & T State University, an expert in the growing field of Economics education on the World Wide Web, the ambitious web site contains a host of features that will enhance the principles classroom, including dynamic graphs, video lectures, e-mail updates, microeconomic experiments, current news articles, information about the text, an eLearning session, and more. Policy Chapter 3: The Evolving U.S. Economy in Perspective Chapter 4: Supply and Demand Chapter 5: Using Supply and Demand II: Microeconomics I: Microeconomics: The Basics Chapter 6: Describing Supply and Demand: Elasticities Chapter 7: Taxation and Government Intervention II: Foundations of Supply and Demand Chapter 8: The Logic of Individual Choice: The Foundation of Supply and Demand Chapter 9: Production and Cost Analysis I Chapter 10: Production and Cost Analysis II III: Market Structure and Policy Chapter 11: Perfect Competition Chapter 12: Monopoly Chapter 13: Monopolistic Competition, Oligopoly, and Strategic Pricing Chapter 14: Real-World Competition and Technology Chapter 15: Antitrust Policy and Regulation IV: Factor Markets Chapter 16: Work and the Labor Market Chapter 17: Who Gets What? The Distribution of Income V: Applying Economic Reasoning to Policy Chapter 18: Government Policy and Market Failures Chapter 19: Politics and Economics: The Case of Agriculture Markets Chapter 20: Microeconomic Policy, Economic Reasoning, and Beyond Chapter 21: International Trade Policy, Comparative Advantage, and Outsourcing III: Macroeconomics I: Macroeconomic Problems Chapter 22: Economic Growth, Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation Chapter 23: National Income Accounting II: The Macroeconomic Framework Chapter 24: Growth, Productivity, and the Wealth of Nations Chapter 25: Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and Modern Macroeconomics Chapter 26: The Multiplier Model III: Money, Inflation, and Monetary Policy Chapter 27: Money, Banking, and the Financial Sector Chapter 28: Monetary Policy and the Debate about Macro Policy Chapter 29: Inflation and Its Relationship to Unemployment and Growth IV: Macro Policy in Perspective Chapter 30: Aggregate Demand Policy in Perspective Chapter 31: Politics, Deficits,and Debt Chapter 32: Macro Policies in Developing Countries V: International Policy Issues Chapter 33: International Financial Policy Chapter 34: Macro Policy in a Global Setting

CONTENTS

Part 1 Introduction. 1. Thinking Like an Economist. 2. Comparative Advantage: The Basis for Exchange. 3. Supply and Demand: An Introduction. Part 2 Competition and the Invisible Hand. 4. Elasticity. 5. Demand: The Benefit Side of the Market. 6. Perfectly Competitive Supply: The Cost Side of the Market. 7. Efficiency and Exchange. 8. The Quest for Profit and the Invisible Hand. 9. International Trade. Part 3 Market Imperfections. 10. Monopoly and Other Forms of Imperfect Competition. 11. Thinking Strategically: A Further Look at Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 12. Externalities and Property Rights. 13. The Economics of Information. Part 4 Economics of Public Policy. 14. Labor Markets, Poverty, and Income Distribution. 15. The Environment, Health, and Safety. 16. Public Goods and Tax Policy. Part 5 Macroeconomics: Issues and Data. 17. Macroeconomics: The Bird'sEye View of the Economy . 18. Measuring Economic Activity: GDP and Unemployment. 19. Measuring the Price Level and Inflation. Part 6 The Economy in the Long Run. 20. Economic Growth, Productivity, and Living Standards. 21. Workers, Wages, and Unemployment in the Modern Economy. 22. Saving and Capital Formation. 23. Money and the Federal Reserve. 24. Financial Markets and International Capital Flow. Part 7 The Economy in the Short Run. 25. Short-term Economic Fluctuations: An Introduction. 26. Spending Output in the Short Run. 27. Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of the Fed. 28. Inflation, Aggregate Supply, and Aggregate Demand. 29. The Practice and Pitfalls of Macroeconomic Policy. Part 8 The International Economy. 30. Exchange Rates and the Open Economy

NEW

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS

By Robert Frank, Cornell University, Moore McDowell and Rodney Thom of University College Dublin and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University 2006 (March 2006) / 912 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710831-1 / MHID: 0-07-710831-0

McGraw-Hill UK Title

International Edition

ECONOMICS 6th Edition

By David C Colander, Middlebury College 2006 / 936 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297883-4 / MHID: 0-07-297883-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322297-4 / MHID: 0-07-322297-6 (with Paul Solman Videos Code Card) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111569-8 / MHID: 0-07-111569-2 [IE] ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110611-5 / MHID: 0-07-110611-1 [IE with DiscoverEcon and Paul Solman Video Code Card]

Principles of Economics, European Edition, develops the well regarded US textbook by Frank and Bernanke to reflect the issues and context of economics in Europe. The book presents concepts intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. It relies throughout on a well articulated shortlist of 12 core principles which are reinforced by real-world examples. Review questions, exercises and problems encourage students to apply these principles in a variety of contexts. The text encourages students to become "economic naturalists", people who employ basic economic principles to understand and explain what they observe in the world around them. The "economic naturalist" approach helps students develop concepts and illustrates their applications in a real world setting. FEATURES

European content throughout, including a new chapter on the economics of the European Union and an extended chapter on oligopoly theory within the microeconomics section A revised and expanded macroeconomics section, addressing key issues within a European context Advanced technical analysis in appendices to demonstrate elements of working with equations, supply, and the Keynesian model Up-to-date European Economic Naturalist examples that place economics in a relevant and contemporary context Core Principles emphasised throughout the text to reinforce key ideas

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/colander6 Written in an informal colloquial style, this student-friendly Principles of Economics textbook does not sacrifice intellectual depth in its quest for accessibility. The author's primary concern is to instill "economic sensibility" in the student. Colander emphasizes the intellectual and historical context to which the economic models are applied. This new edition offers improvements to this established and respected text including special Questions from Alternate Perspectives end-of-chapter questions that facilitate class discussion of differing views of thought in the discipline, and access to over 250 minutes of new videos from Paul Solman of the Lehrer NewsHour. CONTENTS

I: Introduction: Thinking Like An Economist Chapter 1: Economics and Economic Reasoning Chapter 2: Trade, Trade-off's and Government

14

Economics

An Active Learning Approach, with exercises, review questions and problems included in every chapter, to encourage students to apply their knowledge as they work through the topics

CONTENTS

Part 1 BASIC CONCEPTS Chapter 1 Economics: The Core Issues Appendix: Using Graphs Chapter 2 The U.S. Economy: A Global View Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Chapter 4 The Public Sector Part 2 MEASURING MACRO OUTCOMES Chapter 5 National-Income Accounting Chapter 6 Unemployment Chapter 7 Inflation Part 3 CYCLICAL INSTABILITY Chapter 8 The Business Cycle Chapter 9 Aggregate Demand Appendix: The Keynesian Cross Chapter 10 Self-Adjustment or Instability? Part 4 FISCAL POLICY LEVERS Chapter 11 Fiscal Policy Chapter 12 Deficits, Surpluses, and Debts Part 5 MONETARY POLICY OPTIONS Chapter 13 Money and Banks Chapter 14 The Federal Reserve System Chapter 15 Monetary Policy Part 6 SUPPLY-SIDE OPTIONS Chapter 16 Supply-Side Policy: Short-Run Options Chapter 17 Growth and Productivity: Long-Run Possibilities Part 7 POLICY CONSTRAINTS Chapter 18 Global Macro Chapter 19 Theory and Reality Part 8 PRODUCT MARKETS: THE BASICS Chapter 20 The Demand for Goods Appendix: Indifference Curves Chapter 21: The Costs of Production Part 9 MARKET STRUCTURE Chapter 22 The Competitive Firm Chapter 23 Competitive Markets Chapter 24 Monopoly Chapter 25 Oligopoly Chapter 26 Monopolistic Competition Part 10 REGULATORY ISSUES Chapter 27 (De)Regulation of Business Chapter 28 Environmental Protection Chapter 29 The Farm Problem Part 11 FACTOR MARKETS: BASIC THEORY Chapter 30 The Labor Market Chapter 31 Labor Unions Chapter 32 Financial Markets Part 12 DISTRIBUTIONAL ISSUES Chapter 33 Taxes: Equity vs. Efficiency Chapter 34 Transfer Payments: Welfare and Social Security Part 13 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS Chapter 35 International Trade Chapter 36 International Finance / Glossary / Index / Student Problem Sets

CONTENTS

Preface. PART 1: Introduction. 1 Thinking Like an Economist. Appendix A: Working with Equations, Graphs and Tables. Appendix B: Elements of Calculus for use in Economics. 2 Comparative Advantage: The Basis for Exchange. 3 Supply and Demand: An Introduction. PART 2: Competition and the Invisible Hand. 4 Elasticity. 5 Demand: The Benefit Side of the Market. 6 Perfectly Competitive Supply: The Cost Side of the Market. Appendix: Supply. 7 Efficiency and Exchange. 8 The Quest for Profit and the Invisible Hand. PART 3: Market Imperfections. 9 Imperfect Competition and Consequences of Market Power. 10 Thinking Strategically: Competition among the Few. 11 Externalities and Property Rights: External Costs and Benefits. 12 The Economics of Information. PART 4: Government in the Economy: Distribution, Regulation and the Provision of Public Goods. 13 Labour Markets, Income Distribution, Wealth and Poverty. 14 Government in the Market Economy: Regulation and Production of Public Goods and Other Services. PART 5: Trade and Integration. 16 Trade, Factor Flows and Economic Integration: The Basic Economics of the European Union. PART 6: Macroeconomics: Issues and Data. 17 Macroeconomics: The Bird's-Eye View of the Economy. 18 Measuring Economic Activity: GDP and Unemployment. 19 Measuring the Price Level and Inflation. PART 7: The Economy in the Long Run. 20 Economic Growth, Productivity, and Living Standards. 21 Workers, Wages, and Unemployment in the Modern Economy. 22 Saving and Capital Formation. 23 Money, Prices, and the European Central Bank. 24 Financial Markets and International Capital Flows. PART 8: The Economy in the Short Run. 25 Short-Term Economic Fluctuations. Appendix: The Multiplier in the Basic Keynesian Model. 26 Stabilising the Economy: The Role of Fiscal Policy. 27 Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of Monetary Policy. Appendix: Monetary Policy in the Basic Keynesian Model. 28 Inflation and Aggregate Supply. Appendix: The Algebra of Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. PART 9: The International Economy. 29 Exchange Rates and the Open Economy. 30 Monetary Union: The Theory of Optimum Currency Areas

ECONOMICS 8th Edition

By David Begg, Birkbeck College, London, Stanley Fischer, International Monetary Fund and Rudiger Dornbusch of Massachusetts Institute of Technology 2005 / 560 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710775-8 / MHID: 0-07-710775-6

McGraw-Hill UK Title

International Edition

THE ECONOMY TODAY 10th Edition

Website: www.mcgraw-hill/textbooks/begg Begg, Fischer and Dornbusch, Economics, is the definitive economics textbook. The new edition of the best selling "student bible" aims to teach students how economics really works in the world today. The new edition continues to engage with the latest theoretical developments in economics. With a host of new boxes, data, and examples throughout, the new revision brings economics right up-to-date. Careful revisions to key topics and explanations also help to ensure the new edition retains its relevance to contemporary teaching in economics. A brand new feature of this edition is free access to Power Web, an online database of refereed articles, news stories and features about economics topics, kept right up-to-date with daily news feeds. Accompanied by a fantastic range of extra resources for students and lecturers, the new edition provides the complete package of materials for students of economics and their lecturers. CONTENTS

Part One: Introduction / 1. Economics and the economy / 2. Tools of economic analysis / 3. Demand, supply, and the market / 4. Elasticities of demand and supply / Part Two: Microeconomics / 5. Consumer choice and demand decisions / 6. Introducing supply decisions / 7. Costs and supply / 8. Perfect competition and pure monopoly / 9. Market structure and imperfect competition / 10. The labour market / 11. Different types of labour / 12. Factor markets and income distribution / 13. Risk and information / 14. The information economy / Part Three: Welfare Economics / 15. Welfare economics / 16. Government spending and revenue / 17. Industrial policy and competition policy / 18. Natural monopoly: public or private? / Part Four: Macroeconomics / 19: Intro to macroeconomics / 20: Output and aggregate demand / 21: Fiscal policy and foreign trade / 22. Money and Banking / 23. Interest rates and monetary transmission / 24. Monetary and fiscal policy / 25. Aggregate supply, prices and the adjustment to shocks / 26. Inflation,

By Bradley R. Schiller, American University 2006 / 912 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297911-4 / MHID: 0-07-297911-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313775-9 / MHID: 0-07-313775-8 (with DiscoverEcon with Paul Solman Videos) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111790-6 / MHID: 0-07-111790-3 [IE with DiscoverEcon with Paul Solman Videos]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/schiller10 Brad Schiller's text, The Economy Today, 10/e, is noted for three great strengths: readability, policy orientation, and pedagogy. His accessible writing style engages students and brings some of the excitement of domestic and global economic news into the classroom. Schiller emphasizes how policymakers must choose between government intervention and market reliance to resolve the core issues of what, how, and for whom to produce. This strategic choice is highlighted throughout the full range of micro, macro, and international issues. Every chapter ends with a policy issue that emphasizes the markets vs. government dilemma. And Schiller packs his chapters with the facts of economic life--real stories and applications, not fables. This is a book that teaches economics in a relevant context with careful pedagogy. It is also the only principles text that presents all macro theory in the single consistent context of the AS/AD framework. Schiller 10e is for students motivated by real-world policy issues who want to become economically literate. This is a book students actually READ. Schiller is also known for its cutting-edge and current coverage of today's issues.

15

Economics

expectations, and credibility / 27. Unemployment / 28. Exchange rates and the balance of payments / 29: Open economy macroeconomics / 30. Economic Growth / 31. Business cycles / 32. Macroeconomics: taking stock / Part Five: The World Economy / 33: International trade / 34: Exchange rate regimes / 35: European integration / 36: Less developed countries

International Edition

ECONOMICS 18th Edition

By Paul A Samuelson, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and William D Nordhaus, Yale University 2005 / 832 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287208-7 / MHID: 0-07-287205-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123932-5 / MHID: 0-07-123932-4 [IE]

International Edition

ECONOMICS 16th Edition

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/economics/ samuelson18e Samuelson's text was first published in 1948, and it immediately became the authority for the principles of economics courses. The book continues to be the standard-bearer for principles courses, and this revision continues to be a clear, accurate, and interesting introduction to modern economics principles. Bill Nordhaus is now the primary author of this text, and he has revised the book to be as current and relevant as ever. CONTENTS

Part One: Basic Concepts 1 The Fundamentals of Economics Appendix 1 How to Read Graphs 2 Markets and Government in a Modern Economy 3 Basic Elements of Supply and Demand Part Two: Microeconomics: Supply, Demand, and Product Markets 4 Applications of Supply and Demand 5 Demand and Consumer Behavior Appendix 5 Geometrical Analysis of Consumer Equilibrium 6 Production and Business Organization 7 Analysis of Costs Appendix 7 Production, Cost Theory, and Decision of the Firm 8 Analysis of Perfectly Competitive Markets 9 Competition and Its Polar Case of Monopoly 10 Oligopoly and Monopolistic Competition 11 Uncertainty and Game Theory Part Three: Factor Markets: Labor, Land, and Capital 12 How Markets Determine Incomes 13 The Labor Market 14 Land and Capital Appendix 14 Markets and Economic Efficiency Part Four: Applied Microeconomics: International Trade, Government, and the Environment 15 Comparative Advantage and Protectionism 16 Government Taxation and Expenditure 17 Promoting More Efficient Markets 18 Protecting the Environment 19 Efficiency vs. Equality: The Big Tradeoff Part Five: Macroeconomics: Economic Growth and Business Cycles 20 Overview of Macroeconomics Appendix 20 Macroeconomic Data 21 Measuring Economic Activity 22 Consumption and Investment 23 Business Fluctuations and the Theory of Aggregate Demand 24 The Multiplier Model 25 Money, Banking, and Financial Markets 26 Central Banking and Monetary Policy Part Six: Economic Growth and Macroeconomic Policy 27 The Process of Economic Growth 28 The Challenge of Economic Development 29 Exchange Rates and the International Financial System 30 Open-Economy Macroeconomics Part Seven: Unemployment, Inflation, and Economic Policy 31 Unemployment and the Foundations of Aggregate Supply 32 Ensuring Price Stability 33 The Warring Schools of Macroeconomics 34 Policies for Growth and Stability

By Campbell R. McConnell, University of Nebraska, Emeritus and Stanley L. Brue, Pacific Lutheran University 2005 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298271-8 / MHID: 0-07-298271-3 (with Discover Econ Online and Paul Solman Videos) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124914-0 / MHID: 0-07-124914-1 [IE]

Website: http://www.mcconnell16.com McConnell-Brue's Principles of Economics, 16e is the best-selling Principles of Economics textbook and has been teaching students in a clear, unbiased way for 40 years. The 15th edition grew market share because of its clear and careful treatment of principles of economics concepts, its balanced coverage, and its patient explanations. More students have learned their principles of Economics from McConnell-Brue than any other text; 12 million of them. The 16th edition is a revision that delivers a tight and modern book. We are also please to introduce an exciting fully-integrated software system called DiscoverEcon featuring Paul Solman: DiscoverEcon software, brand-new videos that teach economic concepts in a fun and engaging way, and more, all in one convenient software package. CONTENTS

Part One: An Introduction to Economics and the Economy 1 The Nature and Method of Economics 2 The Economizing Problem 3 Individual Markets: Demand and Supply 3Web Applications and Extension of Supply and Demand Analysis [Internet only chapter] 4 The Market System 5 The U.S. Economy: Private and Public Sectors 6 The United States in the Global Economy Part Two: Macroeconomic Measurement and Basic Concepts 7 Measuring Domestic Output and National Income 8 Introduction to Economic Growth and Instability 9 Basic Macroeconomic Relationships Part Three: Macroeconomic Models and Fiscal Policy 10 The Aggregate Expenditures Model 11 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply 12 Fiscal Policy Part Four: Money, Banking, and Monetary Policy 13 Money and Banking 14 How Banks and Thrifts Create Money 15 Monetary Policy Part Five: Long-Run Perspectives and Macroeconomic Debates 16 Extending the Analysis of Aggregate Supply 17 Economic Growth 18 Deficits, Surpluses, and the Public Debt 19 Disputes over Macro Theory and Policy Part Six: Microeconomics of Product Markets 20 Elasticity of Demand and Supply 21 Consumer Behavior and Utility Maximization 22 The Costs of Production 23 Pure Competition 24 Pure Monopoly 25 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly 26 Technology, R&D, and Efficiency Part Seven: Microeconomics of Resource Markets 27 The Demand for Resources 28 Wage Determination 29 Rent, Interest, and Profit Part Eight: Microeconomics of Government 30 Government and Market Failure 31 Public Choice Theory and the Economics of Taxation Part Nine: Microeconomic Issues and Policies 32 Antitrust Policy and Regulation 33 Agriculture: Economics and Policy 34 Income Inequality and Poverty 35 Labor Market Institutions and Issues: Unionism, Discrimination, Immigration 36 Labor Market institutions and Issues Part Ten: International Economics and the World Economy 37 International Trade 38 Exchange Rates, the Balance of Payments, and Trade Deficits 39 Web The Economics of Developing Countries [Internet only chapter] 40Web Transition Economies: Russia and China [Internet only chapter]

COMPLIMENTARY COPIES

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog.

Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com

16

Economics

Principles of Economics - Software

International Edition

THE POWER OF MACROECONOMICS CD-ROM

By Peter Navarro, University of California - Irvine 2000 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-238087-3 / MHID: 0-07-238087-X (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118311-6 / MHID: 0-07-118311-6 [IE]

Principles of Economics ­ Supplementary

NEW

ANNUAL EDITIONS: ECONOMICS 34rd Edition

By Don Cole, Drew University 2007 (October 2006) / 240 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352843-4 / MHID: 0-07-352843-9

Website: www. powerofeconomic.com CONTENTS

Lecture 1. An Overview of Modern Macroeconomics Lecture 2. The Aggregate Supply - Aggregate Demand Model and the Classic-Keynesian Debate Lecture 3. The Keynesian Model and Fiscal Policy Lecture 4. The Federal Reserve and Monetary Policy Lecture 5. Unemployment, Inflation, and Stagflation Lecture 6. The Warring Schools of Macroeconomics Lecture 7. Economic Growth and Productivity Lecture 8. Budget Deficits and the Public Debt Lecture 9. International Trade and Protectionism Lecture 10. Exchange Rates, the Balance of Payments, and Trade Deficits Lecture 11. The Economics of Developing Countries and Transition Economies

McGraw-Hill Duskin Title

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/text-data-catalog/0073528439.mhtml This thirty-fourth of ANNUAL EDITIONS: ECONOMICS provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selected from the best of the public press. Organizational features include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and an instructor's resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.

International Edition

THE POWER OF MICROECONOMICS CD-ROM

By Peter Navarro, University of California - Irvine 2000 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-228314-3 / MHID: 0-07-228314-9 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116621-8 / MHID: 0-07-116621-1 [IE]

ECONOMICS IS EVERYWHERE 2nd Edition

By Daniel S. Hamermesh, University of Texas at Austin 2006 / 264 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298260-2 / MHID: 0-07-298260-8

Website: www.powerofeconomics.com CONTENTS

1. An Introduction to Macroeconomics 2. Supply, Demand, and Equilibrium 3. Demand and Consumer Behavior 4. Supply and Production Theory 5. Perfect Competition 6. Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition 7. Oligopoly and Strategic Behavior 8. Land and Rent 9. The Labor Market and Wage Determination 10. The Capital Market, Interest, and Profit 11. Income and Wealth, Poverty and Discrimination 12. Public Goods and Externalities 13. Government Taxation and Expenditures and Public Choice Theory 14. International Trade and Protectionism

The purpose of Economics Is Everywhere by Daniel S. Hamermesh is to illustrate the wide range of daily activities to which an economic way of thinking can be applied. The 400 vignettes were inspired by news stories, television shows, movies, music, family events, and other facets of daily life. Some vignettes were suggested by students or colleagues. The book is organized into three parts to follow the topical arrangement of a typical introductory microeconomic textbook. These vignettes apply what students learn in their introductory microeconomics textbook. They focus on the student's ability to apply formal analysis with myriad of examples that come out of their daily activities. After studying this applications/issues book, students will be able to read a newspaper or magazine and understand their own daily activities in a new, economic way--and as a result, understand the economics at work around them. CONTENTS

Introduction. Thinking About Economics Everywhere / Part I. TradeOffs, Demand and Supply, and the Consumer Chapter 1. Trade-offs and Opportunity Cost Chapter 2. Demand and Supply Curves Chapter 3. Demand and Supply Together--Quantity and Price in Unrestricted Markets Chapter 4. Demand and Supply--Quantity and Price in Restricted Markets Chapter 5. The Consumer--Elasticity and Incentives Chapter 6. The Consumer--How to Choose /Tips on Hunting for Economics Everywhere in Part I / Part II. Costs, Production, and Markets Chapter 7. Cost and Production Chapter 8. The Firm in the Short Run--Fixed and Variable Costs Chapter 9. Competitive Markets in the Long Run Chapter 10. Competitive Markets--Responses to Shocks Chapter 11. Social Optima Chapter 12. Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition Chapter 13. Price Discrimination Chapter 14. Oligopoly (including Game Theory) / Tips on Hunting for Economics Everywhere in Part II / Part III. Input Markets, the Public Sector, and International Markets Chapter 15. Present Value and Discounting Chapter 16. Wage Differences Chapter 17. Labor Market Behavior and Poverty Chapter 18. Externalities, Public Goods, and Property Rights Chapter 19. Taxes and Public Expenditures

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected]

Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg

17

Economics

Chapter 20. International Economics / Tips on Hunting for Economics Everywhere in Part III / Glossary / Index (combined)

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF EASY OUTLINE OF PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS

By Dominick Salvatore, Fordham University in New York and Eugene Diulio 2003 / 144 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-139873-2 / MHID: 0-07-139873-2

THE ECONOMICS OF WAR

A Schaum Publication

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Introduction to Economics / Chapter 2: Demand, Supply, and Equilibrium / Chapter 3: Unemployment, Inflation, and National Income / Chapter 4: Consumption, Investment, Net Exports, and Government Expenditures / Chapter 5: Traditional Keynesian Approach to Equilibrium Output / Chapter 6: Fiscal Policy / Chapter 7: Money, Banking, and the Federal Reserve / Chapter 8: Monetary Policy / Chapter 9: Economic Growth and Productivity / Chapter 10: International Trade and Finance / Chapter 11: Theory of Consumer Demand and Utility / Chapter 12: Production Costs / Chapter 13: Perfect Competition / Chapter 14: Monopoly / Chapter 15: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly / Chapter 16: Demand for Economic Resources / Chapter 17: Pricing of Wages, Rent, Interest, and Profits / Index

By Paul Poast, Ohio State University 2006 / 240 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313399-7 / MHID: 0-07-313399-X

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/poast1e With the costs of war dominating our economic news and discussions, Paul Poast's new text is a needed, relevant and thought-provoking new offering. Written in an extremely accessible manner, the book is an interesting addition to a course at any level. The book's low price makes it a perfect complement to a Principles text, a Social Issues book, or any upper-level course on war or international security into which an instructor would like to add some economic data or theory. CONTENTS

UNIT I: The Economic Impact of War Chapter 1: The War Economy in Theory 1.1 Introduction 1.2 The Iron Law of War 1.3 Four Point Scheme for Evaluating the Economic Effects of War 1.4 Key Points Chapter 2: The War Economy in Reality: Case Studies of Major Wars 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Cases That Support the Iron Law of War (World War I, World War Ii, and Korea) 2.3 Cases That Do Not Support the Iron Law of War (Vietnam, 1991 Persian Gulf, and Iraq) 2.4 Key Points UNIT II: Modern Military Economics Chapter 3: Defense Spending and the Economy 3.1 Introduction 3.2 U.S. Military Expenditures 3.3 U.S. Military Expenditures and Macroeconomic Performance 3.4 Global Military Expenditures 3.5 Exploring the Causes of Militarization 3.6 Key Points Chapter 4: Military Labor 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Comparing Military Manpower 4.3 All Volunteer Force (AVF) v. Conscription 4.4 Case Study: The Vietnam Transition from Conscription to an AVF 4.5 U.S. Military Compensation: Is It Enough? 4.6 Private Military Forces/Companies (PMF/PMC) 4.7 Key Points Chapter 5: Weapons Procurement 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Overview of the Arms Market 5.3 The Domestic Weapons Market 5.4 The Global Weapons Market 5.5 Case Study: The Joint Strike Fighter 5.6 Key Points UNIT III: The Economics of Modern Security Threats Chapter 6: Civil Conflicts in the Developing World 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Economic Consequences of Civil Wars 6.3 Economic Causes of Civil Wars 6.4 Case Studies of Conflict And Underdevelopment in Africa 6.5 Peace Operations: An Economically Inefficient Response? 6.6 Key Points Chapter 7: Terrorism 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Definition of Terrorism 7.3 Incidents and Trends in International Terrorism 7.4 Is Terrorism Rational? 7.5 Terrorist Financing 7.6 Economic Impact of Terrorism 7.7 Key Points Chapter 8: Weapons of Mass Destruction Proliferation 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Overview of Biological, Chemical, and Nuclear Weapons 8.3 Basics of Constructing Nuclear Weapons Material 8.4 Demand for Nuclear Weapons 8.5 Supply of Nuclear Weapons 8.6 Treaties: An Effective Response? 8.7 Key Points

International Edition

A GUIDE TO THE WEB FOR ECONOMICS

By D. Scott Bellamy and Edward P. Kardas of Southern Arkansas University 2000 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-236208-4 / MHID: 0-07-236208-1 (CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118369-7 / MHID: 0-07-118369-8 [IE]

Website: www.mhhe.com/economics/bellamy/ CONTENTS

1. Locating Web Resources 2. Evaluating Web Resources 3. General Resources in Economics 4. Fundamentals of Economics 5. The Market System 6. Macroeconomic Measures 7. AD/AS and Schools of Economic Thought 8. Fiscal Policy 9. Money and the Federal Reserve System 10. International Economics 11. Taxes, Deficits, and Debt 12. Consumer Choice 13. Elasticities14. Firms, Production and Cost 15. Product Markets 16. Factor Markets 17. Market Failure 18. Public Choice

International Edition

EXPERIMENTS WITH ECONOMIC PRINCIPLES Microeconomics, 2nd Edition

ECONOMICS STUDY WORKBOOK 8th Edition

By David Begg, Principal of Tanaka Business School-Imperial College, University of London and Damian Ward, Bradford University 2005 / 364 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710780-2 / MHID: 0-07-710780-2

By Theodore C. Bergstrom, University of California-Santa Barbara and John H Miller, Carnegie Mellon University 2000 / 448 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-229518-4 / MHID: 0-07-229518-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116172-5 / MHID: 0-07-116172-4 [IE]

McGraw-Hill UK Title

This student study guide supports Begg, Economics 8th edition. It gives students a chance to apply their knowledge to a large selection of problems and to test their understanding of what they have read.

Website: www.econ.ucsb.edu/~tedh/eep/eep.html CONTENTS

I Competitive Markets 1. Supply and Demand 2. Shifting Supply and Demand II Market Intervention and Public Policy 3. A Sales Tax 4. Prohibition 5. A Minimum Wage III. Imperfect Markets 6. Externalities 7. Monopolies and Cartels IV Firms and Technology 8. Entry and Exit 9. Network Externalities 10. Entry and Exit 11. Measuring Productivity 12. Comparative Advantage V Information, Auctions, and Bargaining 13. Adverse selection 14. Auctions 15. Fundamental Concepts VI Essential Economic Concepts

18

Economics

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF MACROECONOMICS 3rd Edition

By Eugene Diulio 1999 / 333 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-017053-7 / MHID: 0-07-017053-3

Principles of Macroeconomics - Textbooks

NEW

MACROECONOMICS 8th Edition

A Schaum Publication

CONTENTS

1. Introduction to Macroeconomic Analysis. 2. Measures of Output, Prices, and Employment. 3. Output in the Short and Long Run. 4. Models of Spending Equilibrium. 5. The IS-LM Framework. 6. Monetary and Fiscal Policy in a Closed Economy. 7. Monetary and Fiscal Policy in an Open Economy. 8. Schedules of Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. 9. Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand Analysis. 10. Aggregate Supply, Aggregate Demand, and Inflation. 11. Economic Growth. 12. The Supply of and Demand for Money. 13. Consumption. 14. Theories of Investment.

By Stephen Slavin, Union College 2008 (September 2006) / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328148-3 / MHID: 0-07-328148-4

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/slavin8e Steve Slavin's lively and comprehensive Macroeconomics has a student-friendly, step-by-step approach; value pricing; and a built-in Workbook/Study Guide. Instructors and students like the author's humorous anecdotes, direct language, and easy conversational style. The text encourages active rather than passive reading. NEW TO THIS EDITION

A Chapter Issues section at the end of each chapter gives practical application to at least one of the concepts covered in the chapter. New discussions have been added to provide yet more practical application to the overall text. The discussion of comparative advantage in Chapter 18 has been written for simplicity and clarity, making it easier for students to learn.

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS 2nd Edition

By Dominick Salvatore and Eugene A. Diulio 1996 / 368 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-054629-5 / MHID: 0-07-054629-0

A Schaum Publication

CONTENTS

1. Introduction to Economics. 2. The Economic Problem. 3. Demand, Supply, and Equilibrium. 4. Introduction to Macroeconomics. 5. Unemployment, Inflation, and National Income. 6. Consumption, Investment, and Net Exports. 7. Keynesian Approach to Equilibrium Output. 8. Fiscal Policy. 9. Money and Banking. 10. The Federal Reserve and the Money Supply. 11. Monetary and Fiscal Policy. 12. Inflation, Unemployment, Deficits, and Debt. 13. Economic Growth and Productivity. 14. Demand, Supply and Elasticity. 15. The Theory of Consumer Demand and Utility. 16. Costs of Production. 17. Price and Output. 18. Perfect Competition. 19. Price and Output: Monopoly. 20. Price and Output: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 21. Production and the Demand for Economic Resources. 22. Wage Determination.23. Rent, Interest, and Profits.

FEATURES

Value Price: Slavin's low price continues to make it one of the best values on the market. It's approximately $25 less than other principles texts. Fun Writing Style: The author's humorous writing style and historical approach to economics are a hit with students who might otherwise find the subject dry or intimidating. Steve Slavin is an experienced and respected author--in addition to having over 30 years experience teaching the principles course, he has written 11 other math and economics books. Streamlined Text: The streamlined basis of the text has been retained from the previous version, and the more obscure passages have been simplified. Special In-Text Boxes: Dozens of self-help boxes anticipate and answer frequently asked questions. The book reviews math that students should have learned before college. The better prepared students can skip this material, but this review enables all students to start on a level playing field in the course. Many advanced work boxes provide more challenging material, giving adventurous students an opportunity to learn and master difficult material. This optional material can be easily skipped by instructors.

COMPLIMENTARY COPIES

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog.

CONTENTS

1 A Brief Economic History of the United States. 2 Resource Utilization. 3 Supply and Demand. 4 The Mixed Economy. 5 The Household-Consumption Sector. 6 The Business-Investment Sector. 7 The Government Sector. 8 The Export-Import Sector. 9 Gross Domestic Product. 10 Economic Fluctuations, Unemployment, and Inflation. 11 Classical and Keynesian Economics. 12 Fiscal Policy and National Debt. 13 Money and Banking. 14 The Federal Reserve and Monetary Policy. 15 A Century Of Economic Policy. 16 Economic Growth and Productivity. 17 Income Distribution and Poverty. 18 International Trade. 19 International Finance

Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com

1

Economics

International Edition

NEW

rates. We also discuss the effects of changes in asset prices (especially stocks and houses) on aggregate demand. Simpler Presentation of Exchange Rates: We use supply and demand curves to illustrate the determination of nominal exchange rates before we introduce the real exchange rate and purchasing-power-parity. Additional Material on China: At its current rate of growth the Chinese economy may become the largest economy in the world within the next generation. In this edition we expand our discussion of China in the world economy. We discuss the determinants of its success and its management of its exchange rate. New Material on the Acceleration of Productivity Growth: The productivity slowdown of 1973-1995 has been followed by surprisingly strong productivity growth. We present and discuss the reasons for this acceleration. Updated Discussion of Saving and Investment: In addition to emphasizing the importance of public and private saving and the relationship between the budget deficit, national saving, and capital flows, we discuss the recently divergent trends in business and household saving.

PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICS 3rd Edition

By Robert H. Frank, Cornell University-Ithaca and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University 2007 (January 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323061-0 / MHID: 0-07-323061-8 (with Discover Econ Code Card) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110820-1 / MHID: 0-07-110820-3 [IE with Discover Econ Code Card]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/frankbernanke3 In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign languages, and other fields have achieved dramatic pedagogical gains by abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach in favor of attempting to teach a short list of core principles in depth. Two well-respected writers and researchers, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory economics. Although recent editions of a few other texts have paid lip service to this new approach, Frank/Bernanke is by far the best thought out and best executed principles text in this mold. Avoiding excessive reliance on formal mathematical derivations, it presents concepts intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. The authors introduce a well-articulated short list of core principles and reinforcing them by illustrating and applying each in numerous contexts. Students are periodically asked to apply these principles to answer related questions and exercises. The text also encourages students to become "Economic Naturalists," people who employ basic economic principles to understand and explain what they observe in the world around them. An economic naturalist understands, for example, that infant safety seats are required in cars but not in airplanes because the marginal cost of space to accommodate these seats is typically zero in cars but often hundreds of dollars in airplanes. Such examples engage student interest while teaching them to see each feature of their economic landscape as the reflection of an implicit or explicit cost-benefit calculation. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Expanded Discussion of Macroeconomic Policy: The revised monetary policy reaction function we introduce in Chapter 27 is a more realistic description of how the Fed actually conducts monetary policy and clarifies the Taylor rule. In Chapter 28 we use this policy reaction function to help students distinguish between a move along the aggregate demand curve and a shift in the aggregate demand curve resulting from a change in monetary policy. In a new Chapter 29, we provide a more complete analysis of the interaction between fiscal and monetary policy, illustrating the crucial role of the central bank in any long-run inflation. We also discuss how enhanced credibility can help to anchor inflationary expectations and explain the contributions of central bank independence, inflation targeting, and central bank reputation. In the last section of Chapter 29 we expand our discussion of the real-world difficulties in conducting macroeconomic policy. More Patient Presentation of Models: In Chapter 26 we explain the effects of tax cuts on planned aggregate expenditure more carefully. In an optional box we also solve a simple Keynesian model, leaving the full model in the appendix, as in the second edition. In the diagrams in Chapter 28 we include the transitional short-run aggregate supply lines to illustrate how the short-run aggregate supply line shifts when actual output deviates from potential output. Expanded Discussion of Supply-Side Economics: Most economists agree that changes in marginal tax rates can affect both aggregate demand and aggregate supply, but they disagree on the size of the effects. In Chapter 28 we describe this controversy in greater detail and present both the theoretical and empirical evidence of the effects of changes in marginal tax rates on aggregate supply. Greater Attention to Asset Prices: In Chapter 21 we provide a clearer explanation of the inverse relationship between bond prices and interest

FEATURES

An Emphasis on Core Principles: A few core principles do most of the work in economics. By focusing on these principles, the text assures that students leave the course with a deep mastery of them. In contrast, traditional encyclopedic texts so overwhelm students with detail that they often leave the course with little useful working knowledge at all. Economic Naturalism Introduced: The authors' ultimate goal is to produce "economic naturalists"--people who see each human action as the result of an implicit or explicit cost-benefit calculation. The economic naturalist sees mundane details of ordinary existence in a new light and becomes actively engaged in the attempt to understand them. o Why don't auto manufacturers make cars without heaters? o Why are whales, but not chickens, threatened with extinction? o Why do movie theaters give student discounts on the price of admission but not on the price of popcorn? Active Learning Stressed: The only way to lean to hit an overhead smash in tennis or to speak a foreign language is through repeated practice. The same is true for learning economics. Thus, the authors consistently introduce new ideas in the context of simple examples and then follow them with applications showing how they work in familiar settings. And frequently, the text poses exercises that both test and reinforce the understanding of these ideas. The end-of-chapter questions and problems are carefully crafted to help students internalize and extend core concepts. Students are prepared to apply the important concepts to solve "economic riddles" drawn from the real world. Well-Known Authors: Robert Frank and Ben Bernanke are renowned experts in their fields (micro and macro, respectively). Frank's research has looked at rivalry and cooperation in economic and social behavior. He is the author of a best-selling intermediate economics text, Microeconomics and Behavior, (McGraw-Hill/Irwin), and has published such award-winning books as The Winner-Take-All-Society and Luxury Fever. Bernanke is the co-author of a best-selling intermediate macroeconomics text and has done significant research on the causes of the Great Depression, the role of financial markets and institutions in the business cycle, and measuring the effects of monetary policy on the economy. He was a member of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors for more than 2 years and is now the Chairman of the President's Council of Economic Advisers. Modern Macroeconomics: Recent developments have renewed interest in cyclical fluctuations while still paying attention to such long-run issues as growth, productivity, the evolution of real wages, and capital formation. Thus, we offer the following organization: A 5-chapter treatment of long-run issues prior to an analysis of short-run fluctuations followed by a modern treatment of short-term fluctuations and stabilization policy, emphasizing the important distinction between short- and long-run behavior of the economy. Consistent with both media reporting and recent research on the central bank reaction function, we treat the interest rate rather than the money supply as the instrument of Fed policy. The analysis of aggregate demand and aggregate supply

20

Economics

relates output to inflation, rather than to the price level, sidestepping the necessity of a separate derivation of the link between the output gap and inflation. This book places a heavy emphasis on globalization, starting with an analysis of its effects on real wage inequality and progressing to such issues as the benefits of trade, the causes and effects of protectionism, the role of capital flows in domestic capital formation, the link between exchange rates and monetary policy, and the sources of speculative attacks on currencies. Web site: Developed by Scott Simkins of North Carolina A & T State University, an expert in the growing field of Economics education on the World Wide Web, the ambitious web site contains a host of features that will enhance the principles classroom, including dynamic graphs, video lectures, e-mail updates, microeconomic experiments, current news articles, information about the text, an eLearning session, and more.

MICROECONOMICS DEMYSTIFIED

By Craig Depken 2006 (November 2005) / 304 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145911-2 / MHID: 0-07-145911-1

A Professional Reference Title

Microeconomics Demystified features a clear and easy-tounderstand presentation of the concepts and principles of microeconomics, with generous applications and examples. This self-teaching guide comes complete with key points, background information, quizzes at the end of each chapter, and even a final exam. Simple enough for beginners but challenging enough for advanced students, this is a lively and entertaining brush-up, introductory text, or classroom supplement.

CONTENTS

Part 1 Introduction. 1. Thinking Like an Economist. 2. Comparative Advantage: The Basis for Exchange. 3. Supply and Demand: An Introduction. Part 2 Macroeconomics: Issues and Data. 4. Macroeconomics: The Bird's-Eye View of the Economy. 5. Measuring Economic Activity: GDP and Unemployment. 6. Measuring the Price Level and Inflation. Part 3 The Economy in the Long Run. 7. Economic Growth, Productivity, and Living Standards. 8. Workers, Wages, and Unemployment in the Modern Economy. 9. Saving and Capital Formation. 10. Money and the Federal Reserve. 11. Financial Markets and International Capital Flow. Part 4 The Economy in the Short Run. 12. Short-term Economic Fluctuations: An Introduction. 13. Spending and Output in the Short Run. 14. Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of the Fed. 15. Inflation, Aggregate Supply, and Aggregate Demand. 16. The Practice and Pitfalls of Macroeconomic Policy. Part 5 The International Economy. 17. International Trade. 18. Exchange Rates and the Open Economy

NEW

MACROECONOMICS 8th Edition

By John Jackson and Ron McIver, University of South Australia 2006 (September 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471698-4 / MHID: 0-07-471698-0

McGraw-Hill Australia Title

CONTENTS

Part 1, Introduction to Economics Ch 1, The nature and method of economics /Appendix: Graphs and their meaning Ch 2, The economising problem Ch 3, Demand and supply Part 2, Macroeconomic Activity and Fiscal Policy Ch 4, Australia's national and international accounts/Appendix: Other national accounting concepts Ch 5, The macroeconomic environment Ch 6, Aggregate expenditures model and multipliers/Appendix: Derivation of the multipliers Ch 7, Aggregate demand and aggregate supply Ch 8, Fiscal policy and the public debate Part 3, Monetary Policy and Economic Stability Ch 9, Money, banking and the financial system Ch 10, How banks create money Ch 11, Monetary policy Ch 12, Macroeconomic ideas--evolution and debates Ch 13, Inflation Ch 14, Aggregate supply and the labour market Part 4, Growth and Development Ch 15, The economics of growth Ch 16, Growth and the developing countries Part 5, Exchange Rates and the International Monetary System Ch 17, Models of the exchange rate Ch 18, The international monetary system

MACROECONOMICS 6th Edition

By David Colander, Middlebury College 2006 / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297885-8 / MHID: 0-07-297885-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322295-0 / MHID: 0-07-322295-X (with Paul Solman Videos Code Card)

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/colander6 Written in an informal colloquial style, this student-friendly Principles of Macroeconomics textbook does not sacrifice intellectual depth in its quest for accessibility. The author's primary concern is to instill "economic sensibility" in the student. Colander emphasizes the intellectual and historical context to which the economic models are applied. This new edition offers improvements to this established and respected text including special Questions from Alternate Perspectives end-of-chapter questions that facilitate class discussion of differing schools of thought in the discipline, and access to over 250 minutes of new videos from Paul Solman of the Lehrer NewsHour. CONTENTS

I: Introduction: Thinking Like An Economist Chapter 1: Economics and Economic Reasoning Chapter 2: Trade, Trade-off's and Government Policy Chapter 3: The Evolving U.S. Economy in Perspective Chapter 4: Supply and Demand Chapter 5: Using Supply and Demand Chapter 6: Economic Growth, Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation Chapter 7: National Income Accounting II: The Macroeconomic Framework Chapter 8: Growth, Productivity, and the Wealth of Nations Chapter 9: Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and Modern Macroeconomics Chapter 10: The Multiplier Model III: Money, Inflation, and Monetary Policy Chapter 11: Money, Banking, and the Financial Sector Chapter 12: Monetary Policy and the Debate about Macro Policy Chapter 13: Inflation and Its Relationship to Unemployment and Growth IV: Macro Policy in Perspective Chapter 14: Aggregate Demand Policy in Perspective Chapter 15: Politics, Deficits,and Debt Chapter 16: Macro Policies in Developing Countries V: International Policy Issues Chapter 17: International Trade Policy, Comparative Advantage, and Outsourcing Chapter 18: International Financial Policy Chapter 19: Macro Policy in a Global Setting / Glossary / Colloquial Glossary / Index

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected]

Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg

21

Economics

THE MACRO ECONOMY TODAY 10th Edition

By Bradley R Schiller, American University 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313783-4 / MHID: 0-07-313783-9 (with Solman Videos DVD)

issues in macroeconomics, after which our Australian adaptation moves away from the more traditional structure of the US book, covering short-run macroeconomics first and then moving logically into the long run. The final two parts of the book cover open economy macroeconomics ­ so important to our global region ­ and conclude with a new capstone chapter. CONTENTS

Part I: Core Principles of Economics Chapter 1: Economics and the market Chapter 2: Comparative advantage: the basis for trade Part II: Issues in Macroeconomics Chapter 3: Measuring macroeconomic performance: output and prices Chapter 4: Measuring macroeconomic performance: savings and wealth Chapter 5: Measuring macroeconomic performance: unemployment and the labour market Part III: Short-run Macroeconomics: The Analysis of the Business Cycle Chapter 6: Shortterm economic fluctuations Chapter 7: Spending and output in the short run Chapter 8: Money, prices and the Reserve Bank Chapter 9: The Reserve Bank and the economy Chapter 10: Inflation and aggregate supply Part IV: Long-run Macroeconomics: The Analysis of Economic Growth Chapter 11: The economy in the long run: an introduction to economic growth Chapter 12: The production function approach to understanding growth Chapter 13: Savings, capital formation and comparative economic growth Part V: Open Economy Macroeconomics Chapter 14: An introduction to the open economy Chapter 15: Exchange rates and the open economy Chapter 16: The balance of payments ­ net export and international capital flows Part VI : Concluding Thoughts Chapter 17: Macroeconomics: what have we learnt?

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/schiller10 Brad Schiller's text, The Macroeconomy Today, 10/e, is noted for three great strengths: readability, policy orientation, and pedagogy. His accessible writing style engages students and brings some of the excitement of domestic and global economic news into the classroom. Schiller emphasizes how policymakers must choose between government intervention and market reliance to resolve the core issues of what, how, and for whom to produce. This strategic choice is highlighted throughout the full range of micro, macro, and international issues. Every chapter ends with a policy issue that emphasizes the markets vs. government dilemma. And Schiller packs his chapters with the facts of economic life--real stories and applications, not fables. This is a book that teaches economics in a relevant context with careful pedagogy. It is also the only principles text that presents all macro theory in the single consistent context of the AS/AD framework. Schiller 10e is for students motivated by real-world policy issues who want to become economically literate. This is a book students actually READ. Schiller is also known for its cutting-edge and current coverage of today's issues. CONTENTS

Part 1 BASIC CONCEPTS Chapter 1 Economics: The Core Issues Appendix: Using Graphs Chapter 2 The U.S. Economy: A Global View Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Chapter 4 The Public Sector Part 2 MEASURING MACRO OUTCOMES Chapter 5 National-Income Accounting Chapter 6 Unemployment Chapter 7 Inflation Part 3 CYCLICAL INSTABILITY Chapter 8 The Business Cycle Chapter 9 Aggregate Demand Appendix: The Keynesian Cross Chapter 10 Self-Adjustment or Instability? Part 4 FISCAL POLICY LEVERS Chapter 11 Fiscal Policy Chapter 12 Deficits, Surpluses, and Debts Part 5 MONETARY POLICY OPTIONS Chapter 13 Money and Banks Chapter 14 The Federal Reserve System Chapter 15 Monetary Policy Part 6 SUPPLY-SIDE OPTIONS Chapter 16 Supply-Side Policy: Short-Run Options Chapter 17 Growth and Productivity: Long-Run Possibilities Part 7 POLICY CONSTRAINTS Chapter 18 Global Macro Chapter 19 Theory and Reality Part 8 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS Chapter 20 International Trade Chapter 21 International Finance / Glossary / Index / Student Problem Sets

International Edition

MACROECONOMICS 18th Edition

By Paul Samuelson, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and William Nordhaus, Yale University 2005 / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287206-4 / MHID: 0-07-287206-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111188-1 / MHID: 0-07-111188-3 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/economics/ samuelson18e Samuelson's text was first published in 1948, and it immediately became the authority for the principles of economics courses. The book continues to be the standard-bearer for principles courses, and this revision continues to be a clear, accurate, and interesting introduction to modern economics principles. Bill Nordhaus is now the primary author of this text, and he has revised the book to be as current and relevant as ever. CONTENTS

PART ONE: BASIC CONCEPTS 1 The Fundamentals of Economics Appendix 1 How to Read Graphs 2 Markets and Government in a Modern Economy 3 Basic Elements of Supply and Demand PART TWO: MACROECONOMICS: ECONOMIC GROWTH AND BUSINESS CYCLES Chapter 4 Overview of Macroeconomics Appendix 4 Macroeconomic Data Chapter 5 Measuring Economic Activity Chapter 6 Consumption and Investment Chapter 7 Business Fluctuations and the Theory of Aggregate Demand Chapter 8 The Multiplier Model Chapter 9 Money, Banking, and Financial Markets Chapter 10 Central Banking and Monetary Policy PART THREE: ECONOMIC GROWTH AND MACROECONOMIC POLICY Chapter 11 The Process of Economic Growth Chapter 12 The Challenge of Economic Development Chapter 13 Exchange Rates and the International Financial System Chapter 14 Open-Economy Macroeconomics PART FOUR: UNEMPLOYMENT, INFLATION, AND ECONOMIC POLICY Chapter 15 Unemployment and the Foundations of Aggregate Supply Chapter 16 Ensuring Price Stability Chapter 17 The Warring Schools of Macroeconomics Chapter 18 Policies for Growth and Stability

PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICS

By Ben Bernanke, Princeton University, Nilss Olekalns, University of Melbourne and Robert H Frank, Cornell University 2005 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471480-5 / MHID: 0-07-471480-5

McGraw-Hill Australia Title

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/au/bernanke This new Australian adaptation is based on the highly successful US Principles of Macroeconomics 2e, by Robert Frank and Ben Bernanke. The authors believe that the best way to acquire any skill ­ an overhead smash or a new language ­ is through repeated practice and the same active learning approach is used in this book. New ideas and concepts are introduced through simple examples which are repeated and reinforced through illustrations, examples and background notes. Students are challenged to think critically and analytically, applying core economic principles to each scenario. The result is a text that is motivating to students, effective and enjoyable to teach and which provides an exciting first course in macroeconomics. This Australian edition includes a wealth of new data, research, background and examples pertinent to the region. New chapters also cover important regional issues. The first two parts of the book recap key economic principles and examine some of the

22

Economics

International Edition

MACROECONOMICS 7th Edition

FEATURES

Value Price: Slavin's low price continues to make it one of the best values on the market. It's approximately $25 less than other principles texts. Fun Writing Style: The author's humorous writing style and historical approach to economics are a hit with students who might otherwise find the subject dry or intimidating. Steve Slavin is an experienced and respected author--in addition to having over 30 years experience teaching the principles course, he has written 11 other math and economics books. Streamlined Text: The streamlined basis of the text has been retained from the previous version, and the more obscure passages have been simplified. Special In-Text Boxes: Dozens of self-help boxes anticipate and answer frequently asked questions. The book reviews math that students should have learned before college. The better prepared students can skip this material, but this review enables all students to start on a level playing field in the course. Many advanced work boxes provide more challenging material, giving adventurous students an opportunity to learn and master difficult material. This optional material can be easily skipped by instructors.

By John Jackson, RMIT University, Melbourne and Ron Mclver, University of South Australia 2003 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471323-5 / MHID: 0-07-471323-X (with Online Learning Center) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124264-6 / MHID: 0-07-124264-3 [IE with Online Learning Center]

McGraw-Hill Australia Title

Website: www.mhhe.com/jackson_macro7e CONTENTS

Part One: Introduction to Economics Chapter 1 The nature and method of economics Chapter 2 The economising problem Chapter 3 The mechanics of individual prices: demand and supply Part Two: Macroeconomic Activity and Fiscal Policy Chapter 4 Australia's national and international accounts Chapter 5 Macroeconomic instability: unemployment, inflation and the current account deficit Chapter 6 The aggregate expenditures model Chapter 7 Multipliers, government budgets and net exports Chapter 8 Aggregate demand and aggregate supply Chapter 9 Fiscal policy and the public debt Part Three: Monetary Policy and Economic Stability Chapter 10 Money, banking and the financial system Chapter 11 How banks create money Chapter 12 The Reserve Bank of Australia and monetary policy Chapter 13 Macroeconomic debates Chapter 14 Inflation Chapter 15 Aggregate supply and the labour market Part Four: Growth and Development Chapter 16 The economics of growth Chapter 17 Growth and the less developed countries Part Five: Exchange Rates and the International Monetary System Chapter 18 Models of the exchange rate Chapter 19 The international monetary system

CONTENTS

1 A Brief Economic History of the United States 2 Resource Utilization 3 Supply and Demand 4 The Mixed Economy 5 Demand, Supply, and Equilibrium 6 Elasticities of Supply and Demand 7 Theory of Consumer Behavior 8 Cost 9 Profit, Loss, and Perfect Competition 10 Monopoly 11 Monopolistic Competition 12 Oligopoly 13 Corporate Mergers and Antitrust 14 Demand in the Factor Market 15 Labor Unions 16 Labor Markets and Wage Rates 17 Rent, Interest, and Profit 18 Income Distribution and Poverty 19 International Trade 20 International Finance

Principles of Microeconomics - Textbooks

NEW

MICROECONOMICS 8th Edition

International Edition

NEW

PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICS 3rd Edition

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University 2007 (November 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323060-3 / MHID: 0-07-323060-X (with Discover Econ Code Card) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110657-3 / MHID: 0-07-110657-X [IE with Discover Econ Code Card]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/frankbernanke3 In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign languages, and other fields have achieved dramatic pedagogical gains by abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach in favor of attempting to teach a short list of core principles in depth. Two well-respected writers and researchers, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory economics. Although recent editions of a few other texts have paid lip service to this new approach, Frank/Bernanke is by far the best thought out and best executed principles text in this mold. Avoiding excessive reliance on formal mathematical derivations, it presents concepts intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. The authors introduce a well-articulated short list of core principles and reinforcing them by illustrating and applying each in numerous contexts. Students are periodically asked to apply these principles to answer related questions, exercises, and problems. The text also encourages students to become "Economic Naturalists," people who employ basic economic principles to understand and explain what they observe in the world around them. An economic naturalist understands, for example, that infant safety seats are required in cars but not in

By Stephen Slavin, Union College 2008 (September 2006) / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328147-6 / MHID: 0-07-328147-6

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/slavin8e Steve Slavin's lively and comprehensive Microeconomics has a student-friendly, step-by-step approach; value pricing; and a built-in Workbook/Study Guide. Instructors and students like the author's humorous anecdotes, direct language, and easy conversational style. The text encourages active rather than passive reading. NEW TO THIS EDITION

A Chapter Issues section at the end of each chapter gives practical application to at least one of the concepts covered in the chapter. New discussions have been added to provide yet more practical application to the overall text. The discussion of comparative advantage in Chapter 19 has been written for simplicity and clarity, making it easier for students to learn.

23

Economics

airplanes because the marginal cost of space to accommodate these seats is typically zero in cars but often hundreds of dollars in airplanes. Such examples engage student interest while teaching them to see each feature of their economic landscape as the reflection of an implicit or explicit cost-benefit calculation. NEW TO THIS EDITION

A new core principle has been added to Chapter 1 that says "A person [or a firm or a society] is more likely to take an action if its benefit rises, and less likely to take it if its cost rises. In short, incentives matter." Also the discussion of positive vs. normative economics has been expanded. The supplements package has been extensively revised and improved. We have new authors for the Test Bank and the Study Guide. This material has also been extensively checked for accuracy. These improvements should help in the difficult tasks of learning and of teaching Principles of Microeconomics. The international trade chapter [now Chapter 9] has been made more robust and moved forward. Because international trade involves important micro principles and policy issues, students will benefit greatly from this expanded coverage early in the book. The strategy chapter [now Chapter 11] has been revised to include more on oligopoly and monopolistic competition--two topics that are typically used to present game theory. Indifference curve material has been added as an appendix to Chapter 5. In the Second Edition this material was placed on the web site; in this edition, it is a part of the text, making it easier for students to access it. DiscoverEcon with Solman Videos: We now have an interactive software program for homework management, tutorials, videos, and assessment. This software houses both the best-selling tutorial software for Principles of Economics, and brand-new videos featuring Paul Solman of the NewsHour with Jim Lehrer on PBS. This product includes 250 minutes of video that explains introductory economic concepts in a real-world, student-friendly manner. DiscoverEcon includes updated graphing applets, interactive exercises, animated tutorials, and hundreds of multiple-choice questions to test student comprehension in each book chapter. The videos are integrated into the website and are available web streaming or on DVD. Well-Known Authors: Robert Frank and Ben Bernanke are renowned experts in their fields (micro and macro, respectively). Frank's research has looked at rivalry and cooperation in economic and social behavior. He is the author of a best-selling intermediate economics text, Microeconomics and Behavior, (McGraw-Hill/Irwin), and has published such award-winning books as The Winner-Take-All-Society and Luxury Fever. Bernanke is the co-author of a best-selling intermediate macroeconomics text and has done significant research on the causes of the Great Depression, the role of financial markets and institutions in the business cycle, and measuring the effects of monetary policy on the economy. He is a member of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors under Alan Greenspan. Modern Microeconomics: Economic surplus, introduced in Chapter 1 and applied repeatedly thereafter, is more fully developed here than in any other text. This concept underlies the argument for economic efficiency as an important social goal. Rather than speak of tradeoffs between efficiency and other goals, the authors stress that maximizing economic surplus facilitates the achievement of all goals. The tendency to ignore opportunity costs, the tendency not to ignore sunk costs, and the tendency to confuse average and marginal costs and benefits--common decision pitfalls identified by 2002 Nobel Laureate Daniel Kahneman and others--are introduced early in Chapter 1. The book devotes a chapter to the economics of information, making available in intuitively accessible form key insights that earned the 2001 Nobel Prize in economics for George Akerlof, Joseph Stiglitz, and Michael Spence. Web site: Developed by Scott Simkins of North Carolina A & T State University, an expert in the growing field of Economics education on the World Wide Web, the ambitious web site contains a host of features that will enhance the principles classroom, including dynamic graphs, video lectures, e-mail updates, microeconomic experiments, current news articles, information about the text, an eLearning session, and more. Introductory Material Refined: The material in chapter 1 is presented in such a way as to launch these important concepts as clearly and efficiently as possible. From the very beginning, the focus is on how rational people make choices among alternative courses of action. Cost Curve Coverage: The authors introduce average total cost and average variable cost curves in Chapter 6. Taking great pains to make the presentation as simple and uncluttered as possible, no single diagram ever portrays more than three cost curves at once, and most employ only two. This treatment remains faithful the authors' belief that a full-blown treatment of production functions and cost curves is ill advised at the principles level while providing teachers with greater flexibility. For example, it enables instructors to discuss a firm's shut down condition graphically and to portray profits and losses graphically. It also facilitates an enriched discussion of the invisible hand process by which profit and loss signals drive resource allocation in competitive markets (Chapter 8). Streamlined Discussion of Labor Markets and Income Redistribution: Frank and Bernanke's Chapter 13 condenses coverage on Labor Markets and Income Redistribution, eliminating sections on monopsony and comparable worth, utilitarianism, tax policy and occupational choice, progressive consumption taxation, and redistribution and cost-benefit analysis.

FEATURES

An Emphasis on Core Principles: A few core principles do most of the work in economics. By focusing on these principles, the text assures that students leave the course with a deep mastery of them. In contrast, traditional encyclopedic texts so overwhelm students with detail that they often leave the course with little useful working knowledge at all. Economic Naturalism Introduced: The authors' ultimate goal is to produce "economic naturalists" ­people who see each human action as the result of an implicit or explicit cost-benefit calculation. The economic naturalist sees mundane details of ordinary existence in a new light and becomes actively engaged in the attempt to understand them. Why don't auto manufacturers make cars without heaters? Why are whales, but not chickens, threatened with extinction? Why do movie theaters give student discounts on the price of admission but not on the price of popcorn? Active Learning Stressed: The only way to learn to hit an overhead smash in tennis or to speak a foreign language is through repeated practice. The same is true for learning economics. Thus, the authors consistently introduce new ideas in the context of simple examples and then follow them with applications showing how they work in familiar settings. And frequently, the text poses exercises that both test and reinforce the understanding of these ideas. The end-of-chapter questions and problems are carefully crafted to help students internalize and extend core concepts. Students are prepared to apply the important concepts to solve "economic riddles" drawn from the real world.

CONTENTS

Part 1 Introduction 1. Thinking Like an Economist 2. Comparative Advantage: The Basis for Exchange 3. Supply and Demand: An Introduction Part 2 Competition and the Invisible Hand 4. Elasticity 5. Demand: The Benefit Side of the Market 6. Perfectly Competitive Supply: The Cost Side of the Market 7. Efficiency and Exchange 8. The Quest for Profit and the Invisible Hand Part 3 International Trade 9. International Trade and Trade Policy Part 4 Market Imperfections 10. Monopoly and Other Forms of Imperfect Competition 11. Thinking Strategically: A Further Look at Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly 12. Externalities and Property Rights 13. The Economics of Information Part 5 Economics of Public Policy 14. Labor Markets, Poverty, and Income Distribution 15. The Environment, Health, and Safety 16. Public Goods and Tax Policy

24

Economics

MICROECONOMICS 6th Edition

CONTENTS

Part 1 BASIC CONCEPTS Chapter 1 Economics: The Core Issues Appendix: Using Graphs Chapter 2 The U.S. Economy: A Global View Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Chapter 4 The Public Sector Part 2 PRODUCT MARKETS: THE BASICS Chapter 5 The Demand for Goods Appendix: Indifference Curves Chapter 6: The Costs of Production Part 3 MARKET STRUCTURE Chapter 7 The Competitive Firm Chapter 8 Competitive Markets Chapter 9 Monopoly Chapter 10 Oligopoly Chapter 11 Monopolistic Competition Part 4 REGULATORY ISSUES Chapter 12 (De)Regulation of Business Chapter 13 Environmental Protection Chapter 14 The Farm Problem Part 5 FACTOR MARKETS: BASIC THEORY Chapter 15 The Labor Market Chapter 16 Labor Unions Chapter 17 Financial Markets Part 6 DISTRIBUTIONAL ISSUES Chapter 18 Taxes: Equity vs. Efficiency Chapter 19 Transfer Payments: Welfare and Social Security Part 7 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS Chapter 20 International Trade Chapter 21 International Finance / Glossary / Index / Student Problem Sets By David Colander, Middlebury College 2006 / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297884-1 / MHID: 0-07-297884-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322296-7 / MHID: 0-07-322296-8 (with DiscoverEcon with Paul Solman Videos Code Card)

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/colander6 Written in an informal colloquial style, this student-friendly Principles of Microeconomics textbook does not sacrifice intellectual depth in its quest for accessibility. The author's primary concern is to instill "economic sensibility" in the student. Colander emphasizes the intellectual and historical context to which the economic models are applied. This new edition offers improvements to this established and respected text including special Questions from Alternate Perspectives end-of-chapter questions that facilitate class discussion of differing school of thought in the discipline, and access to over 250 minutes of new videos from Paul Solman of the Lehrer NewsHour. CONTENTS

I: Introduction: Thinking Like An Economist Chapter 1: Economics and Economic Reasoning Chapter 2: Trade, Trade-off's and Government Policy Chapter 3: The Evolving U.S. Economy in Perspective Chapter 4: Supply and Demand Chapter 5: Using Supply and Demand II: Microeconomics I: Microeconomics: The Basics Chapter 6: Describing Supply and Demand: Elasticities Chapter 7: Taxation and Government Intervention II: Foundations of Supply and Demand Chapter 8: The Logic of Individual Choice: The Foundation of Supply and Demand Chapter 9: Production and Cost Analysis I Chapter 10: Production and Cost Analysis II III: Market Structure and Policy Chapter 11: Perfect Competition Chapter 12: Monopoly Chapter 13: Monopolistic Competition, Oligopoly, and Strategic Pricing Chapter 14: Real-World Competition and Technology Chapter 15: Antitrust Policy and Regulation IV: Factor Markets Chapter 16: Work and the Labor Market Chapter 17: Who Gets What? The Distribution of Income V: Applying Economic Reasoning to Policy Chapter 18: Government Policy and Market Failures Chapter 19: Politics and Economics: The Case of Agriculture Markets Chapter 20: Microeconomic Policy, Economic Reasoning, and Beyond Chapter 21: International Trade Policy, Comparative Advantage, and Outsourcing

International Edition

MICROECONOMICS 18th Edition

By Paul Samuelson, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and William Nordhaus, Yale University 2005 / 464 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287207-1 / MHID: 0-07-287207-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111298-7 / MHID: 0-07-111298-7 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/economics/ samuelson18e Samuelson's text was first published in 1948, and it immediately became the authority for the principles of economics courses. The book continues to be the standard-bearer for principles courses, and this revision continues to be a clear, accurate, and interesting introduction to modern economics principles. Bill Nordhaus is now the primary author of this text, and he has revised the book to be as current and relevant as ever. CONTENTS

Part One: Basic Concepts 1 The Fundamentals of Economics Appendix 1 How to Read Graphs 2 Markets and Government in a Modern Economy 3 Basic Elements of Supply and Demand Part Two: Microeconomics: Supply, Demand, and Product Markets 4 Applications of Supply and Demand 5 Demand and Consumer Behavior Appendix 5 Geometrical Analysis of Consumer Equilibrium 6 Production and Business Organization 7 Analysis of Costs Appendix 7 Production, Cost Theory, and Decision of the Firm 8 Analysis of Perfectly Competitive Markets 9 Imperfect Competition and Monopoly 10 Oligopoly and Monopolistic Competition 11 Uncertainty and Game Theory Part Three: Factor Markets: Labor, Land, and Capital 12 How Markets Determine Incomes 13 The Labor Market 14 Land and Capital Appendix 14 Markets and Economic Efficiency Part Four: Applied Microeconomics: International Trade, Government, and the Environment 15 Comparative Advantage and Protectionism 16 Government Taxation and Expenditure 17 Promoting More Efficient Markets 18 Protecting the Environment 19 Efficiency vs. Equality: The Big Tradeof

THE MICRO ECONOMY TODAY 10th Edition

By Bradley R Schiller, American University 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313784-1 / MHD: 0-07-313784-7 (with DiscoverEcon with Solman Videos DVD)

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/schiller10 Brad Schiller's text, The Microeconomy Today, 10/e, is noted for three great strengths: readability, policy orientation, and pedagogy. His accessible writing style engages students and brings some of the excitement of domestic and global economic news into the classroom. Schiller emphasizes how policymakers must choose between government intervention and market reliance to resolve the core issues of what, how, and for whom to produce. This strategic choice is highlighted throughout the full range of micro, macro, and international issues. Every chapter ends with a policy issue that emphasizes the markets vs. government dilemma. And Schiller packs his chapters with the facts of economic life--real stories and applications, not fables. This is a book that teaches economics in a relevant context with careful pedagogy. Schiller 10e is for students motivated by real-world policy issues who want to become economically literate. This is a book students actually READ. Schiller is also known for its cutting-edge and current coverage of today's issues.

25

Economics

International Edition

MICROECONOMICS 7th Edition

Many Real World Examples. Brue/McConnell places a strong emphasis on real-world examples. "Illustrating the Idea" features use analogies to illustrate theory discussed in the book. For example, a ratchet wrench analogy describes the asymmetry of price-level changes. In the essentials course where there is limited time to linger over topics, such discussions help students learn more quickly and breathe some life into what can otherwise be rather tedious discussions. Interesting Memorable Applications. "Applying the Analysis" sections walk students through economic theories and ideas and help cement comprehension. For example, the basics of the economic perspective are applied to why customers tend to try to wait in the shortest checkout lines. Differences in elasticity of supply are contrasted by the changing prices of antiques versus reproductions. Same High Quality Supplements As McConnell and Brue. The Study Guide is written by Bill Walstad at the University of Nebraska and the Testbank and Instructor's Manual are written by Randy Grant at Linfield College in close collaboration with text author Stan Brue.

By John Jackson, RMIT University, Melborne and Ron Mclver, University of South Australia 2003 / 568 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471324-2 / MHID: 0-07-471324-8 (with Online Learning Center) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124268-4 / MHID: 0-07-124268-6 [IE with Online Learning Center]

McGraw-Hill Australia Title

Website: www.mhhe.com/jackson_micro7e CONTENTS

PART ONE: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS Chapter 1 The nature and method of economics Chapter 2 The economising problem Chapter 3 The mechanics of individual prices: demand and supply PART TWO: AN OVERVIEW OF MICROECONOMICS Chapter 4 Allocation and the market system Chapter 5 The organisation of production in the Australian economy PART THREE: THE ECONOMICS OF MARKETS Chapter 6 Demand and supply: elasticity and its applications Chapter 7 Consumer behaviour Chapter 8 An overview of market structures Chapter 9 The costs of production Chapter 10 Price and output determination: pure competition Chapter 11 Pure monopoly Chapter 12 Price and output determination: monopolistic competition Chapter 13 Price and output determination: oligopoly Chapter 14 The demand for economic resources Chapter 15 The pricing and employment of resources: wage determination Chapter 16 Rent, interest and profits PART FOUR: THE ROLE OF GOVERNMENT Chapter 17 Market failure and resource allocation Chapter 18 The economics of income distribution: inequality and poverty PART FIVE: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS Chapter 19 Australia's trade, and the economics of free trade and protection

CONTENTS

Part One: Introduction Chapter 1: Limits, Alternatives, and Choices Chapter 2: The Market System and the Circular Flow Part Two: Price, Quantity, and Efficiency Chapter 3: Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium Chapter 4: Elasticity of Demand and Supply Chapter 5: Market Failure: A Role for Government Part Three: Product Markets Chapter 6: Businesses and Their Costs Chapter 7: Pure Competition Chapter 8: Pure Monopoly Chapter 9: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Chapter 10: Wage Determination Chapter 11: Income Inequality and Poverty Part Four: Macroeconomic Measurement, Models, and Fiscal Policy Chapter 12: Introduction to GDP, Growth, and Instability Chapter 13: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Chapter 14: Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and Debt Part Five: Money, Banking, and Monetary Policy Chapter 15: Money and Banking Chapter 16: Monetary Policy Part Six: Economic Growth and International Economics Chapter 17: Economic Growth Chapter 18: International Trade / Glossary

Survey of Economics

International Edition

International Edition

NEW

NEW

ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMICS 6th Edition

ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMICS

By Bradley R Schiller, American University 2007 (June 2006) / 448 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340279-6 / MHID: 0-07-340279-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110146-2 / MHID: 0-07-110146-2 [IE]

By Stanley L Brue, Pacific Lutheran University and Campbell R McConnell 2007 (November 2005) / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301967-3 / MHID: 0-07-301967-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110634-4 / MHID: 0-07-110634-0 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/schilleressentials6 Essentials of Economics is the market leader for the one-semester survey course. In just about 400 pages, it provides a solid introduction to the core concepts of economics with an emphasis on real-world examples and current events. Essentials has earned its popular success because, unlike other books on the market, it is free of the abstract and complex theory that requires more time than this course allows. Instead, the text is clean and concise, with many examples of significance to students today, including Headlines and Policy Perspectives that use current events to help illustrate the topics discussed. This real-world policy emphasis is a distinctive feature of Schiller's text and is integral to its dominance of the survey text market. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Full Updates Throughout the Text. Every chapter of the Sixth Edition of Schiller's Essentials of Economics includes a myriad of updates including new and updated Policy Perspective discussions, recent headlines, and the latest data on topics such as college graduate salaries and growth and productivity. New Discussions. The Sixth edition includes discussions on key topics of current economic interest, such as the redistributive role of the tax/transfer system in Chapter 9, and the Greenspan-Bernanke

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/brueonline.com Building on the tremendous success of their best-selling Principles of Economics text, Brue and McConnell have written a new one semester text to provide a fresh alternative. This new, 18chapter textbook will appeal to anyone teaching a one-semester introductory course. Brue/McConnell is a patient, substantive treatment of micro and macro economics for the one-semester course with many, up-to-date, motivating examples. FEATURES

An Entirely New Book, Not a "Cut and Paste" of McConnell/Brue. Many other textbooks in the principles markets create essentials books by simply providing a smaller number of the exact same chapters found in their companion, two-semester principles text. While this is quick and easy for the author, the student suffers from the bad transitions between topics and struggles with rigor that is often too high for the one-semester course. Brue/McConnell thoroughly reworks all topics so that chapter order, level of difficulty, and readability are more appropriate for the faster-paced essentials course.

26

Economics

transition and alternative strategies for monetary policy in Chapter 14, among others. Current Headlines. New articles on the impact of Hurricane Katrina on gasoline prices, transportation costs, and SUV sales; monopoly pricing at hub airports; the competitive price squeeze on laptop computers; the debate over arctic drilling; the earnings of college coaches; unrelenting tuition inflation; and the sugar lobby's opposition to CAFTA have all been added to the Sixth edition. These new headlines will help to underscore the importance and relevance of economics in everyone's lives and will motivate non-majors into conscientious study of the material.

NEW

FOUNDATIONS OF ECONOMICS 3rd Edition

By David Begg, Principal of Tanaka Business School, Imperial College, University of London 2006 (March 2006) / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711423-7 / MHID: 0-07-711423-X

FEATURES

Policy Emphasis: Brad Schiller teaches economic principles in the context of the decisions that state, local, and federal governments face, thereby teaching students that the principles are relevant to the realworld and that they impact their lives every day. The book includes Policy Perspectives that demonstrate how economics influences policy. What the students learn in the course directly relates to what they hear on the news, and they are more motivated to learn as they see this real-world connection. "Living Econ" Feature: Building on the real-world emphasis of Essentials, Living Econ is a end-of-chapter section that promotes economic literacy by relating the chapter concepts to what is most important to every student: his or her own life. Created by Linda Wilson of the University of Texas at Arlington and Mark Maier of Glendale Community College, Living Econ explores provocative and relevant questions such as: How much will I earn? Why should I care about interest rates? Should I vote my pocketbook? How can I communicate with a large corporation? How come there aren't enough levees? By bringing the concepts alive, this section gives students the opportunity to consider why economics matters to them. This glimpse into the big picture will help them see what it takes to think like an economically-literate citizen. For those who want a bit more discussion of the topics in Living Econ, additional material can be found in the Study Guide. Bulleted Chapter Summaries at the end of each chapter. These help students digest and review what they've read. Terms to Remember appear at the end of each chapter to aid student retention. End-of-chapter Questions for Discussion and Problems provide student feedback and reinforce concepts. Web Activities send students out to the web to find real-life data and solve economic problems.

McGraw-Hill UK Title

Foundations of Economics, third edition is ideal for students taking introductory economics modules as part of an interdisciplinary course. Building on the success of the second edition, the book provides accessible overviews of key economic topics, interweaving these with real-world examples and practical activities to equip students to think for themselves. FEATURES

Topical and up-to-date material, presented alongside real-world examples and policy problems Mini case studies taken from disciplines such as construction, sport and computing, to demonstrate the practical application of economics Increased microeconomic coverage; including separate chapters on supply, demand and markets, to provide students with a thorough grounding in these fundamental areas A revised structure to the macroeconomics section, beginning with growth, cycles, and issues, before introducing analysis and explanations Learning outcomes and recaps in each chapter, allowing students to track their progress and understanding through the text Key terms, clearly defined throughout each chapter Review questions and answers in each chapter, to test understanding and application of the topics covered An easy-to-navigate layout and design, with clearly signposted features and photos and figures to illustrate important concepts

CONTENTS

Preface. 1 What is economics? 2 Demand. 3 Supply. 4 Costs, supply and perfect competition. 5 Market structure and imperfect competition. 6 Input markets and income distribution. 7 Governing the market. 8 The income and output of nations. 9 Short-run fluctuations in income and output. 10 Interest rates, money, and inflation. 11 Aggregate supply, inflation, and unemployment. 12 Exchange rates and the balance of payments. 13 The global economy. Answers to Questions. Glossary

CONTENTS

Section I: Basics Chapter 1 The Challenge of Economics Chapter 2 The U.S. Economy Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Section II: Microeconomics Chapter 4 Consumer Demand Chapter 5 Supply Decisions Chapter 6 Competition Chapter 7 Monopoly Chapter 8 The Labor Market Chapter 9 Government Intervention Section III: Macroeconomics Chapter 10 The Business Cycle Chapter 11 Aggregate Supply and Demand Chapter 12 Fiscal Policy Chapter 13 Money and Banks Chapter 14 Monetary Policy Chapter 15 Economic Growth Chapter 16 Theory and Reality Section IV: International Chapter 17 International Trade / Glossary / Index

27

Economics

Economics for Business

NEW

ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS 2nd Edition

Economics Issues

International Edition

NEW

ISSUES IN ECONOMICS TODAY 3rd Edition

By David Begg, University of London and Damian Ward, Bradford University 2006 (December 2006) / 432 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711451-0 / MHID: 0-07-711451-5

By Robert Guell, Indiana State University 2007 (January 2006) / 448 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313752-0 / MHID: 0-07-313752-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110664-1 / MHID: 0-07-110664-2 [IE]

McGraw-Hill UK Title

Economics for Business, second edition is an essential introduction to economics, tailor-made for business students. The text demonstrates the relevance of applying economic principles to solve business problems, using a unique approach that starts with the business problem before employing economics as the solution. Key economic theories are therefore clearly explained within the context of modern business, drawing on a wealth of contemporary examples to bring the topics to life. The supporting features and exercises allow students to consolidate their learning and equip them with the economic tools to confront real business situations. FEATURES

New coverage of auction theory, addressing this increasingly prolific topic with reference to the impact of internet auction sites such as eBay Revised macroeconomic coverage, signposting the major issues within a business orientation Fully updated European and international examples and cases, that allow students to engage with topics in a relevant context Improved pedagogical features, which integrate economic theory and business issues and check students' learning as they progress through the text. A variety of exercises are provided to cater for different learning environments and abilities

Issues in Economics Today is a modern issues book that presents the latest and most interesting topics. Most importantly, this title was developed to allow instructors the maximum flexibility to teach this material in a manner that fits their personal style. Some professors like to intertwine theory and issues while others like to lay the theoretical foundation first before heading into the issues. Some faculty will choose to set a theme for their course and pick issues consistent with that theme while others will let their students decide what issues interest them. Beginning with eight intensive core theory chapters and followed by 33 shorter issues chapters, there is no right way to use the book. The 33 issues chapters are divided into the following categories: Macroeconomic Issues, International Issues, Externalities and Market Failure, Health Issues, Government Solutions to Societal Problems, Discrimination Issues, Price Control Issues, and Miscellaneous Markets. These groupings help instructors navigate through the Table of Contents when looking for a particular topic. This book also has the benefit of having timely web-available chapters that allow students to study issues as they happen. Between the time the first edition went to press and this edition became available, the accounting scandals of 2002 occurred. During the book's first year the U.S. went to war in Iraq. Before this edition hit college bookstores, the Housing Bubble was of significant concern. Chapters discussing the economic impact of these events were available within a month of these events on the web. NEW TO THIS EDITION

New Chapters-- New chapters examine the economic impact of Wal-Mart, the economic impact of casino gambling, and why college textbooks cost so much. These chapters, originally posted as web chapters to accompany the second edition, have been updated and expanded for inclusion in the textbook. Chapter 37: The Cost of War, uses the example of the recent War on Iraq and updates the material to focus on the occupation costs rather than simply the invasion. Similarly, Chapter 38: The Economics of Terrorism, uses the example of the September 11 attacks to examine the effects of terrorism on the national economy and how the government responded. In its revised form this chapter discusses subsequent terrorist acts, like the London bombings of July 2005 to emphasize important points. Combined Chapters-- In response to reviewer feedback, the Gender and Race and Affirmative Action chapters from the second edition have been combined as Chapter 26: Gender, Race and Affirmative Action. In addition, the content of chapter on the Consumer Price Index was folded into Chapter 6's discussion of problems with the measurement of inflation. Kick It up a Notch-- This popular feature has been expanded to more chapters and encourages students to challenge themselves with slightly more advanced concepts. For those who want extra practice, this section contains additional material that can be found in the Study Guide. All new Quiz Yourself Questions-- To counter homework banks, the text's "Quiz Yourself," "Talk About This," and "Think About This" questions have been changed for chapters that date back to the first edition.

CONTENTS

Part I: Introduction Chapter 1: Economics for business Part II: Understanding markets Chapter 2: Consumers in the market place Chapter 3: Firms in the market place Chapter 4: Markets in action Part III: Competition and profitability Chapter 5: Market structure and firm performance Chapter 6: Strategic rivalry Chapter 7: Growth strategies Chapter 8: Governing business Part IV: Domestic macroeconomics Chapter 9: Introduction to the macroeconomy Chapter 10: Measuring macroeconomic variables and policy issues Chapter 11: Economic stability and demand side policies Chapter 12: Supply side policies and economic growth Part V: Global economics Chapter 13: Exchange rates and the balance of payments Chapter 14: Globalization

28

Economics

Frequent Web Updates-- New economic issues arise all the time and these Web chapters are posted throughout the life of the edition. The author is committed to continually posting issues that matter to today's students.

International Edition

ECONOMICS OF SOCIAL ISSUES 17th Edition

FEATURES

Conversational Writing Style-- Students not majoring in economics appreciate and connect with the text's writing style. Students feel at ease with the material allowing them to feel more confident. Chapter Outline and Chapter Objectives-- Setting the stage at the beginning of each chapter, these features show students how the chapter is organized and what to anticipate in each chapter. Key Terms-- Defined throughout the text in the margins, these terms are also included in the text's Glossary. Summaries-- Found at the end of each chapter, this material reinforces the chapter lessons. Issue Chapters You Are Ready for Now-- This section can be found at the end of each theory chapter, and it directs students to the issues chapters that may interest them once they've mastered the necessary theoretical principles. Quiz Yourself-- These questions are perfect for self-quizzing at the end of each chapter. Think About This-- Provocative questions throughout the text encourage students to think about how economic theories apply to the real world. Talk About This-- Several questions are included to trigger in-class or group discussions. For More Insight See-- This feature guides readers to outside websites and publications to find additional material on a given topic. This feature keeps the course as fresh and current as today's newspaper.

By Ansel M. Sharp, University of the South, Charles A. Register, Florida Atlantic University--Boca Raton and Paul W. Grimes, Mississippi State University ­ Mississippi State 2006 / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298435-4 / MHID: 0-07-298435-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111654-1 / MHID: 0-07-111654-0 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/sharp17 Designed as an introduction to general economics for non-majors, Sharp/Register/Grimes' Economics of Social Issues presents economic concepts as useful tools to analyze contemporary social issues. Each chapter presents economic concepts then places them within the context of very current issues facing society. The book may also be used to supplement principles courses with lively social issues to add relevance to the economic principles being taught. CONTENTS

1. Alleviating Human Misery: The Role of Economic Reasoning 2. Economic Systems, Resource Allocation, and Social Well-Being: Lessons from China's Transition 3. Government Control of Prices in Mixed Systems: What Are the Actual Outcomes 4. Pollution Problems: Must We Foul Our Own Nests? 5. Economics of Crime and Its Prevention: How Much Is Too Much? 6. The Economics of Education: Crisis and Reform 7. Poverty Problems and Discrimination: Why Are So Many Still So Poor? 8. The Economics of Big Business: Who Does What to Whom?9. The Economics of Professional Sports: What Is the Real Score? 10. Protectionism Versus Free Trade: Can We Restrict Ourselves into Prosperity? 11. Unemployment Issues: Why Do We Waste Our Labor Resources? 12. Inflation: How to Gain and Lose at the Same Time13. Economic Growth: Are We Living in a "New Economy"? 14. Government Spending, Taxing, and the National Debt: Who Wins and Who Loses? 15. Social Security and Medicare: How Secure Is Our Safety Net for the Elderly?

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Economics: The Study of Opportunity Cost. Chapter 2 Supply and Demand. Chapter 3 The Concept of Elasticity and Consumer and Producer Surplus. Chapter 4 Firm Production, Cost, and Revenue. Chapter 5 Perfect Competition, Monopoly, and Economic versus Normal Profit. Chapter 6 Every Macroeconomic Word You Ever Heard: Gross Domestic Product, Inflation, Unemployment, Recession, and Depression. Chapter 7 Interest Rates and Present Value. Chapter 8 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. Chapter 9 Federal Spending. Chapter 10 Federal Deficits, Surpluses, and the National Debt. Chapter 11 Fiscal Policy. Chapter 12 Monetary Policy. Chapter 13 International Trade: Does it Jeopardize American Jobs? Chapter 14 The International Monetary Fund: Doctor or Witch Doctor? Chapter 15 NAFTA, CAFTA, GATT, WTO: Are Trade Agreements Good for Us? Chapter 16 Tobacco, Alcohol, Drugs, and Prostitution. Chapter 17 The Environment. Chapter 18 Health Care. Chapter 19 Government Provided Health Insurance: Medicaid, Medicare, and the Child Health Insurance Program. Chapter 20 The Economics of Prescription Drugs. Chapter 21 The Economics of Crime. Chapter 22 Education. Chapter 23 Poverty and Welfare. Chapter 24 Social Security. Chapter 25 Head Start. Chapter 26 The Economics of Race and Sex Discrimination. Chapter 27 Farm Policy. Chapter 28 Minimum Wage. Chapter 29 Rent Control. Chapter 30 Ticket Brokers and Ticket Scalping. Chapter 31 Personal Income Taxes. Chapter 32 Antitrust. Chapter 33 Energy Prices. Chapter 34 If We Build It, Will They Come? And Other Sports Questions. Chapter 35 The Stock Market and Crashes. Chapter 36 Unions. Chapter 37 The Cost of War. Chapter 38 The Economics of Terrorism. Chapter 39 Wal-Mart: Always Low Prices (And Low Wages) ­ Always. Chapter 40 The Economic Impact of Casino Gambling. Chapter 41 Why College Textbooks Cost So Much. Chapter 42 Housing Bubble

TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON CONTROVERSIAL ECONOMIC ISSUES 12th Edition

By Frank J Bonello, University of Notre Dame 2006 / 448 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312952-5 / MHID: 0-07-312952-6

A McGraw-Hill/Dushkin Title

Website: http://www.dushkin.com/text/catalog/0073129526 This debate-style reader is designed to introduce students to controversies in global issues through readings that reflect a variety of viewpoints. Each issue is framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. The Taking Sides readers feature annotated listings of selected World Wide Web sites. Taking Sides is supported by our student website at www. dushkin.com/online/. CONTENTS

PART 1. Microeconomic Issues ISSUE 1. Are Profits the Only Business of Business? New! ISSUE 2. Should the Regulations Regarding Overtime Pay Be Changed? ISSUE 3. Is There Discrimination in U.S. Labor Markets? New! ISSUE 4. Will the Medicare Modernization Act of 2003 and Its Drug Discount Cards Lower the Cost of Prescription Drugs for Seniors? ISSUE 5. Should Markets Be Allowed to Solve the Shortage in Body Parts? ISSUE 6. Is It Time to Reform Medical Malpractice Litigation? PART 2. Macroeconomic Issues New! ISSUE 7. Is Wal-Mart Good for the Economy? New! ISSUE 8. Should Social Security Be Changed to Include Personal Retirement Accounts? New! ISSUE 9. Should the Double Taxation of Corporate Dividends Be Eliminated? New! ISSUE 10. Are Credit Card Companies Exploiting American Consumers? ISSUE

2

Economics

11. Is It Time to Abolish the Minimum Wage? ISSUE 12. Are Declining Caseloads a Sign of Successful Welfare Reform? PART 3. The World Around Us ISSUE 13. Are Protectionist Policies Bad for America? ISSUE 14. Should We Sweat About Sweatshops? ISSUE 15. Are the Costs of Global Warming Too High to Ignore? New! ISSUE 16. Do Living Wage Laws Improve Economic Conditions in Cities? ISSUE 17. Has the North American Free Trade Agreement Hurt the American Economy? New! ISSUE 18. Is the No Child Left Behind Act Working?

NEW

MACROECONOMICS 2nd Edition

Intermediate Macroeconomics

International Edition

MACROECONOMICS 2nd Edition

By Rudiger Dornbusch (deceased), Philip Bodman, University of Queensland, Mark Crosby, Melbourne Business School, Stanley Fischer, Mass Institute of Tech and Richard Startz, University of Washington 2006 (February 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471568-0 / MHID: 0-07-471568-2

McGraw-Hill Australia Title

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/au/dornbusch2e This new edition of Macroeconomics has been thoroughly revised and updated by respected author team Philip Bodman and Mark Crosby. The book maintains many of the bestselling features of its US counterpart, such as the focus on models and methodological frameworks for economic analysis, while including currently policy issues using a blend of theory and data, combined with new examples and real world material. Pedagigical features are significantly enhanced and material is presented in a clear and accessible manner. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Two New Chapters: In response to market feedback, two entirely new chapters have been added--Chapter 17 on Inflation and Chapter 18 on Unemployment. International Perspective: This edition retains its international perspective with particular focus on the economies of Asia. Extensive analysis is given to the interactions and interdependencies of the Australian economy with those overseas. Additionally, two detailed chapters (Cahpters 10 and 11) are devoted to discussing international linkages. Models and Data: Students are provided with a rich toolbox of simple models for analysing today's economic events. In addition to the already extensive examples and data, cutting-edge research has been included to add depth and breadth to their study. Pedagogical Enhancement

By Bradford DeLong, University of California--Berkeley 2006 / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287758-8 / MHID: 0-07-287758-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111113-3 / MHID: 0-07-111113-1 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/delong2 Macroeconomics 2e offers a new approach to the subject. Drawing upon vast experience teaching, researching, and advising the U.S. government on policy has enabled the authors to write an intermediate macroeconomics book that will set the standard for books in this area for years to come. For example, DeLong/Olney focuses on the interest rate rather than the AS/AD diagram and includes expanded coverage of the crucial topic of long-run growth. This lively text is modern, provides extensive insight into economic policy, incorporates a strong international perspective, and offers a broad historical perspective. CONTENTS

Part I Preliminaries 1 Introduction to Macroeconomics 2 Measuring the Macroeconomy 3 Thinking Like an Economist Part II Long-Run Economic Growth 4 The Theory of Economic Growth 5 The Reality of Economic Growth: History and Prospect Part III Flexible-Price Macroeconomics 6 Building Blocks of the Flexible-Price Model 7 Equilibrium in the Flexible-Price Model 8 Money, Prices, and Inflation Part IV Sticky-Price Macroeconomics 9 The Sticky-Price Income-Expenditure Framework: Consumption and the Multiplier 10 Investment, Net Exports, and Interest Rates: The IS Curve 11 The Money Market and the LM Curve 12 The Phillips Curve and Expectations Part V Macroeconomic Policy 13 Stabilization Policy: The Budget Balance, the National Debt, and Investment International Economic Policy 14 Changes in the Macroeconomy and Changes in Macroeconomic Policy 15 The Future of Macroeconomics / Epiloge

CONTENTS

Part 1, Introduction and National Income Accounting Ch 1, An introduction to macroeconomics Ch 2, National income accounting Part 2, Growth and Aggregate Supply and Demand Ch 3, Growth and accumulation Ch 4, Growth and policy Ch 5, Aggregate supply and demand Ch 6, Aggregate supply: wages, prices and unemployment Part 3, Early Models Ch 7, Income and Spending Ch 8, Money, interest and income Ch 9, Monetary and fiscal policy in the closed economy Part 4, Open Economy Macroeconomics Ch 10, Internatioanl linkages Ch 11, International adjustment and interdependence Part 5, Behavioural Foundations Ch 12, Consumption and saving Ch 13, Investment spending Ch 14, The demand for money Ch 15, The RBA, money and credit Ch 16, Financial markets Part 6, Big Issues, Economic Policy and Advanced Topics Ch 17, Big issues #1: Inflation Ch 18, Big issues #2: Unemployment Ch 19, Policy in an uncertain world Ch 20, Advanced topics

30

Economics

International Edition

MACROECONOMICS 9th Edition

CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction 1 Thinking Like an Economist 2 Supply and Demand Appendix: How Do Taxes Affect Equilibrium Prices and Quantities? Part 2: The Theory of Consumer Behavior 3 Rational Consumer Choice Appendix: The Utility Function Approach to the Consumer Budgeting Problem 4 Individual and Market Demand Appendix: Additional Topics in Demand Theory 5 Applications of Rational Choice and Demand Theories 6 The Economics of Information and Choice Under Uncertainty Appendix: Search Theory and the Winner's Curse 7 Explaining Tastes: The Importance of Altruism and Other Non-egoistic Behavior 8 Cognitive Limitations and Consumer Behavior Part 3: The Theory of the Firm and Market Structure 9 Production Appendix: Mathematical Extensions of Production Theory 10 Costs Appendix: Mathematical Extensions of the Theory of Costs 11 Perfect Competition 12 Monopoly 13 Imperfect Competition: A Game-Theoretic Approach Part 4: Factor Markets 14 Labor Appendix: The Economics of Workplace Safety 15 Capital Appendix: A More Detailed Look at Exhaustible Resource Allocation Part 5: General Equilibrium and Welfare 16 General Equilibrium and Market Efficiency 17 Externalities, Property Rights, and the Coase Theorem 18 Government

By Rudiger Dornbusch(Deceased), Stanley Fischer, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and Richard Startz, University of Washington 2004 / 550 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293917-0 / MHID: 0-07-293917-6 (with Economagic, Mandatory Package) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123237-1 / MHID: 0-07-123237-0 [IE with Economagic Card]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/dornbusch9 Dornbusch, Fischer, and Startz has been a long-standing, leading intermediate macroeconomic theory text since its introduction in 1978. This revision retains most of the text's traditional features, including a middle-of-the-road approach and very current research, while updating and simplifying the exposition. This revision focuses on making the text even easier to teach from. The only pre-requisite continues to be principles of economics. CONTENTS

Part I: Introduction and National Income Accounting Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: National Income Accounting Part II: Growth, Aggregate Supply and Demand, and Policy Chapter 3: Growth and Accumulation Chapter 4: Growth and Policy Chapter 5: Aggregate Supply and Demand Chapter 6: Aggregate Supply: Wages, Prices, and Unemployment Chapter 7: The Anatomy of Inflation and Unemployment Chapter 8: Policy Part III: First Models Chapter 9: Income and Spending Chapter 10: Money, Interest, and Income Chapter 11: Monetary and Fiscal Policy Chapter 12: International Linkages Part IV: Behavioral Foundations Chapter 13: Consumption and Saving Chapter 14: Investment Spending Chapter 15: The Demand for Money Chapter 16: The Fed, Money, and Credit Chapter 17: Financial Markets and Asset Prices Part V: Big Events, International Adjustments, and Advanced Topics Chapter 18: Big Events: The Economics of Depression, Hyperinflation, and Deficits Chapter 19: International Adjustment and Interdependence Chapter 20: Advanced Topics

MICROECONOMICS

By Katz Morgan, University of Nottingham, Michael L Katz, University of California-Berkeley and Harvey S Rosen, Princeton University 2005 / 650 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710907-3 / MHID: 0-07-710907-4

McGraw-Hill UK Title

Website: http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/morgan Microeconomics, European Edition offers comprehensive coverage of microeconomic theory, explaining how this is used to analyse and evaluate contemporary market systems. This European edition has been adapted from the well-established US text, to provide a thoroughly European approach to the subject. The book draws on relevant real world examples to highlight how theory can help to solve or understand a range of problems and is a central basis for thinking like an economist. CONTENTS

Chapter 1: The Market Economy. Part One: The Household. Chapter 2: Consumer Choice. Chapter 3: Comparative Statics and Demand. Chapter 4: Price Changes and Consumer Welfare. Chapter 5: The Household as Supplier. Chapter 6: Choice under Uncertainty. Part Two: The firm. Chapter 7: The Firm and It's Goal. Chapter 8: Technology and Production. Chapter 9: Cost. Part Three: The Competitive Model. Chapter 10: The Price-Taking Firm. Chapter 11: Equilibrium in Competitive Markets. Chapter 12: General Equilibrium and Welfare Economics. Part Four: Market Power. Chapter 13: Monopoly. Chapter 14: More on PriceMaking Firms. Chapter 15: Oligopoly and Strategic Behaviour. Chapter 16: Game Theory. Part Five: Missing Markets. Chapter 17: Asymmetric Information. Chapter 18: Externalities and Public Goods

Intermediate Microeconomics

International Edition

MICROECONOMICS AND BEHAVIOR 6th Edition

By Robert H. Frank, Cornell University 2006 / 720 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297745-5 / MHID: 0-07-297745-0 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111549-5 / MHID: 0-07-111549-8 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/frank6 Robert Frank's Microeconomics and Behavior covers the essential topics of microeconomics while exploring the relationship between economics analysis and human behavior. The book's clear narrative appeals to students, and its numerous examples help students develop economic intuition. This book introduces modern topics not often found in intermediate textbooks. Its focus throughout is to develop a student's capacity to "think like an economist."

31

Economics

International Edition

MICROECONOMICS 3rd Edition

International Edition

NEW

By Michael L Katz, University of California, Berkeley, and Harvey S Rosen, Princeton University 1998 / 672 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-256-17176-1 / MHID: 0-256-17176-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124327-8 / MHID: 0-07-124327-5 [IE]

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS AND ORGANIZATIONAL ARCHITECTURE 4th Edition

2007 (May 2006) / 704 pages

By James Brickley, and Clifford Smith, University of Rochester, and Jerold Zimmerman, University of Rochester ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352301-9 / MHID: 0-07-352301-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110633-7 / MHID: 0-07-110633-2 [IE]

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 The Market Economy. Part I The Household: Chapter 2 Consumer Choice. Chapter 3 Comparative Statics and Demand. Chapter 4 Price Changes and Consumer welfare. Chapter 5 The Household as Supplier. Chapter 6 Choice Under Uncertainty. Part II The Firm: Chapter 7 The Firm and Its Goals. Chapter 8 Technology and Production. Chapter 9 Cost. Part III The Competitive Model: Chapter 10 The Price-Taking Firm. Chapter 11 Equilibrium in Competitive Markets. Chapter 12 General Equilibrium and Welfare Economics. Part IV Market Power: Chapter 13 Monopoly. Chapter 14 More on Price-Making Firms. Chapter 15 Oligopoly and Strategic Behavior. Chapter 16 Game Theory. Chapter 17 Asymmetric Information. Chapter 18 Externalities and Public Goods.

With two distinct objectives, this text's approach to managerial economics takes models from recent economics research and applies the research to the internal structure of a firm. After teaching basic applied economics, the authors look inside the firm and apply this analysis to management decision making. Authors Brickley, Smith, and Zimmerman contend that organizational architecture consists of three aspects of corporate organization: the assignment of decision rights within the company; methods of rewarding individuals; the structure of systems to evaluate the performance of both individuals and business units. These three components can be likened to a stool with three legs. If one of the legs is shorter, the stool is out of balance. These three elements must be in balance in the organization as well. NEW TO THIS EDITION

A new chapter on Corporate Governance: This new chapter uses the organizational architecture framework to provide an integrated and comprehensive analysis of corporate governance. The chapter covers the causes and implications of contemporary governance scandals, provides examples of international corporate governance models, and explores the effects of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. Boxed examples include the WorldCom and Tyco scandals, Hewlett Packard's firing of former CEO Carly Fiorina, and commercial bank prepay transactions. The chapter includes an appendix entitled, Choosing Among the Legal Forms of Organization. A basic microeconomics focus is maintained and enhanced: Through the use of applied, real-world management problems, coverage of important topics in managerial economics is increased to include examples such as: consumer behavior and demand, comparative advantage, consumer and producer surplus, and supply and demand analysis. Organizational Economics topics have been updated: These updates reflect the review of economic literature on incentives as well as expanded analysis of self selection in labor markets. New applications include a mini-case on Apple Computer's pricing policies for digital music and examples of the effects of Hurricane Katrina and increased gasoline prices.

Managerial Economics

International Edition

NEW

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 9th Edition

By Christopher R Thomas, University of South Florida and S Charles Maurice (Deceased) 2008 (March 2007) / 704 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340281-9 / MHID: 0-07-340281-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110148-6 / MHID: 0-07-110148-9 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/thomas9 (Details unavailable at press time)

FEATURES

Creating and Capturing Value: A unique feature for managerial economics texts, this edition continues to address the fundamental question of how firms capture value, what industries they should compete in, and how they should compete. It is particularly useful to business students and managers.

COMPLIMENTARY COPIES

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog.

Game Theory: Both theoretically sound and replete with realistic examples, virtually all the game theory discussions featured are framed in managerial terms and the game theory tools are explicitly used to understand business problems. This is a topic all modern applied economics texts include and will be popular with instructors. Choosing the Legal Form of Organization: The legal form of organization is a policy choice. For example, nonprofit hospitals sometimes change to for-profit organizations (and vice versa), mutual companies become stock companies, franchised units become company-owned units and so on. This appendix presents an economic analysis of the legal form of organization.

Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com

32

Economics

Extended case study on Arthur Anderson: The extensive examples throughout the book have dozens of recent business applications. A capstone case study on Arthur Anderson provides a format for integrative discussion. Integrated website: The book website includes experiential activities, online auctions, in-class games, PowerPoint presentations, and fill-in-the-blank exercises, teaching tips, and links to additional case studies. in the Marketplace 15 Challenges at Time Warner: A Case Study in Business Strategy

NEW

THE ECONOMICS OF ORGANIZATIONS AND STRATEGY

By Sean Richard, Cranfield 2006 (March 2006) / 512 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710813-7 / MHID: 0-07-710813-2

CONTENTS

Part 1: Basic Concepts. Chapter 1 Introduction. Chapter 2 Economist's View of Behavior. Chapter 3 Markets, Organizations, and the Role of Knowledge. Part 2: Managerial Economics. Chapter 4 Demand. Chapter 5 Production and Cost. Chapter 6 Market Structure. Chapter 7 Pricing with Market Power. Chapter 8 Economics of Strategy: Creating and Capturing Value. Chapter 9 Economics of Strategy: Game Theory. Chapter 10 Incentive Conflicts and Contracts. Part 3: Designing Organizational Architecture. Chapter 11 Organizational Architecture. Chapter 12 Decision Rights: The Level of Empowerment. Chapter 13 Decision Rights: Bundling Tasks into Jobs and Subunits. Chapter 14 Attracting and Retaining Qualified Employees. Chapter 15 Incentive Compensation. Chapter 16 Individual Performance Evaluation. Chapter 17 Divisional Performance Evaluation. Capstone Case Study on Organizational Architecture: Arthur Anderson LLP. Part 4: Applications of Organizational Architecture. Chapter 18 Corporate Governance. Chapter 19 Vertical Integration and Outsourcing. Chapter 20 Leadership: Motivating Change within Organizations. Chapter 21 Understanding the Business Environment: The Economics of Regulation. Chapter 22 Ethics and Organizational Architecture. Chapter 23 Organizational Architecture and the Process of Management Innovation

McGraw-Hill UK Title

To operate as a successful manager requires an economic way of thinking, in particular a clear focus on efficiency and the working of markets. The Economics of Organizations and Strategy integrates business strategy within an economics framework, to give an economic perspective on areas of business such as organizational behaviour, marketing, finance, human resources and operations management. The book opens with an in-depth treatment of key microeconomic theories and concepts. It then builds on these introductory topics to show how a firm's external business environment influences and constrains strategy formulation and behaviour, before moving on to analyse the firm as an organization. Drawing on microeconomic theories and concepts, variations in management structures are explained; for example, decision making hierarchies, reward systems and organizational boundaries. FEATURES

Coverage of European competition policy Integration of economic and game theoretic models to demonstrate strategic conflict and cooperation Up-to-date business examples to demonstrate the application of theory in a `real-world' context Exercises that encourage students to work through business problems relevant to a prospective management role A clear writing style that presents complex ideas in an accessible manner

International Edition

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS STRATEGY 5th Edition

By Michael Baye, Indiana University-Bloomington 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305019-5 / MHID: 0-07-305019-9 (with Data Disk) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124421-3 / MHID: 0-07-124421-2 [IE with Disk]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/baye5e Baye's Managerial Economics and Business Strategy has become the best-selling managerial economics textbook. It was the first textbook to blend tools from intermediate microeconomics, game theory, and industrial organization for a managerial economics text. Baye is known for its balanced coverage of traditional and modern topics, and the Fifth Edition continues to offer the diverse managerial economics marketplace a flexible and up-to-date textbook. Baye offers coverage of both the basic concepts of managerial economics as well as frontier research in his chapter on advanced topics. The Fifth Edition also offers a detailed, real-world case study that explains how book theory translates into action in the business world. And the Data CD that comes with each book also contains eight "mini cases" that cover such high-profile businesses as Microsoft, Visa, and Staples. CONTENTS

1 The Fundamentals of Managerial Economics 2 Market Forces: Demand and Supply 3 Quantitative Demand Analysis 4 The Theory of Individual Behavior 5 The Production Process and Costs 6 The Organization of the Firm 7 The Nature of Industry 8 Managing in Competitive, Monopolistic, and Monopolistically Competitive Markets 9 Basic Oligopoly Models 10 Game Theory: Inside Oligopoly 11 Pricing Strategies for Firms with Market Power 12 The Economics of Information 13 Advanced Topics in Business Strategy 14 A Manager's Guide to Government

CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction Chapter 1 ~ Economic Organisations, Games and Strategies Part 2: The Firm and the Creation of Value Chapter 2 ~ Alternative Approaches to the Firm Chapter 3 ~ Vertical and Virtual Boundaries Chapter 4 ~ Horizontal boundaries and Diversification Chapter 5 ~ Growth and Entrepreneurship Chapter 6 ~ Corporate Control and Organisational Design Chapter 7 ~ Incentives and Human Resource Management Part 3: Capturing Value from the Market Chapter 8 ~ Market Structure and the Strategic Environment Chapter 9 ~ Imperfect Competition and Government Intervention Chapter 10 ~ The Dominant Firm and Predation Chapter 11 ~ Price Discrimination and Bundling Chapter 12 ~ Reputation and Vertical Restraints Chapter 13 ~ Product Differentiation and Advertising Chapter 14 ~ Invention, Innovation and Competitive Advantage

33

Economics

International Edition

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 8th Edition

Policies: Liability Laws, Property Rights, Voluntary Action 11 Command-and-Control Strategies: The Case of Standards 12 IncentiveBased Strategies: Emission Charges and Subsidies 13 Incentive-Based Strategies: Transferable Discharge Permits Section 5 ­ Environmental Policy in the United States 14 Federal Water Pollution ­ Control Policy 15 Federal Air Pollution ­ Control Policy 16 Federal Policy on Toxic and Hazardous Substances 17 State and Local Environmental Issues Section 6 ­ International Environmental Issues 18 Comparative Environmental Policies 19 Economic Development and the Environment 20 The Global Environment 21 International Environmental Agreements / Appendix: Abbreviations and Acronyms Used in the Book / Name Index / Subject Index

By Christopher R Thomas, University of South Florida and S Charles Maurice (Deceased) 2005 / 720 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287174-6 / MHID: 0-07-287174-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123834-2 / MHID: 0-07-123834-4 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/thomas8 Thomas and Maurice's Managerial Economics teaches students how to use microeconomic theory to analyze business decisions. In a clear and engaging writing style, Christopher Thomas carries on the tradition he and Charles Maurice shepherded for seven previous editions in the 8th edition. The 8th Edition explores the current market forces that create both opportunities and constraints for business enterprises. The book has enjoyed success in part because of its mid-level of rigor. CONTENTS

PREFACE / Part I: Some Preliminaries CHAPTER 1 Managers, Profits, and Markets CHAPTER 2 Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium CHAPTER 3 Marginal Analysis for Optimal Decision Making CHAPTER 4 Basic Estimation Techniques Part II: Demand Analysis CHAPTER 5 Theory of Consumer Behavior CHAPTER 6 Elasticity and Demand CHAPTER 7 Demand Estimation and Forecasting Part III: Production and Cost Analysis CHAPTER 8 Production and Cost in the Short Run CHAPTER 9 Production and Cost in the Long Run CHAPTER 10 Production and Cost Estimation On the website: Special Topic Module 1: Linear Programming Part IV: Profit-Maximization in Various Market Structures CHAPTER 11 Managerial Decisions in Competitive Markets CHAPTER 12 Managerial Decisions for Firms with Market Power CHAPTER 13 Strategic Decision Making in Oligopoly Markets Part V: Advanced Managerial Decision Making CHAPTER 14 Advanced Techniques for Profit Maximization CHAPTER 15 Decisions Under Risk and Uncertainty On the website: Special Topic Module 2: Investment Decisions / APPENDIX: STATISTICAL TABLES ANSWERS TO TECHNICAL PROBLEMS INDEX

Econometrics

International Edition

ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMETRICS 3rd Edition

By Damodar N Gujarati, United States Military Academy West Point 2006 / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313594-6 / MHID: 0-07-313594-1 (with Data Disk CD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124448-0 / MHID: 0-07-124448-4 [IE with Data CD]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/gujaratiess3 This text provides a simple and straightforward introduction to econometrics for the beginner. The author's intent is to provide the student with a "user friendly," non-intimidating introduction to econometric theory and techniques. The book motives students to understand econometric techniques through extensive examples, careful explanations, and a wide variety of problem material. The audience is undergraduate economics, agricultural economics, and business administration majors, MBA students and others in the social and behavioral sciences where econometric techniques, especially the techniques of linear regression analysis, are used. CONTENTS

Chapter 1 The Nature and Scope of Econometrics PART I Basics of Probability and Statistics Chapter 2 Review of Statistics I: Probability and Probability Distributions Chapter 3 Characteristics of Probability Distributions Chapter 4 Some Important Probability Distributions Chapter 5 Statistical Inference: Estimation and Hypothesis Testing PART II The Linear Regression Model Chapter 6 Basic Ideas of Linear Regression: The Two-Variable Model Chapter 7 The Two-Variable Model: Hypothesis Testing Chapter 8 Multiple Regression: Estimation and Hypothesis Testing Chapter 9 Functional Forms of Regression Models Chapter 10 Dummy Variable Regression Models Chapter 11 Model Selection: Criteria and Tests PART III Regression Analysis In Practice Chapter 12 Multicollinearity: What Happens if Explanatory Variable Are Correlated Chapter 13 Heteroscedasticity: What Happens If The Error Variance Is Nonconstant Chapter 14 Autocorrelation: What Happens If Error Terms Are Correlated PART IV Introduction to Simultaneous Equation Models Chapter 15 Simultaneous Equation Models Chapter 16 Selected Topics in Single Equation Regression Models

Environmental Economics

International Edition

ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 4th Edition

By Barry C. Field, University of Massachusetts-Amherst and Martha K Field, Greenfield Comm College 2006 / 528 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313751-3 / MHID: 0-07-313751-0 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125585-1 / MHID: 0-07-125585-0 [IE]

Twenty-one chapters covering Cost and Benefits of Environmental Policy, Environmental Analysis, Policy Analysis, US Policy (Air Pollution, Toxic Wastes, State and Local Issues), and International Environmental Issues. CONTENTS

Section 1 ­ Introduction 1 What is Environmental Economics? 2 The Economy and the Environment Section 2 ­ Analytical Tools 3 Benefits and Costs, Supply and Demand 4 Economic Efficiency and Markets 5 The Economics of Environmental Quality Section 3 ­ Environmental Analysis 6 Frameworks of Analysis 7 Benefit-Cost Analysis: Benefits 8 Benefit-Cost Analysis: Costs Section 4 ­ Environmental Policy Analysis 9 Criteria for Evaluating Environmental Policies 10 Decentralized

34

Economics

ECONOMETRICS

By Cameron 2005 / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710428-3 / MHID: 0-07-710428-5 (with CD and Online Learning Center) Chapter 14 Estimating multiple equations Part 6: Advanced Topics Chapter 15 Endogenous variables Chapter 16 Forecasting Chapter 17 Time series analysis Chapter 18 Nonlinear models Chapter 19 Dummy dependent variables Chapter 20 General discrete choice models

McGraw-Hill UK Title

Website: www.mcgraw-hill/textbooks/cameron Econometrics aims to introduce students with little or no previous experience in econometrics to this important discipline. This text focuses on explaining why econometrics exists and how it can be used in everyday life. This text adopts a strong student-focused approach to the discipline. In doing so, it aims to address fundamental issues in econometrics in an accessible manner for students, who are often put off by the difficult nature of econometrics. CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Introducing Econometrics Chapter 2: Statistical Testing and Modelling: The Basics Chapter 3: The Classical Linear Regression Model Introduced Chapter 4: Preparing and Using Data Chapter 5: What do all these tests and statistics mean? Chapter 6: Making Regression Analysis More Useful I: Transformation Chapter 7: Making Regression Analysis More Useful II: Dummies and Trends Chapter 8: Predicting and Explaining Discrete Events: Logit and Probit Models Chapter 9: More Tests: Diagnosing the results of basic models Chapter 10: Multicollinearity: Serious Worry or Minor Nuisance? Chapter 11: Problem Solving: Heteroscedasticity Chapter 12: Multiple equation models: Specification and the Identification Problem Chapter 13: Multiple equation models: Methods of Estimation Chapter 14: Problem Solving: Time-Series Chapter 15: Conclusion Appendices: Blank Template of Summary Sheet for Review Studies./ Brief Description of the Excel files of Data Sets./ The Notion of Causality / 4 Statistical Tables / 5 Probability / 6 Standard error of the regression coefficient / 7 Derivation of the normal equations for a multiple regression mode

International Edition

BASIC ECONOMETRICS 4th Edition

By Damodar N Gujarati, United States Military Academy West Point 2003 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247852-5 / MHID: 0-07-247852-7 (with Data Disk, Mandatory Pacakge) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123017-9 / MHID: 0-07-123017-3 [IE with CD]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/gujarati4 CONTENTS

1. The Nature of Regression Analysis. 2. Two-Variable Regression Analysis: Some Basic Ideas. 3. Two Variable Regression Model: The Problem of Estimation. 4. The Normality Assumption: Classical Normal Linear Regression Model. 5. Two-Variable Regression: Interval Estimation and Hypothesis Testing. 6. Extensions of the Two-Variable Linear Regression Model. 7. Multiple Regression Analysis: The Problem of Estimation. 8. Multiple Regression Analysis: The Problem of Inference. 9. Regression on Dummy variables. 10. Multicollinearity: What happens if the Regressor are correlated. 11. Heteroscedasticity. 12. Autocorrelation. 13. Econometric Modeling I: Traditional Econometric Methodology. 14. Econometric Modeling II: Alternative Econometric Methodologies. 15. Regression on Dummy Dependent Variable: The LPM, Probit, and Tobit Models 16. Nominal Ordinal and other Limited Dependent Variable regression models. 17. Dynamic Econometric Model: Autoregressive and Distributed Lag Models. 18. Simultaneous-Equation Models. 19. The Identification Problem. 20. Simultaneous-Equation Methods. 21. Time Series Econometrics I: Stationarity, Unit Roots, and Cointegration. 22. Time Series Econometrics II: ARIMA and VAR Models. 23. Nonlinear in the Parameter Regression Models 24. Panel Data Regression Models Appendixes A. A Review of Some Statistical Concepts B. Rudiments of Matrix Algebra C. Linear Regression Model in Matrix Notation D. Statistical Tables Selected Bibliography Indexes: Name Index / Subject Index

International Edition

ECONOMETRICS

By Stephen Schmidt, Union College 2005 (March 2004) / 524 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298316-6 / MHID: 0-07-298316-7 (with Data CD) - Out of print ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320030-9 / MHID: 0-07-320030-1 (Revised, with Data CD) - Out of Print ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111396-0 / MHID: 0-07-111396-7 [IE with Data CD]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/schmidt1 Stephen Schmidt is a superb and dedicated professor at a very good, liberal arts college, (Union in Schenectady, NY). After obtaining a PhD in Economics from Stanford University and teaching for 8 years, he has now written the book he has always wanted to write and use--an econometrics book that excites and motivates students about the value of statistical analysis in economics and gives them all of the tools they will need to do this analysis themselves. The goal of this book is to show students that econometric analysis is the bridge that connects economic theory with economic policy. CONTENTS

Part 1: Econometric Analysis Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Designing an econometric project Part 2: Probability and Statistics Chapter 3 Random variables Chapter 4 Estimation Chapter 5 Hypothesis testing Part 3: Linear Regression Chapter 6 Least Squares Regression Chapter 7 Properties of the least squares estimator Chapter 8 Multivariate regression Part 4: Topics in Linear Regression Chapter 9 Selecting a Functional Form Chapter 10 Determining the econometric specification Chapter 11 Instability of the regression equation Part 5: Violations of the Regression Model Chapter 12 Autocorrelation Chapter 13 Heteroskedasticity

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF STATISTICS AND ECONOMETRICS 2nd Edition

By Dominick Salvatore and Derrick Reagle of Fordham University 2002 / 256 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-134852-2 / MHID: 0-07-134852-2

A Schaum Publication

CONTENTS

Introduction. / Descriptive Statistics. / Probability and Probability Distributions. / Statistics Inference: Estimation. / Statistical Inference: Testing Hypothesis. / Statistics Examination. / Simple Regression Analysis. / Multiple Regression Analysis. / Problems in Regression Analysis. / Further Techniques and Applications in Regression Analysis. / SimultaneousEquations Methods. / Time Series Econometrics. / Statistics Examination. / Bionomial Distribution. / Poisson Distribution. / Standard Normal Distribution. / Table of Random Numbers. / Student t Distribution. / Chi-Square Distribution. / F Distribution. / Durbin-Watson Statistics. / Critical Values of Runs in the Run Tests.

35

Economics

International Edition

ECONOMETRIC MODELS AND ECONOMIC FORECASTS 4th Edition

Mathematical Economics

SCHAUM'S EASY OUTLINE OF INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS

By Edward T Dowling, Fordham University 2006 / 160 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145534-3 / MHID: 0-07-145534-5

By Robert S Pindyck, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and Daniel L Rubinfeld, University of California, Berkeley 1998 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-913292-5 / MHID: 0-07-913292-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115836-7 / MHID: 0-07-115836-7 [IE]

A Schaum Professsional Publication

When you are looking for a quick nuts-and-bolts overview, there's no series that does it better. Schaum's Easy Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics is a pared-down, simplified, and tightly focused version of its predecessor. Designed to appeal to underprepared students and readers turned off by dense text Cartoons, sidebars, icons, and other graphic pointers get the material across fast Concise text focuses on the essence of the subject Delivers expert help from teachers who are authorities in their fields Perfect for last-minute test preparation

CONTENTS

The Basics of Regression Analysis: Chapter 1. Introduction to the Regression Model. Chapter 2. Elementary Statistics. Chapter 3. The Two-Variable Regression Model. Chapter 4. The Multiple Regression Model. Chapter 5. Using the Multiple Regression Model. Chapter 6. Serial Correlation and Heterosedasticity. Chapter 7. Instrumental Variables and Model Specification. Chapter 8. Forecasting with a Single-Equation Regression Model. Chapter 9. Single-Equation Estimation. Chapter 10. Nonlinear and Maximum-Likelihood Estimation.

International Edition

ECONOMETRIC METHODS 4th Edition

By John Johnston, University of California, Irvine and John DiNardo, Massachusetts Institute of Technology 1997 / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-913121-8 / MHID: 0-07-913121-2 (with 3.5" disk) - (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115342-3 / MHID: 0-07-115342-X [IE with 3.5" Disk]

International Edition

FUNDAMENTAL METHODS OF MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS 4th Edition

By Alpha C Chiang, University of Connecticut and Kevin Wainwright, Simon Fraser University 2005 / 696 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-010910-0 / MHID: 0-07-010910-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123823-6 / MHID: 0-07-123823-9 [IE]

CONTENTS

1 Relationships Between Two Variables 2 Further Aspects of Two Variable Relationships 3 The k-Variable Linear Equation 4 Some Tests of the k-Variable Linear Equation for Specification Error 5 Maximum Likelihood (ML), Generalized Least Squares (GLS), and Instrumental Variable (IV) Estimators 6 Heteroscedasticity and Autocorrelation 7 Single Equation Modeling I: The Univariate Case 8 Single Equation Modeling II: The Multivariate Case 9 Multiple Equation Models 10 Generalized Method of Moments 11 A Smorgasbord of Computationally Intensive Methods 12 Limited Dependent Variable and Related Models 13 Panel Data

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/economics/chiang4e It has been 20 years since the last edition of this classic text. Kevin Wainwright, a long time user of the text (British Columbia University and Simon Fraser University), has executed the perfect revision¿-he has updated examples, applications and theory without changing the elegant, precise presentation style of Alpha Chiang. Readers will find the wait was worthwhile. CONTENTS

PART 1 Introduction Chapter 1: The Nature of Mathematical Economics Chapter 2: Economic Models PART 2 Static (or Equilibrium) Analysis Chapter 3: Equilibrium Analysis in Economics Chapter 4: Linear Models and Matrix Algebra Chapter 5: Linear Models and Matrix Algebra (continued) PART 3 Comparative-Static Analysis Chapter 6: Comparative Statics and the Concept of the Derivative Chapter 7: Rules of Differentiation and their use in Comparative Statics Chapter 8: Comparative-Static Analysis of General-Function Models PART 4 Optimization Problems Chapter 9: Optimization: A Special Variety of Equilibrium Analysis Chapter 10: Exponential and Logarithmic Functions Chapter 11: The Case of More Than One Choice Variable Chapter 12: Optimization with Equality Constraints NEW Chapter 13: Further Topics in Optimization (includes Envelope Theorem and Duality PART 5 Dynamic Analysis Chapter 14 Economic Analysis and Integral Calculus Chapter 15 Continuous Time: First Order Differential Equations Chapter 16 Higher-Order Differential Equations Chapter 17 DiscreteTime: First Order Difference Equations Chapter 18 Higher Order Difference Equations Chapter 19 Simultaneous Differential Equations and Difference Equations NEW Chapter 20: Introduction to Optimal Control Theory

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected]

Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg

36

Economics

International Edition

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS 3rd Edition

By Edward T. Dowling, Fordham University 2001 / 523 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-135896-5 / MHID: 0-07-135896-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118871-5 / MHID: 0-07-118871-1 [IE] Planning Horizon. 6. Constrained Problems. PART THREE: OPTIMAL CONTROL THEORY: 7. Optimal Control. 8. More on Optimal Control. 9. Infinite-Horizon Problems. 10. Optimal Control with Constraints.

Money and Banking

International Edition

MONEY, BANKING AND FINANCIAL MARKETS

By Stephen G. Cecchetti 2006 (January 2005) / 704 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-245269-3 / MHID: 0-07-245269-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111565-0 / MHID: 0-07-111565-X [IE]

A Schaum Professional Publication

CONTENTS

Review. / Economic Applications of Graphs and Equations. / The Derivative and the Rules of Differentiation. / Uses of the Derivative in Mathematics and Economics. / Calculus of Multivariable Functions. / Caculus of Multivariable Functions in Economics. / Exponential and Logarithmic Functions in Economics. / Differentiation of Exponential and Logarithmic Functions. / The Fundamentals of Linear (or Matrix) Algebra. / Matrix Inversion. / Special Determinants and Matrices and Their Use in Economics. / Comparative Statics and Concave Programming. / IUntegral Calculus: The Indefinite Integral. / Integral Calculus: The Definite Integral. / First-Order Differential Equations. / First Order Difference Equations. / Second-Order Differential Equations and Difference Equations. / Simultaneous Differential and Difference Equations. / The Calculus of Variations. / Optimal Control Theory.

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/cecchetti Stephen Cecchetti's new text on Money and Banking offers a fresh, more modern, and more student-friendly approach to the subject. The author has drawn on his vast experience as Vice President at the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, publishing in and editing various journals, and consulting for the European Central Bank, the Bank of England, the Bank of Israel, and the Reserve Bank of Australia as well as his years of teaching at various schools including Ohio State, Brandeis, Princeton, and Oxford University. Students will find the material more relevant and interesting because of the book's unique emphasis on the Five Core Principles, the early introduction of risk, and an integrated global perspective. Cecchetti is THE money and banking book for today's students; by focusing on the big picture via core principles, Cecchetti teaches students the rationale for financial rules and institutional structure so that even when the financial system evolves, students' knowledge will not be out of date. CONTENTS

Money, Banking, and Financial Markets Brief Contents Part I. Money and the Financial System Chapter 1. An Introduction to Money and the Financial System Chapter 2. Money and the Payments System Chapter 3. Financial Instruments, Financial Markets, and Financial Institutions Part II. Interest Rates, Financial Instruments, and Financial Markets Chapter 4. Future Value, Present Value and Interest Rates Appendix 4: The Algebra of Present-Value Formulas Chapter 5. Understanding Risk Appendix 5A: A Quick Test to Measure Your Risk Tolerance Appendix 5B: The Mathematics of Diversification Chapter 6. Bonds, Bond Prices and the Determination of Interest Rates Chapter 7. The Risk and Term Structure of Interest Rates Chapter 8. Stocks, Stock Markets and Market Efficiency Chapter 9. Derivatives: Futures, Options and Swaps Chapter 10. Foreign Exchange Appendix 10: Interest Rate-Parity and Short-Run Exchange Rate Determination Part III. Financial Institutions Chapter 11. The Economics of Financial Intermediation Chapter 12. Depository Institutions: Banks and Bank Management Chapter 13. Financial Industry Structure Chapter 14. Regulating the Financial System Part IV. Central Banks, Monetary Policy, and Financial Stability Chapter 15. Central Banks in the World Today Chapter 16. The Structure of Central Banks: The U.S. Federal Reserve and the European Central Bank Chapter 17. The Central Bank Balance Sheet and the Money Supply Process Chapter 18. Monetary Policy: Using Interest Rates to Stabilize the Domestic Economy Chapter 19. Exchange-Rate Policy and the Central Bank Appendix 19: What You Really Need to Know about the Balance of Payments Part V. Modern Monetary Economics Chapter 20. Money Growth, Money Demand, and Monetary Policy Chapter 21. Monetary Policy and Aggregate Demand Chapter 22. Understanding Business Cycles Chapter 23. Monetary Policy, Output, and Inflation in the Short Run / Glossary / Index

International Edition

THE STRUCTURE OF ECONOMICS A Mathematical Analysis, 3rd Edition

By Eugene Silberberg, University of Washington and Wing Suen 2001 / 688 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234352-6 / MHID: 0-07-234352-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118136-5 / MHID: 0-07-118136-9 [IE]

CONTENTS

1. Comparative Statics and the Paradigm of Economics 2. Review of Calculus (One Variable) 3. Functions of Several Variables 4. Profit Maximization 5. Matrices and Determinants 6. Comparative Statics: The Traditional Methodology 7. The Envelope Theorem and Duality 8. The Derivation of Cost functions 9. Cost and Production Functions: Special Topics 10. The Derivation of Consumer Demand Functions 11. Special topics in Consumer Theory 12. Intertemporal Choice 13. Behavior under Uncertainty 14. Maximization with Inequality and Nonnegativity Constraints 15. Contracts and Incentives 16. Markets with Imperfect Information 17. General Equilibrium I: Linear Models 18. General Equilibrium II: Nonlinear Models 19. Welfare Economics 20. Resource Allocation over Time: Optimal Control theory

International Edition

ELEMENTS OF DYNAMIC OPTIMIZATION

By Alpha C Chiang, University of Connecticut 1992 / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-010911-7 / MHID: 0-07-010911-7 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112568-0 / MHID: 0-07-112568-X [IE]

CONTENTS

PART ONE: INTRODUCTION: 1. The Nature of Dynamic Optimization. PART TWO: CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS: 2. The Fundamental Problem of Calculus of Variations. 3. Transversality Conditions for Variable-Endpoint Problems. 4. Second-Order Conditions. 5. Infinite

37

Economics

International Economics

International Edition

by presenting the WTO dispute cases in which the U.S. government has accused the European Union of subsidizing Airbus, and the European Union has accused the U.S. government of subsidizing Boeing. In-depth Analysis: A range of trade policy issues are analyzed. For the prominent issues of dumping by foreign exporters and subsidies offered by foreign governments, Chapter 11 now features recent research that documents biases in the methods used by the Department of Commerce in its antidumping investigations. Also, recent decisions by the World Trade Organization that U.S. subsidies to its cotton production and EU subsidies to its sugar production violate WTO rules are included. Finally, a new Case Study box brings life to strategic trade policy by presenting the WTO dispute cases in which the U.S. government has accused the European Union of subsidizing Airbus, and the European Union has accused the U.S. government of subsidizing Boeing. subsidies. Latest Sources: Material was created using the latest available sources to update the wide range of data and information presented in the figures and text of the book. Among many other updates, the book offers the latest information on factor endowments, trends in the relative prices of primary products, patterns of foreign direct investments broadly and by major home country, the sizes of foreign exchange trading and foreign exchange futures, swaps, and options, evidence about relative purchasing power parity, and the exchange rate policies chosen by national governments.

NEW

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 13th Edition

By Thomas Pugel, New York University 2007 (May 2006) / 800 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352302-6 / MHID: 0-07-352302-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110727-3 / MHID: 0-07-110727-4 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/pugel13 This classic text has sold well for a half century because it covers all the conventional areas of international economics in an easyto-understand manner. The 13th edition continues to provide the best blend of events and analysis, so that readers can build their abilities to understand global economic developments and to evaluate proposals for changes in economic policies. The book is informed by current events and by the latest in applied international research. It combines rigorous economic analysis with attention to the issues of economic policy that are alive and important today. This concise and readable text uses economic terminology when it enhances the analysis, but avoids jargon for jargon's sake. Like earlier editions, it also places international economics events within a historical framework. The overall treatment continues to be intuitive rather than mathematical and is strongly oriented towards policy. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Four Introductory Key Events: The four "key events" for Chapter 1 in this new edition include: a new discussion on "Outsourcing," an updated discussion of "Poor Workers in Poor Countries," a revised and updated discussion of "The Euro," and a new discussion entitled "China Revalues its Currency." Focus on China: A new series of text boxes entitled "Focus on China" address the growing importance of China and the interesting economic issues specific to China and the US trade relationships with China. New Glossary: This new Glossary lists all the key terms from the chapters and their definitions. Key terms (without their definitions) from each chapter are now also listed in the end matter between the Summary and Suggested Reading. Easier Reading: Larger font size for the captions makes them easier to read and more bullet-point lists break up the long paragraphs, making densely packed information easier to understand. Split Chapter: Chapter 3 in the last edition was rather long, and in this edition this chapter is divided into two, with the new Chapter 3 focusing on the concepts of absolute and comparative advantage from Smith and Ricardo, and the new Chapter 4 presenting the Heckscher-Ohlin theory and the tools that economists use to develop this theory. Streamlined Chapter: Chapter 16 has been streamlined to focus on the use and meaning of balance of payments information. While basic accounting principles underlying the balance of payments are explained, details of posting specific transactions are moved to the new Appendix E. In addition, the presentation of the U.S. balance of payments as an example is now in a more user-friendly format. These U.S. data for 2004 provide an excellent launching base for discussions of the meaning of current account deficits and the link of the overall balance to intervention in the foreign exchange market. New Case Studies: A new Case Study box in Chapter 9 describes the global web of quantitative limits on trade in clothing and textiles (the Multifibre Arrangement) and the negotiated end to these limits as of January 1, 2005. The box also discusses the new limits imposed during 2005 by the United States and the European Union on imports from China, so that the "temporary" trade restraints have been resurrected. A new Case Study box in Chapter 11 brings life to strategic trade policy

FEATURES

AS/AD Framework Appendix: This appendix presents the aggregate demand-aggregate supply framework as an approach to open-economy macroeconomics. This provides flexibility for instructors who would like to include this approach in their course. Labor Issues Discussed: The book continues to weave discussion of labor issues into a number of chapters in Parts I and II. WTO Discussions: Consistent discussion of and reference to the World Trade Organization (WTO) in international trade policy. Trade and the Environment: The chapter on international environmental issues continues as a unique and powerful treatment of issues of major interest to many students. It includes discussion of such topics as WTO rulings on environmental policies that affect international trade, transborder pollution, ozone depletion, and global warming. End-of-Chapter Questions: each chapter has at least ten questions and problems. Every odd-numbered problem has an answer provided at the back of the text. Students are able to check their understanding of the material more effectively. Balanced Coverage: The text covers all of the conventional topics in International Economics while grappling with the issues that are being discussed in today's economic journals and newspapers. Real Situations: Applications taken from real economic situations appear in two-color boxes, so students immediately see the relevance of theory to world economics.

CONTENTS

1. International Economics Is Different. Part I: The Theory of International Trade. 2. The Basic Theory Using Demand and Supply. 3. Why Everybody Trades: Comparative Advantage and Factor Proportions. 4. Who Gains and Who Loses from Trade? 5. Alternative Theories of Trade. 6. Growth and Trade. Part II: Trade Policy. 7. The Basic Analysis of Tariffs. 8. Nontariff Barriers to Imports. 9. Arguments For and Against Protection. 10. Pushing Exports. 11. Trade Blocs and Trade Blocks. 12. Trade and the Environment. 13. Trade Policies for Developing and Transition Countries. 14. Multinationals and Migration: International Factor Movements. Part III: Understanding Foreign Exchange. 15: Payments Among Nations. 16. The Foreign Exchange Market. 17. Forward Exchange and International Financial Investment. 18. What Determines Exchange Rates. 19. Government Policies Toward the Foreign Exchange Market. 20. International Lending and Financial Crises. Part IV: Macro Policies for Open Economies. 21. How Does the Open Macroeconomy Work? 22. Internal and External Balance with Fixed Exchange Rates. 23. Floating Exchange Rates and Internal Balance. 24. National and Global Choices: Floating Rates and the Alternatives. Appendix A: Where the International Information Is. Appendix B: Deriving Production-Possibili-

38

Economics

ties Curves. Appendix C: Offer Curves. Appendix D: The Nationally Optimal Tariff. Appendix E: Many Parities at Once. Appendix F: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply in the Open Economy. Appendix G: Devaluation and the Current Account

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 4th Edition

By Francis Cherunilam, Cochin University of Science and Technology 2005 (December 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-059942-0 / MHID: 0-07-059942-4

Tata McGraw-Hill Title

International Edition

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 5th Edition

CONTENTS

Part 1: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND THE GLOBAL ECONOMY 1. Introduction 2.International Economic Gap and NIEO 3. Global Trade 4. Globalisation Part 2: BASES OF TRADE AND DEVELOPMENT 5. Analytical Tools 6. Theories of International Trade 7. Gains from trade and Terms of Trade 8 Economic Growth and Trade Part 3: TRADE POLPCIES AND ISSUES 9. Trade Strategy 10. Trade Barriers 11. International Cartels, Commodity Agreements and State Trading 12. Social Issues in Trade Part 4: ECONOMIC INTEGRATION AND COOPERATION 13. Economic Integration 14. South-South Cooperation Part 5: INTERNATIONAL MONETARY ECONOMICS 15. Balance of Payments 16. Policies for Internal and External balance 17. International Monetary System 18. Foreign Exchange 19. International Liquidity and Reserves 20. International Banking and Eurocurrency Market Part 6: INTERNATIONAL FACTOR MOBILITY 21. International Capital Flows 22. Multinational Corporations 23. Transfer of Technology 24. Official Development Assistance 25. International Debt 26. International Migration Part 7: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC ORGANISATIONS 27. IMF and Development Organisations 28. World Trade Organisation Part 8: TRDE POLICY AND PERFORMANCE OF INDIA 29. Trade Regulation and Promotion 30. Trade and BOP of India

By Dennis R Appleyard, Davidson College, Alfred J Field, University of North Carolina - Chapel Hill and Steven Cobb, University of North Texas 2006 / 816 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287737-3 / MHID: 0-07-287737-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125092-4 / MHID: 0-07-125092-1 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/appleyard5e Appleyard, Field, and Cobb's International Economics 5e text is an International Economics textbook that offers a consistent level of analysis and treatment of the two main subdivisions of international economics--international trade theory and policy and international monetary theory and policy. Comprehensive and clear, the text helps students move beyond recognition toward and understanding of current and future international events. A new co-author, Steven L. Cobb from the University of North Texas, joins the book this edition and brings expertise especially in the fields of economic education and transition economies, particularly those in Eastern Europe. CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 1. The World of International Economics PART I 2. Early Trade Theories: Mercantilism and the Transition to the Classical World of David Ricardo 3. The Classical World of David Ricardo and Comparative Advantage 4. Extensions and Tests of the Classical Model of Trade PART II 5. Introduction to Neoclassical Trade Theory: Tools to Be Employed 6. Gains from Trade in Neoclassical Theory 7. Offer Curves and the Terms of Trade 8. The Basis for Trade: Factor Endowments and the Heckscher-Ohlin Model 9. Empirical Tests of the Factor Endowments Approach PART III 10. Post Heckscher-Ohlin Theories of Trade and Intra-Industry Trade 11. Economic Growth and International Trade 12. International Factor Movements PART IV 13. The Instruments of Trade Policy 14. The Impact of Trade Policies 15. Arguments for Interventionist Trade Policies 16. Political Economy and Recent U.S. Trade Policy 17. Economic Integration 18. International Trade and the Developing Countries PART V 19. The Balance of Payments Accounts 20. The Foreign Exchange Market 21. International Financial Markets and Instruments: An Introduction 22. The Monetary and Portfolio Balance Approaches to External Balance 23. Price Adjustments and Balance of Payments Disequilibrium 24. National Income and the Current Account PART VI 25. Economic Policy in the Open Economy: Fixed Exchange Rates 26. Economic Policy in the Open Economy: Flexible Exchange Rates 27. Prices and Output in the Open Economy: Aggregate Supply and Demand PART VII 28. Fixed or Flexible Exchange Rates? 29. The International Monetary System: Past, Present, and Future

INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND INVESTMENT 2nd Edition

By John Gionea 2005 / 488 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471559-8 / MHID: 0-07-471559-3

McGraw-Hill Australia Title

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/au/gionea2e The latest edition of International Trade and Investment: An Asia-Pacific Perspective is a must for any student undertaking subjects in international trade or international business. The text provides valuable insight into the challenges of doing business in today's global economy. The second edition contains a new chapter outlining recent global trends in trade and investment along with new and revised case studies, giving the book a useful practical focus. International Trade and Investment: An Asia-Pacific Perspective is written in a language and style that makes it suitable for students at various levels of study. It is ideal for international business and international trade subjects at all stages, including those found in TAFE, Undergraduate, Graduate and Executive programs. CONTENTS

Part I: Introduction Chapter 1: Trade and investment in a global economy Part II:Global trade and investment patterns Chapter 2: International trade in goods and services Chapter 3: International trade theory Chapter 4: Foreign Direct Investment-practice and theory Chapter 5: Australia's position in international trade and investment Part III: The global trade and investment environment Chapter 6: Instruments of trade and investment policies Chapter 7:The multilateral trade and investment framework Chapter 8: Regional economic integration Chapter 9:The foreign exchange market Chapter 10: The balance of payments Chapter 11:The international monetary system Part IV: Global business strategies Chapter 12: The firm's market-entry strategies Chapter 13: Export import management Part V: Doing business in... Chapter 14: Advanced economies Chapter 15: Emerging markets and developing economies Part VI: Sectoral trends Chapter 16: Global industry profiles / Appendix A: The grain industry / Appendix B: The automotive industry / Appendix C: The telecommunications industry / Selected references / Glossary of key terms

3

Economics

International Edition

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS

By Hendrik Van Den Berg, University of Nebraska--Lincoln 2004 / 672 pages ISBn-13: 978-0-07-239796-3 / MHID: 0-07-239796-9 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121517-6 / MHID: 0-07-121517-4 [IE]

Industrial Organization

INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS AND ORGANIZATION A European Perspective, 2nd Edition

By David Jacobson, Dublin City University and Bernadette Andreosso-O' Callaghan, University of Limerick 2005 / 400 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710422-1 / MHID: 0-07-710422-6

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/vandenberg/international Author Hank Van den Berg had a fourteen-year career in the US State Department and with multinational companies overseas prior to getting his PhD at the University of Wisconsin. As a result, international economics has been a favorite subject for him. After eleven years of teaching International Economics in a variety of Colleges at the University of Nebraska (Business Administration, Arts and Sciences, and Architecture), Hank was ready to begin his own text. He was particularly interested in writing a book that would engage students more than the existing ones do and appeal to the diverse audience he has taught (adult students, students from a variety of countries, students with a variety of academic interests). CONTENTS

Chapter 1: International Economics and the Global Economy Chapter 2: The Open Economy Chapter 3: The Gains from Trade: A Partial Equilibrium View Chapter 4: Why Nations Trade: A Partial Equilibrium View Chapter 5: International Trade and Economic Growth Chapter 6: Protectionism: How Nations Restrict Trade Chapter 7: Why Do Countries Restrict Foreign Trade? Chapter 8: Trade Policy: Past Present and Future Chapter 9: Trade Discrimination: Free Trade Areas and Anti-Dumping Protection Chapter 10: The Economics of International Investment Chapter 11: The Many Forms of International Investment Chapter 12: The Foreign Exchange Market Chapter 13: Economics Policy in and Open Economy Chapter 14: The Evolution of the International Financial System Chapter 15: The International Migration of People Chapter 16: Immigration Policy Chapter 17: The Future Path of Globalization

McGraw-Hill UK Title

Website: www.mcgraw-hill/textbooks/jacobson Industrial Economics and Organisation: A European Perspective presents an authoritative account of both traditional and current theories in industrial economics. This new edition aims to capitalise on the key strengths of the first edition while bringing this edition up to date. It has done so by integrating new material on recent theoretical developments, such as stakeholder theory and technological change and innovation, as well as recent political and economic changes, for example in relation to Eastern Europe. Its European focus successfully draws on a number of European examples to clearly illustrate key theoretical concepts to the reader. CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Industrial Economics Chapter 3: Neoclassical Theory of the Firm Chapter 4: Other Theories of the Firm Chapter 5: Market Structure Chapter 6: Structure and Strategy: Oligopoly Chapter 7: Industry in the EU Chapter 8: Location and Industrial Development Chapter 9: Pricing behavior of firms Chapter 10: Non-price strategies Chapter 11: Technological change and innovation Chapter 12: Performance of firms Chapter 13: Performance of EU firms and industries Chapter 14: Multinational Enterprises and Globalization Chapter 15: Aspects of Industrial Policy

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 4th Edition

By Dominick Salvatore, Fordham University--Bronx 1996 / 288 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-054950-0 / MHID: 0-07-054950-8

History of Economic Thought

International Edition

A HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THEORY AND METHOD 4th Edition

By Robert B. Ekelund, Jr., Auburn University and Robert F. Herbert, Auburn University 1997 / 688 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-021327-2 / MHID: 0-07-021327-5 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114282-3 / MHID: 0-07-114282-7 [IE]

A Schaum Professional Publication

Outstanding for its easy-to-understand explanations of international economics, this guide covers all course fundamentals and supplements any class text. It takes students through the solution of hundreds of problems dealing with demand and supply in trade, the foreign exchange markets, flexible and fixed exchange rates and much more. Also includes practice midterm and final exams.

CONTENTS

Part I: Introduction and Early Beginnings. Part II: The Classical Period. Part III: Reactions and Alternatives to Classical Theory in the Nineteenth Century. Part IV: Microeconomics in Europe and England. Part V: Twentieth-Century Paradigms.

40

Economics

Labor Economics

International Edition

LABOR ECONOMICS 4th Edition ANNUAL EDITIONS: LABOR-MANAGEMENT RELATIONS 05/06

By John Overby, University of Tenn-Martin 2006 / 240 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310917-6 / MHID: 0-07-310917-7

NEW

McGraw-Hill/Dushkin Title

Website: http://www.dushkin.com/catalog/0073109177.mhtml Annual Editions: Labor-Management Relations 05/06 was developed to show both the breadth and depth of the labor-management relations field not only in the United States, but around the world. It provides perspectives to students from the legal issues, the managerial view, the union's view, and global views. Since the mid-1950's, union membership has continually been declining in the United States. At the same time, employees are faced with an increasing workload; decreases in benefits and pensions; wage concessions; and the loss of jobs to outsourcing. What is taking place within these circumstances? To better understand what is happening, Annual Editions: Labor-Management Relations 05/06 looks at the inherent struggle between labor and management as well as the legal and global contexts in which it occurs. What does the future hold for labor-management relations? CONTENTS

UNIT 1. HISTORICAL AND LEGAL REGULATION OF COLLECTIVE BARGAINING New! 1. Basic Labor Law New! 2. Individual "Concerted" Activity Under Federal Labor Laws New! 3. U.S. Labor Law New! 4. Weingarten Rights in Non-Union Settings New! 5. Labor Pains for Union-Free Employers New! 6. The Impact of Employer E-Mail Policies on Employee Rights to Engage in Concerted Activities Protected by the National Labor Relations Act New! 7. The Thirteenth Amendment and the Right to Strike New! 8. Does America Need a National Rightto-work Law? (Pro and Con arguments) New! 9. The 'Living Wage': It Couldn't Do Any Harm New! 10. Palace Coup at the AFL-CIO New! 11. Building Strength UNIT 2. STRATEGIES FOR COLLECTIVE BARGAINING New! 12. Guaranteeing Opportunity For The Workers New! 13. Should Collective Bargaining and Labor Relations be Less Adversarial? New! 14. The Developing Law of Neutrality Agreements New! 15. Who Will Fold First? New! 16. E-Organizing, The Next Frontier? Labor Unions Seek Access to Company E-mail Systems New! 17. PC Use at Home and for Union Organizing--New Challenges in the Wired Workplace New! 18. Collective Bargaining is the Right Step New! 19. Up Against Wal-Mart New! 20. Rollback WAGES! Will Labor Take the Wal-Mart Challenge? New! 21. Street Corner, Incorporated UNIT 3. LABOR-MANAGEMENT CONTRACT NEGOTIATIONS New! 22. Labor Contract Negotiations in the Airline Industry New! 23. Process, Strategy, and Tactics in Labor-Management Mediation New! 24. Tortilla Flap New! 25. Labor Adversaries Bury the Hatchet New! 26. The New Deal New! 27. Labor and Management Build a Prescription for Health New! 28. Deauthorization and Decertification Elections: An Analysis and Comparison of Trends UNIT 4. DISPUTE RESOLUTION AND ADMINISTERING THE RELATIONSHIP New! 29. Psychological Contracts in the Workplace: Understanding the Ties That Motivate New! 30. Good Management/Union Relations can be a Sweet Deal New! 31. Mending Labor-Management Relationships New! 32. Nature vs. Nurture New! 33. Quaker Oats Co. New! 34. Ambiguities in Labor Contracts: Where do They Come From? New! 35. Minimizing the Likelihood of Employment Litigation New! 36. The Pivotal Role of Labor-Management Committees New! 37. Behavioral Safety: A Necessary Part of the Whole New! 38. Delphi Gets a Handle on Hand Protection New! 39. Union Liability in Discrimination Cases New! 40. Dispatches from Decatur: Community is the First Casualty in America's Labor Wars UNIT 5. Public Sector Collective Bargaining New! 41. Making Labor-Management Relations Integral to the Management Process New! 42. Union Monopoly is Bad for Teachers New! 43. Trade Unions: The Facts UNIT 6. INTERNATIONAL COLLECTIVE BARGAINING New! 44. Taming the Tiger New! 45. Shut Up or Die! New! 46. Employment Tribunals: Using Your Last Resort New! 47. The "Race to the Bottom" in Imported Clothes UNIT 7. THE FUTURE OF LABOR UNION MOVEMENT IN THE UNITED STATES New! 48. Are Unions Obsolete? Neuhaus v. O'Connor on Labor New! 49. A Proposal for a Twenty-First-Century Trade Union Education League: An Attempt to Solve the Crisis of Organizing the Unorganized New! 50. The Working Poor in 2001

By George J Borjas, Harvard University-Cambridge 2008 (March 2007) / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340282-6 / MHID: 0-07-340282-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110142-X4 / MHID: 0-07-110142-X [IE]

(Details unavailable at press time)

International Edition

CONTEMPORARY LABOR ECONOMICS 7th Edition

By Campbell R. McConnell, University of Nebraska, Emeritus, Stanley L. Brue, Pacific Lutheran University, David Macpherson, Florida State University--Tallahassee 2006 / 672 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297860-5 / MHID: 0-07-297860-0 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111621-3 / MHID: 0-07-111621-4 [IE]

Website: http://www.contemporarylabor.com Contemporary Labor Economics, 7e presents the "new" labor economics. In the past, study of labor was highly descriptive, emphasizing historical developments, facts, institutions, and legal considerations. Labor markets and unemployment was accorded some attention, but the analysis was typically minimal. This state of affairs has changed significantly in recent decades. Economists have achieved important breakthroughs in studying labor markets and problems. Labor economics is increasingly an applied field of micro and macro theory and has become a critical part of the core of analytical economics. As a result, the focus of the text is on the "new" labor economics. However, it also presents traditional topics such as labor law, structure of unions, and collective bargaining since these issues also play an important role in labor markets. CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Labor Economics Introduction and Overview Chapter 2: The Theory of Individual Labor Supply Chapter 3: Population, Participation Rates, and Hours of Work Chapter 4: Labor Quality: Investing in Human Capital Chapter 5: The Demand for Labor Chapter 6: Wage Determination and the Allocation of Labor Chapter 7: Alternative Pay Schemes and Labor Efficiency Chapter 8: The Wage Structure Chapter 9: Mobility, Migration, and Efficiency Chapter 10: Labor Unions and Collective Bargaining Chapter 11: The Economic Impact of Unions Chapter 12: Government and the Labor Market: Employment, Expenditures, and Taxation Chapter 13: Government and the Labor Market: Legislation and Regulation Chapter 14: Labor Market Discrimination Chapter 15: Job Search: External and Internal Chapter 16: The Distribution of Personal Earnings Chapter 17: Labor Productivity: Wages, Prices, and Employment Chapter 18: Employment and Unemployment

41

Economics

International Edition

LABOR ECONOMICS 3rd Edition

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Leaner Writing Style: The book has fewer pages but more substance-- each chapter has been rewritten to be more clear and concise. Axioms of Urban Economics: The book starts with five "axioms of urban economics," self-evident truths that provide the foundation for the economic analysis throughout the book. These axioms are referenced throughout the text to reinforce how fundamental concepts fit into the big picture. New Figures: The author has created all the figures in this edition from scratch to closely match the new, up-to-date content. Active Learning: Each chapter ends with four or five exercises that allow students to apply the key concepts. These exercises can be incorporated into class sessions or exams. More User-friendly Appendix: Many chapters have callouts to refer the reader to a specific section of the Appendix, "Tools of Microeconomics", for a review of the relevant concepts. Better Flow of Topics: This edition incorporates several important organizational changes: the analysis of urban poverty is integrated throughout the book, with appearances in nine chapters; the key insights from the old chapter on land rent appear at the beginning of the chapter on urban land rent; the land-use section starts with modern cities, and then looks back to explain the rise and then demise of the monocentric city; and the key insights from the old chapter on location theory are integrated into several chapters in the first part of the book. New Appendices: A new appendix to the urban-growth chapter presents the neoclassical model of regional development. A new appendix to the chapter on urban rent uses economic choice models to explain (1) how consumer substitution generates a convex housing-price curve and (2) how input substitution generates a convex bid-rent curve. A new appendix to the chapter on land use describes the monocentric model and applies it to general-equilibrium analysis and the issue of income segregation. New Chapter: Chapter 8 on "Neighborhood Choice" covers material that is new to the profession and will be a big hit with instructors; it replaces Chapter 13 of the fifth edition and presents the location-related analysis of crime and schooling much earlier in the book. This new section explores the economics of neighborhood choice and segregation, focusing on the role of local public goods and neighborhood externalities related to education and crime.

By George J Borjas, Harvard University - Cambridge 2005 / 560 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287177-7 / MHID: 0-07-287177-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111097-6 / MHID: 0-07-111097-6 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/economics/borjas3 George Borjas' well-received text blends coverage of traditional topics with modern theory and developments into a superb Labor economics book. His integration of theory with facts and coverage of latest research make his book one of the most popular at the middle and upper end of the market. CONTENTS

Chapter 1. Introduction / Appendix: An Introduction to Regression Analysis / Chapter 2. Labor Supply Chapter 3. Topics in Labor Supply Chapter 4. Labor Demand 5. Labor Market Equilibrium Chapter 6. Compensating Wage Differentials Chapter 7. Human Capital Chapter 8. The Wage Structure Chapter 9. Labor Mobility Chapter 10. Labor Market Discrimination Chapter 11. Labor Unions Chapter 12. Incentive Pay Chapter 13. Unemployment

Urban Economics

International Edition

URBAN ECONOMICS 6th Edition

NEW

By Arthur O'Sullivan, Lewis & Clark College 2007 (January 2006) / 624 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298476-7 / MHID: 0-07-298476-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124471-8 / MHID: 0-07-124471-9 [IE]

Arthur O'Sullivan's Urban Economics is the leading text for this small, but exciting market. This book covers urban economics as the discipline that lies at the intersection of geography and economics. The sixth edition is a thorough revision of previous incarnations--the author has reorganized and rewritten every chapter to produce a sleek and up-to-date text that will bring renewed attention to the Urban Economics course. This sixth edition offers an extreme makeover from previous editions while also incorporating the remarkable progress in the field of urban economics in the last ten to fifteen years. Part I of the book explains why cities exist and what causes them to grow or shrink. Part II examines the market forces that shape cities and the role of government in determining land-use patterns. Part III looks at the urban transportation system, exploring the pricing and design of public transit systems and the externalities associated with automobile use (congestion, environmental damage, collisions). Part IV uses a model of the rational criminal to explore the causes of urban crime and the spatial consequences. Part V explains the unique features of the housing market and examines the effects of government housing policies. The final part of the book explains the rationale for our fragmented system of local government and explores the responses of local governments to intergovernmental grants and the responses of taxpayers to local taxes. All of the economic concepts used in the book are covered in the typical intermediate microeconomics course, but a Tools of Microeconomics appendix is included that covers the key concepts for students whose exposure to microeconomics is limited to an introductory course or who could benefit from a review of intermediate concepts.

FEATURES

Updated Data: All the tables and charts continue to contain the most recent data, and insights and facts from current theoretical and empirical research have been added in every chapter. Updated Policy Analysis: Reflecting recent changes in public policy, the content details refinements in the economic analysis of policy alternatives. Microeconomic Framework: This text continues to bring urban issues into a modern microeconomic framework. This framework continues to appeal to many micro instructors because it closely matches their training and the way they want to teach the course.

CONTENTS

1 Introduction and Axioms of Urban Economics. 2 Why Do Cities Exist? 3 Why Do Firms Cluster? 4 City Size. 5 Urban Growth. 6 Urban Land Rent. 7 Land-Use Patterns. 8 Neighborhood Choice. 9 Zoning and Growth Controls. 10 Externalities from Autos. 11 Mass Transit. 12 Crime. 13 Why Is Housing Different? 14 Housing Policy. 15 Local Government Spending. 16 Local Government Revenue

42

Economics

Public Finance

NEW

PUBLIC FINANCE 8th Edition

Measurement with Demand Curves / Differential Taxation of Inputs / Does Efficient Taxation Matter? / 14. Efficient and Equitable Taxation: Optimal Commodity Taxation / Optimal User Fees / Optimal Income Taxation / Politics and the Time Inconsistency Problem / Other Criteria for Tax Design / Part Four: THE UNITED STATES REVENUE SYSTEM 15. The Personal Income Tax: Basic Structure / Defining Income / Excludable Forms of Money Income / Exemptions and Deductions / Rate Structure / Choice of Unit and the Marriage Tax / Taxes and Inflation / Treatment of International Income / State Income Taxes / Politics and Tax Reform / 16. Personal Taxation and Behavior: Labor Supply / Saving / Housing Decisions / Portfolio Composition / A Note on Politics and Elasticities / 17. The Corporation Tax: Why Tax Corporations? / Structure / Incidence and Excess Burden / Effects on Behavior / State Corporation Taxes / Taxation of Multinational Corporations / Corporation Tax Reform / 18. Deficit Finance: How Big Is the Debt? / The Burden of the Debt / To Tax or to Borrow? / 19. Taxes on Consumption and Wealth: Retail Sales Tax / Value-Added Tax / Hall-Rabushka Flat Tax / Cash-Flow Tax / Efficiency and Fairness of Personal Consumption Taxes / Income versus Consumption Taxation / Wealth Taxes / Estate and Gift Taxes / Part Five: MULTIGOVERNMENT PUBLIC FINANCE 20. Public Finance in a Federal System: Background / Community Formation / The Tiebout Model / Optimal Federalism / Property Tax / Intergovernmental Grants / Appendix: Some Basic Microeconomics / Glossary / References / Author Index / Subject Index

By Harvey Rosen, Princeton University 2008 (March 2007) / 640 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351128-3 / MHID: 0-07-351128-5

(Details unavailable at press time)

International Edition

PUBLIC FINANCE 7th Edition

By Harvey Rosen, Princeton University 2005 / 640 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287648-2 / MHID: 0-07-287648-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123842-7 / MHID: 0-07-123842-5 [IE]

Advanced Macroeconomics

ADVANCED MACROECONOMICS 3rd Edition

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/rosen7e Harvey Rosen's scholarly and up-to-date Public Finance continues to be the market-leading book. The book takes its readers to the frontiers of current research, yet remains accessible to undergraduates. Although it draws upon the latest research, the book never loses sight of the reality it is supposed to describe, always drawing the links between economic analysis and current political issues. CONTENTS

Part One: INTRODUCTION 1. Introduction: Public Finance and Ideology: Government at a Glance / 2. Tools of Positive Analysis: The Role of Theory / Methods of Empirical Analysis /Concluding Remarks / 3. Tools of Normative Analysis: Welfare Economics / The First Fundamental Theorem of Welfare Economics / Fairness and the Second Fundamental Theorem of Welfare Economics / Market Failure / Buying into Welfare Economics / Part Two: ANALYSIS OF PUBLIC EXPENDITURE 4. Public Goods: Public Goods Defined / Efficient Provision of Public Goods / The Privatization Debate / Education / Public Goods and Public Choice / 5. Externalities: The Nature of Externalities /Graphical Analysis / Private Responses / Public Responses to Externalities / The US Response / Implications for Income Distribution / Positive Externalities / 6. Political Economy: Direct Democracy / Representative Democracy / Explaining Government Growth / 7. Income Redistribution, Conceptual Issues: Distribution of Income / Rationales for Income Redistribution / Expenditure Incidence / 8. Expenditure Programs for the Poor: A Quick Look at Welfare Spending / Institutional Setting / Issues in the Design of Welfare Programs / The Earned Income Tax Credit / Supplemental Security Income / Medicaid / Food Stamps and Child Nutrition / Housing Assistance / Programs to Enhance Earnings / 9. Social Insurance I: Social Security and Unemployment Insurance: Why Have Social Insurance? / Structure of Social Security / Effects on Economic Behavior / Long-Term Stresses on Social Security / Social Security Reform / Unemployment Insurance / Conclusions / 10. Social Insurance II: Health Care: What's Special About Health Care? / The US Health Care Market / The Role of Government / The Twin Issues: Access and Cost / Should Government's Role in Health Care Increase? / 11. Cost? Benefit Analysis: Present Value / Private Sector Project Evaluation / Discount Rate for Government Projects / Valuing Public Benefits and Costs / Games Cost? Benefit Analysts Play / Distributional Considerations / Uncertainty / An Application: Are Reductions in Class Size Worth It? / Use (and Nonuse) by Government / Part Three: A FRAMEWORK FOR TAX ANALYSIS 12. Taxation and Income Distribution: Tax Incidence: General Remarks / Partial Equilibrium Models / General Equilibrium Models / Conclusions / 13. Taxation and Efficiency: Excess Burden Defined / Excess Burden

By David Romer, University of California, Berkeley 2006 / 696 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287730-4 / MHID: 0-07-287730-8

David Romer's Advanced Macroeconomics, 3e is the standard text and the starting point for graduate macro courses and helps lay the groundwork for students to begin doing research in macroeconomics and monetary economics. A series of formal models are used to present and analyze important macroeconomic theories. The theories are supplemented by examples of relevant empirical work, which illustrate the ways that theories can be applied and tested. This well-respected and well-known text is unique in the marketplace. CONTENTS

1. The Solow Growth model 2. Infinite-Horizon and Overlapping-Generations Models 3. New Growth Theory 4. Real-Business-Cycle Theory 5. Traditional Keynesian Theories of Fluctuations 6. Microeconomic Foundations of Incomplete Nominal Adjustment 7. Consumption 8. Investment 9. Unemployment and the Labor Market 10. Inflation and Monetary Policy 11. Budget Deficits and Fiscal Policy

43

Economics

INTRODUCING ADVANCED MACROECONOMICS

By Peter Birch Sorensen and Hans Jorgen Whitta-Jacobsen of University of Copenhagen 2005 / 800 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710425-2 / MHID: 0-07-710425-0

Economic Growth and Development

International Edition

ECONOMIC GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT

By Hendrik Van Den Berg, University of Nebraska-Lincoln 2001 / 640 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239797-0 / MHID: 0-07-239797-7 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120197-1 / MHID: 0-07-120197-1 [IE - 2 Color] ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124951-5 / MHID: 0-07-124951-6 [IE - POD printing in 1 Color]

McGraw-Hill UK Title

Website: www.mcgraw-hill/textbooks/sorenson Aimed at the advanced undergraduate student, Introducing Advanced Macroeconomics: Growth and Business Cycles bridges the gap between intermediate macroeconomics texts and more advanced macroeconomics texts, something not currently available in the market. The text seeks to give students a thorough understanding of some fundamental workhorse models in macroeconomics and to introduce them to methods of formal macroeconomics analysis, without requiring too many technical skills. The first half of the book focuses on macroeconomics for the long run, introducing and developing the basic Solow model. While the second half of the book deals with the economy in the short run, focusing on the explanation of business fluctuations. CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Macroeconomics for the Long Run and for the Short Run / Book One: The Long Run: Economic Growth, Long Run Unemployment, and Structural Economic Policy / Part I Basic Theory and Empirics about Prosperity and Growth / Chapter 2 Some Facts about Prosperity and Growth / Chapter 3 Capital Accumulation and Growth: The Basic Solow Model / Chapter 4 Wealth Accumulation and Capital Mobility: The Solow Model for a Small Open Economy / Part II Exogenous Growth / Chapter 5 Technological Progress and Growth: The General Solow Model / Chapter 6 Education and Growth: The Solow Model with Human Capital / Chapter 7Limits to Growth? The Solow Model with Scarce Natural Resources / Part III Endogenous Growth / Chapter 8 Productive Externalities and Endogenous Growth / Chapter 9 R&D-Based Models of Endogenous Growth: Macroeconomic Modelling / Chapter 10 R&D-Based Models of Endogenous Growth: Micro Foundations / Part IV Structural Unemployment / Chapter 11 Some Facts and Introductory Theory about Unemployment / Chapter 12 Efficiency Wages and Unemployment / Chapter 12 Trade Unions and Unemployment / Book Two The Short Run: Economic Fluctuations, Short Run Unemployment, and Stabilisation Policy / Chapter 14 The Economy in the Short Run: Some Facts about Business Cycles / Part V The Building Blocks for the Short Run Model / Chapter 15 Investment and Asset Prices / Chapter 16 Consumption, Income and Wealth / Chapter 17 Monetary Policy and Aggregate Demand / Chapter 18 Inflation, Unemployment and Aggregate Supply / Part VI The Short Run Model for the Closed Economy / Chapter 19 Explaining Business Cycles: Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand in Action / Chapter 20 Stabilization Policy: Why and How? / Chapter 21 Stabilization Policy with Rational Expectations / Chapter 22 The Limits to Stabilization Policy: Credibility, Uncertainty and Time Lags / Part VII The Short Run Model for the Open Economy / Chapter 23 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply in the Open Economy / Chapter 24 The Open Economy with Fixed Exchange Rates / Chapter 25 The Open Economy with Flexible Exchange Rates / Chapter 26 The Choice of Exchange Rate Regime and the Theory of Optimum Currency Areas

Website: www.mhhe.com/vandenberg CONTENTS

1 The Importance of Economic Growth 2 Economic Growth Throughout History 3 The Evolution of Growth Models: From Adam Smith to Harrod-Domar 4 Solow's Neoclassical Growth Model 5 How Well Does Solow's Model Explain Economic Growth? 6 Technological Progress 7 Economic Growth and Population Growth Example: Kremer's Model of Long-Run Economic Growth 8 Financial Markets and Economic Growth 9 The Rate of Saving and Economic Growth 10 International Trade and Economic Growth 11 Globalization and Economic Growth 12 Education, Human Capital, and Growth 13 Institutions and Economic Growth 14 Government Institutions and Economic Growth 15 Why Would Anyone Be Against Economic Growth? 16 Are There Limits to Growth? 17 The Future of Economic Growth GlossaryBibliography

Advanced Microeconomics

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF MICROECONOMIC THEORY 4th Edition

By Dominick Salvatore, Fordham University 2006 (May 2006) / 384 pages ISBn-13: 978-0-07-146236-5 / MHID: 0-07-146236-8

A Schaum Professional Publication

This revision has been updated to cover the three most important recent developments in microeconomics: game theory, oligopolistic behavior, and the economics of information. Schaum's Outline of Microeconomics gives you a thorough grounding in the theories, principles, and background information on each topic in this vital field.

44

Economics

Regional Economics

NEW

THE ECONOMICS OF EUROPEAN INTEGRATION 2nd Edition

By Baldwin 2006 (March 2006) / 512 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711119-9 / MHID: 0-07-711119-2

THE EUROPEAN UNION

By Susan Senior Nello, University of Siena, Italy 2005 / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710781-9 / MHID: 0-07-710781-0

McGraw-Hill UK Title

Website: www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/senior This book is an up to date, multi-disciplinary account of the European Union with material organised in a flexible way and it is designed to be accessible to a wide audience of students. The author has worked as an expert for the European Commission. CONTENTS

Chapter 1 - An Introduction to European Integration: Definitions and Terminology Chapter 2 - A Brief History of the European Union Chapter 3 - The Decision-Making Institutions of the European Union Chapter 4 - Basic Instruments: The Theory of Trade and the EU Chapter 5 - The Theory of Integration Chapter 6 - From the Single Market to the `New Europe' Chapter 7 - Movement of Labour, Immigration and Asylum Chapter 8 - The Long Road to Economic and Monetary Union Chapter 9 - The EU Budget Chapter 10 - The Common Agricultural Policy Chapter 11 - Fisheries Policy Chapter 12 - Environmental and Energy Policies Chapter 13 - EU Regional, Social and Employment Policies Chapter 14 - EU Social and Employment Policy Chapter 15 - Competition and Industrial Policies Chapter 16 - Transport Policy Chapter 17 - The EU and the GATT/WTO Chapter 18 - EU Trade and Aid policies Chapter 19 - Economic Relations between the EU and the US Chapter 20 - The Common Foreign and Security Policy Chapter 21 - EU Enlargement

McGraw-Hill UK Title

The Economics of European Integration, 2/e provides students with an accessible presentation of the facts, theories and controversies driving rapid change in the heart of Europe. The authors combine essential elements of European history, institutions, law, politics and policies with clear and accessible explanations of the economic principles of European integration. The result is an expert analysis of the contemporary status of integration within the European Union. This second edition has been thoroughly updated and expanded to incorporate recent developments within the European Union, and to reflect current teaching in European Economics. New material in this edition includes coverage of economic integration, labour markets and migration; EU competition and state aid policy; and EU trade policy. Designed for students taking modules in European economics, the book offers a rigorous yet clear exposition of economic arguments alongside examples, illustrations, and questions that bring this contemporary topic to life. FEATURES

New to this edition is a fully revised and expanded Part on EU Policies, including new chapters dedicated to Regional Policy, EU competition and state aid policy, and EU trade policy. Focus on the economic analysis of integration: The core of the book explores the topics of trade integration and the macroeconomics of European integration in full. The up-to-date economic coverage is ideal for students taking economics modules that do not require extensive analysis of social and policy issues. Further appendices of economic theory are also provided as appropriate. Learning features: The book provides a clear and consistent structure to aid student learning. Each chapter features boxed examples and illustrations, end of chapter summaries, self-assessment questions, essay questions, and lists of useful websites, further reading and references. Updates online: Integration initiatives continue to progress at a tremendous pace. Reflecting the need for currency and relevance in this fast-moving field, a range of online essays and articles on new developments and challenges will be posted on the Online Learning Centre at: www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/baldwinandwyplosz

CONTENTS

Preface. PART I: HISTORY, FACTS AND INSTITUTIONS. History. Facts, law, institutions and the budget decision making. PART II: THE MICROECONOMICS OF ECONOMIC INTEGRATION. Essential microeconomic tools. The essential economics of preferential liberalisation. Market size and scale economies. Growth effects and capital market integration. Economic integration, labour markets and migration. PART III: EU POLICIES. The common agricultural policy. Location effects, economic geography & regional policy. EU competition and state aids policy. EU trade policy. PART IV: MONETARY INTEGRATION: HISTORY AND PRINCIPLES. A monetary history of Europe. The choice of an exchange rate regime. The European monetary system. PART V: MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICY IN THE EU. Optimum currency area. The European monetary union. Fiscal policy and the stability pact. The financial markets and the Euro

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected]

Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg

45

Economics

Asian Economics

THE HONG KONG ECONOMY From Recovery to Restructure

By Kui-Wai Li 2005 / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124780-1 / MHID: 0-07-124780-7

Statistics For Economics

USING STATISTICS IN ECONOMICS

By Thomas 2005 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710743-7 / MHID: 0-07-710743-8

An Asian Publication The prolonged post-Asian Financial Crisis economic recession in

McGraw-Hill UK Title

Descriptive Statistics. Mean and Variance. Weighted Means. Frequency distributions. Cumulative and Relative Frequencies. Histograms. Basic Probability. Conditional Probabilities. Addition and Multiplication Rules. CONTENTS

Part 1: Statistics Chapter 1. Discrete Probability Distributions Chapter 2. Continuous Variables Chapter 3. Basic Statistical Inference Chapter 4. Hypothesis Testing I Chapter 5. Hypothesis Testing II Chapter 6. More Probability and Inference Chapter 7. Contingency Tables and NonParametric Statistics Part 2: Introduction to Econometrics Chapter 8. The Purpose of Econometrics Chapter 9. Two Variable Correlation and Regression Chapter 10. Introduction to Non-Linear Regression Chapter 11. What Makes a Good Estimator Chapter 12. The Classical Two Variable Model Chapter 13. Introduction to Multiple Regression Chapter 14. Qualatative Effects in Regression Analysis Chapter 15. Some Problems with the Classical Model Chapter 16. Introduction to Dynamics

Hong Kong requires new analysis. By looking at the economic performance since the 1980s, this book focuses on analysing the macroeconomic intricacies facing the Hong Kong economy. The economic boom in the pre-Asian Financial Crisis years has also given rise to various structural imbalances that could not sustain the economy after the burst of the bubble. The large producer services sector could arguably be the basis of imbalance. The short-term investment behaviour exhibited in the pre-1997 years has not fully adjusted. Demand-driven solutions can provide short-term rescue and recovery, while economic restructuring requires supply-driven solutions. There is still room for economic expansion in Hong Kong; the focus should return to the basics of economic growth and trade rather than rely on redistributive instruments and heavy government expenditures. Economic integration with the Mainland economy produces both complements and competition; strategies adopted should enable Hong Kong investors to make use of the growing economic pie in Mainland China. By considering the various macroeconomic issues, the book provides useful analysis for readers to arrive at their own economic decisions. CONTENTS

List of Figures / List of Tables / Preface / 1 Hong Kong's Development and the Economism Paradigm 2 Economic Performance Patterns since the 1980s 3 Productivity, Unit Labour Cost and Competitiveness 4 Fiscal Policy: Challenge, Dilemma and Leadership 5 he Monetary and Financial Sector 6 The Real Estate Market 7 Trade and Changes in Comparative Advantage 8 Economic Integration: The CompetitivityComplementarity Model 9 Where is the Hong Kong Economy Heading? / References / Index

COMPLIMENTARY COPIES

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog.

Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com

46

2007-2008 NEW Operations/Decision Sciences Titles

Operations/Decision Science ~ Contents

Business/Systems Dynamics ............................................ 49 Data Mining ................................................................... 65 Enterprise Resource Planning .......................................... 65 Global Operations Management ..................................... 66 Introductory Operations Management ............................ 49

2007 New Titles

BENTON Purchasing and Supply Management ....................... 63

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352514-3 / MHID: 0-07-352514-6

BOWERSOX Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e.................. 63

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294788-5 / MHID: 0-07-294788-8

DEWHURST Quantitative Methods for Business, 2e .................... 56

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710902-8 / MHID: 0-07-710902-3 [MH UK Title]

Logistics & Supply Chain Management (Prof Ref.) ........... 67 Management Science - Text ............................................ 54 Operation Management Software ................................... 53 Operation Management Supplement .............................. 52 Operation Research ........................................................ 66 Production / Inventory Control ....................................... 57 Project Management ....................................................... 57 Project Management (Prof Ref.)....................................... 67 Purchasing and Supply Chain Management .................... 62 Quality Control / Management ....................................... 59 Quantitative Method - Text ............................................. 56 Service Operations Management .................................... 61 Upper Level Operations Management ............................ 56

FINCH Interactive Models for Operations and Supply Chain Management .................................................52

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285710-8 / MHID: 0-07-285710-2

GRYNA Quality Planning and Analysis, 5e ...........................59

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296662-6 / MHID: 0-07-296662-9

HAYEN SAP R/3 Enterprise Software...............................53, 65

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299067-6 / MHID: 0-07-299067-8

IRWIN/MH Operations Management Video Series Vol. XII DVD, 9e.............................................................50

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326881-X / MHID: 0-07-326881-X

OLSON Introduction to Business Data Mining ..................... 65

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295971-0 / MHID: 0-07-295971-1

SCHROEDER Operations Management, 3e ................................... 50

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313706-3 / MHID: 0-07-313706-5

STEVENSON Introduction to Management Science...................... 54

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299066-9 / MHID: 0-07-299066-X

STEVENSON Operations Management, 9e ................................... 51

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110916-1 / MHID: 0-07-110916-1

THOMKE Managing Project and Service Development: Text and Cases......................................................... 58

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302301-4 / MHID: 0-07-302301-9

VOHRA Quantitative Techniques in Management, 3e .......... 55

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-061193-1 / MHID: 0-07-061193-9 [Tata MH Title]

47

2007-2008 NEW Operations/Decision Sciences Titles

2008 New Titles

FINCH Operations Now, 3e ................................................49

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329705-7 / MHID: 0-07-329705-4

GRAY Project Management, 4e .........................................57

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352515-0 / MHID: 0-07-352515-4

JACOBS Operations and Supply Management.......................50

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329473-5 / MHID: 0-07-329473-X

SIMCHI-LEVI Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e .................................................................62

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298239-8 / MHID: 0-07-298239-X

48

Operations/Decision Sciences

Business/Systems Dynamics

International Edition

BUSINESS DYNAMICS Systems Thinking And Modeling For A Complex World

By John Sterman 2000 / 768 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-238915-9 / MHID: 0-07-238915-X (with CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-117989-8 / MHID: 0-07-117989-5 [IE with CD-ROM]

NEW TO THIS EDITION

The Third Edition of Operations Now discusses key functional components of the supply chain and how to adapt and extend the techniques of operations management to management of supply chains. Strategy, quality, demand forecasting, capacity, purchasing, logistics and transportation have all now been included in the text's new emphasis on Supply Chain In response to increasing demand on the part of business schools that course objectives and assessment material reflect and correspond to AACSB curriculum guidelines, the instructor's/solutions manual and the test bank accompanying Operations Now indicate which chapter objectives, end-of-chapter questions and problems, and test-bank questions link up with and conform to AACSB guidelines. Objectives, problems and test questions that fulfill one or more of these guidelines are identified by an icon designating the guideline that the objective or question fulfills. (A separate icon for each guideline is included; the instructor's resource manual includes a key that matches each icon to each AACSB guideline.) New pedagogical features make it even more student-friendly and to offer the instructor additional ease and flexibility with assignments and reinforcement of key concepts. Among these enhancements are advanced problems, cases, solved problems, and callback icons, which are placed in the margin of the texts at those points in the narrative where the topic being discussed has particular relevance to the chapter-opening vignette.

CONTENTS

Introduction Part I. Perspective and Process Chapter 1. Learning In and About Complex Systems Chapter 2. System Dynamics in Action Chapter 3. The Modeling Process 4. Structure and Behavior Of Dynamic Systems Part II. Tools for Systems Thinking Chapter 5. Causal Loop Diagrams Chapter 6. Stocks and Flows Chapter 7. Dynamics of Stocks and Flows Chapter 8. Closing the Loop: Dynamics of Simple Structures Part III. The Dynamics of Growth Chapter 9. S-Shaped Growth: Epidemics, Innovation Diffusion, And the Growth of New Products Chapter 10. Path Dependence and Positive Feedback Part IV. Tools For Modeling Dynamic Systems Chapter 11. Delays Chapter 12. Co-Flows and Aging Chains Chapter 13. Modeling Human Behavior: Bounded Rationality or Rational Expectations Chapter 14. Forecasts and Fudge Factors: Modeling Expectation Formation Chapter 15. Supply Chains and The Origin of Oscillations Chapter 16. Managing Supply Chains in Manufacturing Chapter 17. The Labor Supply Chain and The Origin of Business Cycles Chapter 18. The Invisible Hand Sometimes Shakes: Commodity Cycles Validation and Model Testing Appendix A: Numerical Integration Appendix B: Noise References Index

FEATURES

Byron Finch's proprietary Resource/Profit model represents a unique framework for discussion of operations topics. By emphasizing the need to view operations decisions both in terms of added value and financial return, business students--operations majors and non-majors alike--are better equipped to become better managers by understanding the connection between operations and good business decisions. Conceptual material is supported by problem sets and case studies that yield two key benefits: students are offered ample opportunities to test their understanding of concepts and instructors are provided with a wealth of assignment material.

Introductory Operations Management

International Edition

Operations Now differs from many other textbooks by treating the subject of operations management within the context of the entire organization and with reference to the other functional areas that comprise it. Moreover, Operations Now distinguishes itself by addressing more frequently both the internal and external forces that dictate and influence the design of a firm's operation. This gives students the perspective they need to understand the utility of the techniques they learn in the course.

NEW

CONTENTS

UNIT ONE: FOUNDATIONS FOR SUCCESS Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Profitability: Business Success from Operations' Success Chapter 3: Strategy and Value: Competing through Effective Operations and Supply Chain Management Chapter 4: Processes: Products and Services to Match Customer Needs UNIT TWO: COMPONENTS OF VALUES Chapter 5: Cost: The Price of Value Creation Chapter 6: Quality: Frameworks for Product and Service Improvement Chapter 7: Quality Tools: From Process Performance to Process Perfection Chapter 8: Timeliness: Scheduling and Project Management UNIT THREE: MANAGING RESOURCES TO CREATE VALUE Chapter 9: Supply Chain Management: Managing Business to Business Interaction Chapter10: Demand Forecasting: Building the Foundation for Resource Planning Chapter 11: Inventory: Managing to Meet Demand Chapter 12: Logistics: Positioning Goods in the Supply Chain Chapter 13: Lean Systems: Eliminating Waste through the Supply Chain Chapter 14: Capacity: Matching Productive Resources to Demand Chapter 15: Constraint Management: Simplifying Complex Systems Chapter 16: Facilities: Making Location and Layout Decisions Chapter 17: Workforce: Optimizing Human Capital

OPERATIONS NOW Supply Chain Profitability and Performance with Student DVD, 3rd Edition

By Byron Finch, Miami University--Oxford 2008 (December 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329705-7 / MHID: 0-07-329705-4 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128572-8 / MHID: 0-07-128572-5 [IE]

Operations Now introduces the operations function from a vantage point that encompasses both the entire organization and the broader supply network. The author begins his discussion of operations management by first establishing the goal to which any high quality operation must aspire: the goal of profitability. Operations Now presents operations within a context that acknowledges its interactions both within and without all functional areas of an organization, including the links throughout the supply chain. Thus, students not majoring in operations management immediately understand why they are studying a subject that had heretofore seemed to them irrelevant; operations majors receive valuable instruction in how their chosen field affects and facilitates other functional areas within the enterprise and aligns with the overall goals of the organization.

49

Operations/Decision Sciences

International Edition

NEW

International Edition

NEW

OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT

By Robert Jacobs, Indiana University-Bloomington and Richard Chase, University of Southern California 2008 (November 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329473-5 / MHID: 0-07-329473-X (with Student DVD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128573-5 / MHID: 0-07-128573-3 [IE]

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT Contemporary Concepts and Cases, 3rd Edition

By Roger G Schroeder, University of Minnesota 2007 (November 2005) / 544 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313706-3 / MHID: 0-07-313706-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323058-0 / MHID: 0-07-323058-8 (with Student CD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125436-6 / MHID: 0-07-125436-6 [IE with Student CD]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/jacob1e Jacobs and Chase continue to lead the field of Operations Management with cutting edge up-to- date content, technology, and motivation. Now, in this First Edition Jacobs and Chase focus on the core concepts of operations and supply management. This condensed text was constructed with the four essential core areas of process, quality, inventory, and supply chain management in mind, as decided by a panel of OM instructor's at the Decision Science Institute meeting, and after conducting a survey of content coverage in representative universities. The new Core text provides increased emphasis on supply management concepts along with a focused presentation of the core OM concepts. FEATURES

Up-to-date coverage of Supply Chain Management, Enterprise Resource Management, Six-Sigma, and Lean Manufacturing: the topics that companies focus on today. Breakthrough Boxes featuring best practices at real companies Engaging short cases ­ real companies, interesting exercises. (Companies include Toshiba, IKEA, Brunswick Motors) Internet Beer Game and E-OPS game that are popular with adopters of Chase 11e, also apply to The CORE. Reduced length and price. Student DVD with improved user interface, new and expanded videos, and a wealth of study resources for students.

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/schroeder3e Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, is an ideal book for the instructor seeking a short text with cases. This book employs a cross-functional perspective, appealing to non-majors and practical for use in an MBA level course in operations management. The size and price of the book also make the text attractive for the cross-functional curriculum where students are required to purchase more than one text. The cases offer variety in length and rigor; and several are from Harvard and Darden. This mix makes the book appropriate for both undergraduates and MBA students. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Four Chapters Thoroughly revised: *Strategy(Chapter 2)- Updated and Rewritten. *Processes (Chapte 7)- new flow-chart models and methods added. *Forecasting (Chapter 11)-new examples and methods incoporated. *MRP (Chatper 16)- rewritten to place greater emphasis on ERP

Thorough Updating of selected topics: * 50% revision and addition to internet exercises. *New quantitative problem sets. *Three new cases and updates of retained case studies. *New boxed inserts. New Topical Additions and Emphases: *More e-business applications *Greater emphasis on both Lean Operations and JIT *Expand coverage of Six Sigma

CONTENTS

Section I ­ Strategy Chapter 1: Operations and Supply Strategy Chapter 2: Project Management Section II ­ Processes Chapter 3: Strategic Capacity Management Chapter 4: Manufacturing Processes Chapter 5: Service Processes Chapter 6: Six-Sigma Quality Section III ­ Supply Chain Chapter 7: Strategic Sourcing Chapter 8: Logistics Chapter 9: Lean Manufacturing Section IV ­ Inventory Chapter 10: Forecasting Chapter 11: Aggregate Sales and Operations Planning Chapter 12: Inventory Management Chapter 13: Material Requirements Planning / Appendix A ­ Answers to Select Problems Appendix B ­ Learning Curve Tables B.1 ­ Table of Unit Values B.2 ­ Table of Cumulative Values Appendix C ­ Present Value Table Appendix D ­ Negative Exponential Distribution: Values of ¿-x Appendix E ­ Areas of the Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution

FEATURES

Unified Decision Framework organizes decisions into four major categories: process, quality, capacity, and inventory. Cross-functional emphasis with a balance of manufacturing and service examples. Throughout the narrative, OM is discussed in relation to other organizational functions, with a wide variety of types of companies referenced. Robust Case studies contribute to the depth of student understanding.

CONTENTS

Part I: Introduction 1. The Operations Function 2. Operations and Supply Chain Strategy 3. Product Design Part II: Process Design 4. Process Selection 5. Service Process Design 6. Choice of Technology 7. Process-Flow Analysis Part III: Quality 8. Managing Quality 9. Quality Control and Improvement Part IV: Capacity and Scheduling 10. Supply Chain Management 11. Forecasting 12. Facilities and Aggregate Planning 13. Scheduling Operations 14. Project Planning and Scheduling Part V: Inventory 15. Independent- Demand Inventory 16. Materials Requirement Planning 17. Just-in-Time Systems and Lean thinking Part VI: Case Studies / Appendixes / Index

NEW

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT VIDEO SERIES VOL. XII DVD 9th Edition

By Irwin/McGraw-Hill 2007 (October 2005) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326881-X / MHID: 0-07-326881-X

(Details unavailable at press time)

50

Operations/Decision Sciences

International Edition

NEW

International Edition

MATCHING SUPPLY WITH DEMAND An Introduction to Operations Management

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9th Edition

By William J Stevenson, Rochester Institute Technology 2007 (June 2006) / 832 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110916-1 / MHID: 0-07-110916-1 [IE]

By Gerard Cachon and Christian Terwiesch 2006 / 368 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-291899-1 / MHID: 0-07-291899-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124426-8 / MHID: 0-07-124426-3 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/stevenson9e The Ninth Edition of Operations Management features the latest concepts and applications while not losing focus on the core concepts that has made this text a market leader. This approachable text supports students in applying concepts and methods by providing solved problems, examples, questions, practice problems, and cases. Students learn by doing, and the Ninth Edition continues to offer more support for `doing Operations' than any other. A Student DVDRom complete with Excel templates; data files; videos from companies like Honda, United Airlines, McDonalds, Disney, and more; self quizzes; weblinks; and innovative `screencam tutorials' that show students how to use Excel are included in the package. The DVDRom also features six new segments and expanded editions of additional videos. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Expanded Videos on the Student DVD, including six new segements. The 9e also features time based indexing to allow zerowing in on specific topics wihtin a video segment.

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cachon_terwiesch The most authoritative, cutting-edge book for operations management and supply chain management. The book demands rigorous analysis on the part of students. When the use of quantitative tools or formal modeling is indicated, it is only to perform the necessary analysis needed to inform and support a practical business solution. CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 The Process View of the Organization Chapter 3 Understanding the Supply Process: Evaluation Process Capacity Chapter 4 Estimating and Reducing Labor Costs Chapter 5 Bathing and Other Flow Interruptions: Set-up Times and the Economic Order Quantity Model Chapter 6 Variability and Its Impact on Process Performance: Waiting Time Problems Chapter 7 The Impact of Variability on Process Performance: Throughput Losses Chapter 8 Fundamentals of Quality and the Toyota Production System Chapter 9 Betting on Uncertain Demand: The Newsvendor Model Chapter 10 Make-To-Order and Quick Response with Reactive Capacity Chapter 11 Service Levels and Lead Times in Supply Chains: The Order up-to Inventory Model Chapter 12 Risk Pooling Strategies to Reduce and Hedge Uncertainty Chapter 13 Revenue Management with Capacity Controls Chapter 14 Supply Chain Coordination / Appendix / Glossary / References / Index of "How to" exhibits / Summary of key equations / Index

FEATURES

Clearly written explanations of concepts as well as methods. The Stevenson text has been the long time market leading title because it is understandable for undergraduate business students. This hallmark of the text results from the author's devotion to and expereince at teaching combined with thorough development contributions and suggestions from hundreds of adopters. Up to date revisions incorporate the latest concepts and applications while not losing focus on the core concepts of Operations Management. While some titles may overemphasize the latest hot buzzword, Stevenson integrates new ideas carefully and appropriately so that students have a long lasting understanding of the important operations management considerations to carry forward in the rest of their studies and in their careers. The Stevenson text has always supported students in applying concepts and methods, with solved problems, examples, questions, problems, and cases. Students learn by doing, and the Stevenson text offers more support for `doing Operations' than any other. Learning support for students-the text includes a Student DVDRom complete with Excel templates, data files, videos from companies like Honda, United Airlines, McDonalds, Louisville Slugger, Disney, and many more, self quizzes, weblinks, and innovative `screencam tutorials' which show students how to use Excel and how to use the excel templates.

International Edition

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT FOR COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE 11th Edition

By Richard Chase, University of Southern California, F Robert Jacobs, Indiana University--Bloomington and Nicholas J Aquilano, University of Arizona 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111553-7 / MHID: 0-07-111553-6 [IE with Student DVD and OLC Card]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/chase11e Chase, Jacobs and Aquilano: Operations Management for Competitive Advantage, 11/e (CJA) provides a current and thorough introduction to the concepts, processes, and methods of managing and controlling operations in manufacturing or service settings. The text provides comprehensive coverage, from high-tech manufacturing to high touch services with a balanced treatment. Chase, Jacobs, and Aquilano also thoroughly integrates and discusses current issues such as globalization; supply chain strategy, E-business, and ERP. The concepts are illustrated by using abundant real world examples, articles, illustrations, problems and cases. Technology is integral to the success of this course, as such, CJA also provide students and instructors with an innovative array of leading edge technology learning and teaching tools. CONTENTS

SECTION ONE OPERATIONS STRATEGY AND MANAGING CHANGE 1 Introduction to the Field 2 Operations Strategy and Competitiveness Technical Note 2 Optimizing the Use of Resources with Linear Programming 3 Project Management SECTION TWO PRODUCT DESIGN AND

CONTENTS

1 Introduction 2 Competitiveness, Strategy, and Productivity 3 Forecasting 4 Product and Service Design 4S Supplement: Reliability 5 Strategic Capacity Planning for Products and Services 5S Supplement: Decision Theory 6 Process Selection and Facilities Layout 6S Linear Programming 7 Design of Work Systems 7S Learning Curves 8 Location Planning and Analysis 8S The Transportation Model 9 Management of Quality 10 Quality Control 10S Acceptance Sampling 11 Supply Chain Management 12 Inventory Management 13 Aggregate Planning 14 MRP and ERP 15 JIT and Lean Operations 15S Supplement: Maintenance 16 Scheduling 17 Project Management 18 Capacity Planning and Analysis: Waiting Lines 18S Supplement: Simulation

51

Operations/Decision Sciences

PROCESS SELECTION 4 Process Analysis Technical Note 4 Job Design and Work Measurement 5 Product Design Technical Note 5 Learning Curves 6 Manufacturing Process Selection and Design Technical Note 6 Facility Layout 7 Product Design and Process Selection--Services Technical Note 7 Waiting Line Management 8 Quality Management: Focus on Six Sigma Technical Note 8 Process Capability and Statistical Quality Control 9 Operations Consulting and Reengineering SECTION THREE SUPPLY CHAIN DESIGN 10 Supply Chain Strategy 11 Strategic Capacity Management Technical Note 11 Facility Location 12 Lean Production SECTION FOUR PLANNING AND CONTROLLING THE SUPPLY CHAIN Managerial Briefing Enterprise Resource Planning Systems 13 Forecasting 14 Aggregate Sales and Operations Planning 15 Inventory Control 16 Material Requirements Planning 17 Operations Scheduling Technical Note 17 Simulation 18 Synchronous Manufacturing and Theory of Constraints SUPPLEMENTS A Financial Analysis B Operations Technology APPENDICES A Answers to Selected Problems B Uniformly Distributed Random Digits C Normally Distributed Random Digits D Areas of the Standard Normal Distribution E Areas of the Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution F Negative Exponential Distribution: Values of e­x G Interest Tables PHOTO CREDITS NAME INDEX SUBJECT INDEX

International Edition

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 7th Edition

By Edward M Knod, Western Illinois University and Richard Schonberger, University of Washington 2001 / 672 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246050-6 / MHID: 0-07-246050-4 (with CD, Mandatory Package) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120216-9 / MHID: 0-07-120216-1 [IE with CD]

Website: www.mhhe.com/pom CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Operations Management: Introductory Concepts / Chapter 2: OM Strategy: Dynamic Competitiveness / Chapter 3: Principles of Operations Management / Chapter 4: Demand Management and Forecasting Supplement: Least Squares Trend and Correlation Coefficients / Chapter 5: Capacity Planning and Master Scheduling Supplement: Aggregate capacity Planning with Excel? / Chapter 6: Order Fulfillment and Purchasing / Chapter 7: Designing for Customers' Needs / Chapter 8: The Quality Imperative Supplement: Quality Pioneers of the Twentieth Century / Chapter 9: Process Control and Improvement / Chapter 10: Flow-Control: Eliminating Process Wastes / Chapter 11: Timing-Another Imperative / Chapter 12: Human Resources in OM Supplement: Four methods of developing Time Standards / Chapter 13: Managing Materials: Timing and Quantities Supplement: Economic Order Quantity: Theory and Derivations / Chapter 14: Facilities Management / Chapter 15: Managing Continuous and Repetitive Operations / Chapter 16: Managing Job and Batch Operations / Chapter 17: Managing Projects

International Edition

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT Integrating Manufacturing and Services, 5th Edition

By Mark Davis, Bentley College and Janelle Heineke 2005 / 768 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294824-0 / MHID: 0-07-294824-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299435-3 / MHID: 0-07-299435-5 (with Student CD and PowerWeb) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111724-1 / MHID: 0-07-111724-5 [IE with CD and Powerweb]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/davis5e Previously known as Fundamentals of Operations Management, Operations Management: Integrating Manufacturing and Services offers a broad and relatively non-quantitative overview of the field of operations management and provides a "big picture" perspective that should appeal to a variety of business majors--not just those students majoring in operations management. Reflecting the background of the authors, Operations Management: Integrating Manufacturing and Services has the strongest coverage of services of any introductory book on the market. The treatment of both manufacturing and services, as the new title suggests, is again more fully integrated than other competing textbooks. CONTENTS

PART I Operations Management in Today's Business Environment 1 Introduction to Operations Management 2 Operations Strategy: Defining How Firms Compete S2 Financial Analysis in Operations Management 3 The Role of Technology in Operations 4 Supply Chain Management 5 Integrating Manufacturing and Service PART II Process Decisions 6 New Product and Service Development, and Process Selection 7 Project Management 8 Process Measurement and Analysis S8 Job Design and Work Performance Measurement 9 Quality Management S9 Quality Tools for Improving Processes 10 Lean Production PART III Facility Decisions 11 Facility Location and Capacity 12 Facility Layouts S12 Forecasting PART IV Aggregate Planning and Inventory Decisions 13 Aggregate Planning 14 Inventory Systems for Independent Demand 15 Inventory Systems for Dependent Demand PART V Daily Operational Decisions 16 Waiting Line Management S16 Waiting Line Theory 17 Scheduling

Operation Management Supplement

NEW

INTERACTIVE MODELS FOR OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

By Bryon Finch, Miami University of Oh-Oxford 2007 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285710-8 / MHID: 0-07-285710-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298274-9 / MHID: 0-07-298274-8 (with CD)

This First Edition provides interactivity to students by use of stateof-the-art java applets. Students are shown concepts depicted graphically and are able to manipulate those graphics to simulate real world actions. Therefore, students learn comprehensively as they participate with the text and supporting technology. Written by a leader in this course, the concise and affordable paperback can be used harmoniously with additional teaching materials. The book adopts a modeling approach for dealing with a variety of common problems in designing and improving operations. Students will obtain "hands on" experience in developing efficient and cost effective solutions to such problems. FEATURES

State-of-the-Art java applets provide interactivity for students. Adopts a modeling approach to deal with a variety of common problems in designing and improving operations. Short, inexpensive paperback format permits use with other materials.

52

Operations/Decision Sciences

CONTENTS

Unit 1: Demand Forecasting: The Time Series Components Model / The Simple Exponential Smoothing Model / The Trend Enhanced Exponential Smoothing Model / The Linear Trend Equation Model / The Simple Linear Regression Model / Unit 2: Financial Decision Making: The Breakeven Model / The Variance Analysis Model / Unit 3: Capacity Management: The Learning Curve Model / The Overbooking Model / The Aggregate Planning Model / Unit 4: Quality Management / The X-bar and R-chart Model / Unit 5: Inventory Management and Scheduling: The Economic Order Point Model / The Economic Order Point with Quantity Discounts Model / The Reorder Point Model / The Material Requirements Planning Model / The Risk Pooling Model / The Bullwhip Effect Model / The Sequencing Rules Model / Unit 6: Facility Decisions Models / The Process-Oriented Layout Model / The Center of Gravity Model / Unit 7: Process Simulation Models / The Waiting Line Simulation Model / The Production Line Simulation Model / The Kanban Simulation Model / The Constraint Management Simulation Model

Operation Management Software

NEW

SAP R/3 ENTERPRISE SOFTWARE An Introduction

By Roger Hayen, Central Michigan University 2007 (May 2006) / 192 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299067-6 / MHID: 0-07-299067-8

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hayen This text is written by Dr. Roger Hayen, a SAP R/3 instructor at Central Michigan University, one of three universities in the U.S. to offer SAP R/3 certification for students in an SAP University Alliance program, called "Process Integration Certification Academy". Hayen's extensive familiarity with the subject provides a useful introduction to the essential concepts of the SAP R/3 System, with the opportunity for hands-on implementation of those concepts. The text's succinct, yet thorough coverage makes it versatile, so that it is appropriate for both student instruction and professional training and reference. FEATURES

The core text is organized into three distinct main parts--Understanding Enterprise Software, Displaying SAP R/3 Information, and Processing SAP R/3--for easy readability and enhanced functionality. Includes helpful "Quick Checks" for student review of concepts after each chapter. Class-tested at Central Michigan University by undergraduate students; also used by SAP R/3 for its own training programs. Hands-on, up-to-date exercises using SAP's IDES training data, SAP R/3's own help files, and the 4.6 R/3 release--critical to the understanding and application of the software. Frees instructors' time, as they would otherwise have to create the data for students' exercises themselves. Also ensures students will be market-ready for SAP R/3 user companies. Flexibility of the hands-on exercises. Provided in two formats: local, `read-only' ones and web-based activities with a `live client' simulating a `real world' SAP/R3 implementation. Can be purchased, at a discounted price, with other McGraw-Hill/ Irwin texts in Operations Management. Heavily illustrated with graphics and annotated screen shots.

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 2nd Edition

By Joseph Monks, Gonzaga University 1996 / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-042764-8 / MHID: 0-07-042764-X

A Professional Reference Title

(International Edition is not available for sale in Japan) CONTENTS

1. Operations Management: Definition, Mission, and Productivity Concepts 1. Quality Management of Competitive Operations 3. Operations Decision Making (Break-Even Analysis, Decision Trees, and Statistical Methods) 4. Forecasting (Statistical Methods) 5. Financial Analysis for Operations (Present-Value Criteria) 6. Facility Location (Transportation Linear Programming) 7. Layout of Facilities (Line Balancing) 8. Product Design: Goods and Services (Linear Programming) 9. Process Planning and Analysis (Simulation) 10. Job Design and Work Measurement (Statistical Sample Size) 11. Aggregate Planning and Master Scheduling 12. Materials Management: Purchasing, Inventory and JIT Systems (Calculus) 13. Inventory Control: Order Points, Safety Stocks, and Service Levels (Statistical Methods) 14. Material Requirements Planning: MRP and CRP 15. Operations Scheduling and Control (Assignment Linear Programming) 16. Operations Analysis and Maintenance (Calculus, Learning Curves, Queuing and Simulation) 17. Project Management (CPM/PERT) 18. Quality Control (Statistical Methods) / Appendixes

CONTENTS

Preface / Part 1 Understanding Enterprise Software Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 2 Navigation and Systems Operation Chapter 3 Application Modules Chapter 4 Businesses Processes Chapter 5 Web Application Server Chapter 6 Internet Enabled Solutions Chapter 7 Configuration Chapter 8 Implementation Framework Chapter 9 Organization Structure Chapter 10 Customizing Tools Part 2 Displaying SAP R/3 Information Chapter 11 Exploring System Capabilities Part 3 Processing SAP R/3 Transactions Chapter 12 Customer Order to Cash Cycle Processes / Summary / Appendix Quick Check Answers

COMPLIMENTARY COPIES

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog.

Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com

53

Operations/Decision Sciences

International Edition

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE WINDOWS

International Edition

NEW

INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT SCIENCE

By Michael Moses and Sridhar Seshadri of New York University 1999 ISBN-13: 978-0-256-26174-5 / MHID: 0-256-26174-1 (Manual with CD-ROM) - Out of Print ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366261-9 / MHID: 0-07-366261-5 (CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118453-3 / MHID: 0-07-118453-8 [IE]

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Introduction to HOM Chapter 2 Integrative Cases Chapter 3 Ice Queen Snow Blowers Chapter 4 Citibank/Chemical Branch Consolidation Chapter 5 Process Analysis Chapter 6 Waiting Line Analysis Chapter 7 Inventory Modeling Chapter 8 Material Requirements Planning Chapter 9Facility Planning Chapter 10 Forecasting Chapter 11 Aggregate Planning Chapter 12 Project Management Chapter 13 Quality Management

By William D Stevenson, North Carolina State University and Ceyhun Ozgur, Valparaiso University 2007 (February 2006) / 672 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299066-9 / MHID: 0-07-299066-X (with Spreadsheets) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325290-2 / MHID: 0-07-325290-5 (with Spreadsheets and Student CD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110849-2 / MHID: 0-07-110849-1 [IE with Spreadsheets and Student CD] ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325336-7 / MHID: 0-07-325336-7 (Instructor's Edition with Student CD t/a Text)

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/stevensonozgur1e This text combines the market leading writing and presentation skills of Bill Stevenson with integrated, thorough, Excel modeling from Ceyhun Ozgur. Professor Ozgur teaches Management Science, Operations, and Statistics using Excel, at the undergrad and MBA levels at Valparaiso University--and Ozgur developed and tested all examples, problems and cases with his students. The authors have written this text for students who have no significant mathematics training and only the most elementary experience with Excel. FEATURES

Unique student oriented formatting: Stevenson-Ozgur includes more Excel Screen shots along with complete Excel cell formulae in virtually every example. This provides more detail and better reference support for beginning undergraduate level students. Flexibly organized into 3 sections, the Introduction and Forecasting, Deterministic Models, and then Probabilistic Models. Forecasting can be moved and taught at any time in the course, and there are four supplementary chapters included on the CDRom. Teaching and learning support built into each chapter include solved examples, solved problems, chapter learning objectives, summaries, glossaries, and problems and cases for assignment. Realistic and understandable business examples are used to present and motivate student understanding throughout the text. "Modern Management Science Applications" included in most chapters provide short summaries of the latest Edelman award winning applications for student awareness and enrichment. Student CDRom includes introductory ScreenCam tutorials, all Excel templates, data files, and Excel solutions for solved examples and solved problems.

Management Science - Text

International Edition

INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT SCIENCE A Modeling and Case Studies Approach with Spreadsheets, 3rd Edition

By Frederick Hillier, Stanford University and Mark Hillier, University of Washington 2008 (March 2007) / 672 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312903-7 / MHID: 0-07-312903-8

NEW TO THIS EDITION

MORE STREAMLINED PRESENTATION, FOCUSING ON KEY ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR BUSINESS. The third edition is considerably shorter, offering a more focused presentation of management science. CLEARER SEPARATION OF SIMPLE AND COMPLEX TOPICS; A sharper distinction is made in the book and on the student CD ROM between

FEATURES

A MODELING APPROACH:The book revolves around a modeling approach, focusing the role of a model, model formulation, and the analysis of model results. EXTENSIVE USE OF CASE STUDIES: Many chapters use extended case studies illustratively, within the body of the chapter, and offer end-of-chapter cases for analysis as well. SPREADSHEET-DRIVEN TREATMENT OF KEY TOPICS IN MANAGEMENT SCIENCE: Taking a modern approach to the subject, and utilizing the latest technology, the book adopts pedagogy that is consistent with current trends in the teaching of management science.

CONTENTS

Part 1 Introduction and Forecasting. 1-Introduction to Management Science, Modeling, and Excel Spreadsheets. 2- Forecasting. Part 2 Deterministic Decision Models. 3-Linear Programming: Basic Concepts and Graphical Solutions. 4-Linear Programming: Applications and Solutions. 5- Linear Programming: Sensitivity Analysis, Duality, and Specialized Models. 6- Transportation, Assignment, and Transshipment Problems. 7- Integer Programming. 8- Network Optimization Models. 9- Nonlinear Optimization Models. 10- Multi-Criteria Models. Part 3 Probabilistic Decision Models. 11- Decision Theory. 12- Markov Analysis. 13- Waiting Line Models. 14- Simulation. CDRom Modules. Chapter 4S Simplex Algorithm. Chapter 6S Transportation and Assignment Solution. Procedures. Chapter 7S Branch and Bound Method for Integer. Programming Problems. Chapter 9S Mini ­Review: Differential Arithmetic

54

Operations/Decision Sciences

NEW

QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES IN MANAGEMENT 3rd Edition

By N D Vohra, Ramjas College of University of Delhi 2006 (June 2006) / 976 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-061193-1 / MHID: 0-07-061193-9

International Edition

INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT SCIENCE A Modeling & Case Studies Approach with Spreadsheets, 2nd Edition

Tata McGraw-Hill Title

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/vohra3e The new edition continues in the tradition of application of various quantitative techniques in managerial decision making. Comprehensive treatment of the concepts in the MS/OR area and a large number of solved problems and exercises are the main pillars of the text. FEATURES

A new chapter on "Dynamic Programming" An `Overview' of the contents, at the beginning of every chapter. Section on PERT/CPM (Chapter 12) has been enlarged. Changes in the chapter on Inventory Management (chapter 9) on the discussion on Safety Stock. More exercises in Goal Programming (chapter 7). An OLC containing solutions manual

By Frederick Hillier, Stanford University and Mark Hillier, University of Washington 2003 / 736 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283347-8 / MHID: 0-07-283347-5 (with Student CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123810-6 / MHID: 0-07-123810-7 [IE with CD]

CONTENTS

1. Introduction / 2. Linear Programming: Basic Concepts / 3. The Art of Modeling with spreadsheets / 4. Linear Programming: Formulation and Applications / 5. What-If Analysis for Linear Programming / 6. Transportation and Assignment Problems / 7. Network Optimization Problems / 8. Project Management with PERT/CPM / 9. Integer Programming / 10. Nonlinear Programming / 11. Goal Programming / 12. Decision Analysis / 13. Forecasting / 14. Queuing Models / 15. Computer Simulation: Basic Concepts / 16. Computer Simulation with Crystal Ball

International Edition

MANAGERIAL SPREADSHEET MODELING AND ANALYSIS

By Rick Hesse, Mercer University 1997 / 704 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-256-21530-4 / MHID: 0-256-21530-8 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114830-6 / MHID: 0-07-114830-2 [IE]

Learning Aids

Key Points to Remember Test Your Understanding Exercises and Practical Problems Review Illustrations (solved examples) Chapter Summary Schematics of algorithms

CONTENTS

1. The Nature of Managerial Problem Solving. 2. Linear Programming: Simple Models. 3. Postoptimal Linear Programming Analysis. 4. Linear Programming: Combination Models and Reports. 5. Allocation Models. 6. Routing Models. 7. Network Models. 8. Integer Programming Models. 9. Integer Programming Applications. 10. Nonlinear Models: Inventory and Design. 11. Decision Analysis. 12. Forecasting. 13. Brand Switching and Queuing Models. 14. Simulation: Discrete Distributions. 15. Simulation: Continuous Distributions. Appendix Spreadsheet Solver and Features.

CONTENTS

1. Introduction 2. Linear Programming I: Formulation and Graphic Solution 3. Linear Programming II: The Simplex Method 4. Linear Programming III: Duality and Sensitivity Analysis 5. Specially Structured Linear Programs I Transportation and Transshipment Problems 6. Specially Structured Linear Programs II Assignment Problem 7. Extensions of Linear Programming 8. Sequencing 9. Inventory Management 10. Queuing Theory 11. Replacement Theory 12. PERT and CPM 13. Decision Theory 14. Markov Analysis 15. Theory of Games 16. Dynamic Programming 17. Simulation 18. Investment Analysis and Break-even Analysis 19. Forecasting / Appendices

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected]

Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg

55

Operations/Decision Sciences

Quantitative Method - Text

NEW

QUANTITATIVE METHODS FOR BUSINESS 2nd Edition

By Frank Dewhurst 2006 (April 2006) / 608 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710902-8 / MHID: 0-07-710902-3 and Statistical models. 7. An introduction to inferential statistics. 8. Modelling relationships. 9. Non-linear and multivariate relationships. 10. Analysing models. 11. An introduction to Time-Series. 12. Models for finance and accounting. Part B: Closing comments. Part B: Mini cases. Part C Modelling and analysing decisions. 13. An introduction to Decision Analysis. 14. An introduction to linear programming. 15. An introduction to network models. 16. An introduction to non-linear decision models. Appendices. Solutions

McGraw-Hill UK Title

Website: http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/dewhurst The new edition of Quantitative Methods for Business and Management offers a complete introductory course in Quantitative Methods, providing students with basic practical experience in quantitative approaches in modelling and analysis for business and management. The book features sections on foundation topics, models for business and management, and modelling and analyzing decisions. In particular, the new edition features greater coverage of statistics to reflect teaching in this area, with chapters on Elementary Statistics, Summary Statistics and Inferential Statistics. Other new areas of coverage in the second edition include Network Models and Non-linear Models. The book retains its popular style which offers students numerous examples accompanied by clear and straightforward explanations. Excel examples are also integrated throughout to help students to understand how this software tool is used by managers, and frequent questions and exercises enable students to test their understanding. A free CD contains Excel applications and solutions to the exercises in the textbook, and a full online learning centre completes an excellent learning package for business students. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Enhanced coverage of statistics, developing the topic coverage to offer chapters on Elementary Statistics, Summary Statistics and Inferential Statistics A revised and restructured Part C offers further new chapters on Network Models and Non-linear Models Streamlined introductory material rewritten to offer a more concise introduction to the basic concepts of numbers and symbols A CD-ROM with illustrative worked examples from the text implemented in Microsoft Excel and new to this edition, complete answers to exercises within the textbook.

Upper Level Operations Management

International Edition

PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS ANALYSIS 5th Edition

By Steven Nahmias, Santa Clara University 2005 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301865-2 / MHID: 0-07-301865-1 (with Student CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123837-3 / MHID: 0-07-123837-9 [IE with Student CD-ROM]

Website: www.mhhe.com/nahmias5e This text provides a survey of the analytical methods used to support the functions of production and operations management. This latest edition continues to bring the most thorough coverage of cutting-edge quantitative models used in operations, while presenting it in a clean, easy to understand fashion. There are many new problems both solved and unsolved for students to comprehend the quantitative material of the book. Furthermore, we have enhanced the technology package of this book to have more applied learning of concepts and skills for students. Lastly, technology, such as the internet, ecommerce, etc has been added to reflect the changes in how business is conducted. This text reflects Steve Nahmias' extensive teaching background and experience in both business and engineering schools. CONTENTS

Chapter 1. Strategy and Competition Chapter 2. Forecasting Chapter 3. Aggregate Planning Supplement 1 Linear Programming Chapter 4. Inventory Control Subject to Known Demand Chapter 6. Supply Chain Management Chapter 7. Push and Pull Production Control Systems: MRP and JIT Chapter 8. Operations Scheduling Supplement 2 Queuing Theory Chapter 9. Project Scheduling Chapter 10. Facilities Layout and Location Chapter 11. Quality and Assurance Chapter 12. Reliability and Maintainability

FEATURES

Packed with examples to demonstrate quantitative techniques in pracice, with clear and helpful explanations throughout Numerous Exercises and case study problems to apply the techniques to business decisions and offer essential problem-solving practice Short, self-contained sections covering a broad range of topics allow the book to be tailored to suit any quantitative techniques course. Section prerequisites, learning objectives, summaries and key point boxes are accompanied by signpost references to enable easy navigation through the book.

CONTENTS

Brief TOC. Detailed TOC. Contents of CD-ROM. Preface. Acknowledgements. Guided Tour. Part A The foundations of Quantitative Methods. 1. An introduction to Quantitative Methods. 2. From numbers to symbols. 3. Matrices and matrix algebra. 4. Elementary Statistics. 5. Summary Statistics. Part A: Closing comments. Part A: Mini cases. Part B Models and analysis for business and management. 6. Probability

56

Operations/Decision Sciences

International Edition

FACTORY PHYSICS 2nd Edition

11-Supply Chain 12- Implementation 13- MPC Systems and Strategy 14- Advanced MRP 15-Advanced JIT 16- Advanced Scheduling Systems 17-Advanced Concepts in Sales and Operations Planning 18-Frontiers

By Wallace Hopp, Northwestern University, and Mark Spearman, Georgia Institute of Technology 2000 / 736 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-256-24795-4 / MHID: 0-256-24795-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116378-1 / MHID: 0-07-116378-6 [IE]

International Edition

FOUNDATIONS OF INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

By Paul H Zipkin, Duke University Fuqua Graduate School of Business 2000 / 768 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-256-11379-2 / MHID: 0-256-11379-3 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118315-4 / MHID: 0-07-118315-9 [IE]

Website: www.factoryphysics.nwu.com CONTENTS

PART I THE LESSONS OF HISTORY Chapter 1. Manufacturing in America Chapter 2. Inventory Control: From EOQ to ROP Chapter 3. The MRP Crusade Chapter 4. The JIT Revolution Chapter 5. What Went Wrong PART II FACTORY PHYSICS Chapter 6. Manufacturing Systems Analysis Chapter 7. Basic Factory Dynamics Chapter 8. Variability Basics Chapter 9. The Corrupting Influence of Variability Chapter 10. Push and Pull Production Systems Chapter 11. The Human Element in Operations Management Chapter 12. Total Quality Manufacturing PART III PRINCIPLES IN PRACTICE Chapter 13. A Pull Planning Framework Chapter 14. Shop Floor Control Chapter 15. Production Scheduling Chapter 16. Aggregate and Workforce Planning Chapter 17. Inventory Management Chapter 18. Capacity Management Chapter Synthesis-Pulling It All Together References Index Standard Normal Table

CONTENTS

Chapter 1. General Introduction Chapter 2. Systems and Models Chapter 3. One Item with a Constant Demand Rate Chapter 4. Time-Varying Demands Chapter 5. Several Products and Locations Chapter 6. Stochastic Demand: One Item with Constant Lead Times Chapter 7. Stochastic Lead Times: The Structure of the Supply System Chapter 8. Several Items with Stochastic Demands Chapter 9. Time-Varying, Stochastic Demand: Policy Optimization Bibliography Appendix A: Optimization and Convexity Appendix B: Dynamical Systems Appendix C: Probability and Stochastic Processes Appendix D: Notational Conventions

Production / Inventory Control

International Edition

MANUFACTURING PLANNING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 5th Edition

International Edition

PRODUCTION Planning, Control and Integration

By Daniel Sipper, Robert Bulfin, Auburn 1997 / 512 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-057682-7 / MHID: 0-07-057682-3 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115843-5 / MHID: 0-07-115843-X [IE]

By Thomas Vollmann, William Lee Berry, Ohio State University Columbus, David Clay Whybark, University of North Carolina 2005 / 736 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-229990-8 / MHID: 0-07-229990-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112133-0 / MHID: 0-07-112133-1 [IE]

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 The Production Paradigm. Chapter 2 Market Driven Systems. Chapter 3 Problem Solving. Chapter 4 Forecasting. Chapter 5 Aggregate Planning. Chapter 6 Inventory: Independent Demand Systems. Chapter 7 Production, Capacity and Material Planning. Chapter 8 Operations Scheduling. Chapter 9 Project Planning, Scheduling and Control. Chapter 10 Integrated Production Planning and Control.

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/vollmann5 Vollman, Berry, Whybark and Jacobs', Manufacturing Planning & Control Systems, 5/e provides comprehensive real world based coverage of the concepts, tools, and methods used to manage and control manufacturing systems. This major revision contains four entirely new chapters and four thoroughly upgraded to nearly original content. ERP system coverage and the impact of them in the field is covered now in a new introductory chapter (4) as well as being integrated heavily into many other chapters from Sales and Operations Planning (3) to Advanced Scheduling Systems (16). Manufacturing Planning & Control Systems, 5/e continues to be organized in a flexible format, with the basic coverage in chapters 1-12 followed by advanced chapters that could be covered along with the basics, or skipped. Each chapter provides a managerial issues overview, then the detailed technical presentation, then examples of company implementations, then concluding principles. CONTENTS

1- Integration and Supply Chains 2- Demand Management 3-Sales and Operations Planning 4- ERP-Integrated Systems 5-Basic Inventory Concepts 6-Master Production Scheduling 7-MRP (Materials Requirements Planning) 8-JIT 9-Capacity Planning 10-Production Activity Control

Project Management

NEW

PROJECT MANAGEMENT The Managerial Process, 4th Edition

By Clifford Gray and Erik Larson of Oregon State University 2008 (March 2007) / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352515-0 / MHID: 0-07-352515-4

(Details unavailable at press time)

57

Operations/Decision Sciences

International Edition

NEW

MANAGING PROJECT AND SERVICE DEVELOPMENT Text and Cases

By Stefan H Thomke, Harvard Business School 2007 (January 2006) / 448 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302301-4 / MHID: 0-07-302301-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110755-6 / MHID: 0-07-110755-X [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/thomke This text offers a new option for instructors interested in emphasizing a balance between products and services. Managing Product and Service Development is about the managerial aspects critical to conceiving, designing, and developing innovative products and services. The course exposes students to some of the best management practices, tools, and frameworks known today, and introduces new approaches that hold promise for the future. Many texts are either aimed at engineering or marketing specialists and do not adequately address the often difficult general management issues that arise in complex development project. This book does not require training or experience in a technical field but addresses the role of new technologies in product development. In this text students learn about innovation through exploration. All the material has been developed and tested in the MBA and executive education classroom at Harvard Business School. The Instructor's Manual (IM), as only part of this text's proven teaching materials, describes an optional student project that complements in-class sessions. FEATURES

Harvard Business School tested: The teaching material and approaches have been developed, tested, and refined over six years in a successful second-year MBA elective course at Harvard Business School. Students are given a conceptual introduction to the subject--then asked to explore and validate these concepts through case analysis. This method has resulted in a deeper understanding for students. A Balanced Approach: With a balanced approach that covers product and service development, readers receive a broad and realistic idea of development issues in each major sector of our economy. Offering more than simply teaching fundamental principles (process design, project management, etc.); this new text pushes the frontiers of product and service development. Each module contains advanced material from recent research in a teaching friendly form (e.g., innovation toolkits in the Bush Boake Allen case study, lead user research in the Innovation at 3M case study). Innovation through Exploration: Employs and promotes an inductive, exploratory approach to the process of product and services development. With its emphasis on the experimental and exploratory aspects of product and service development, this book stresses the importance of maintaining a fresh and innovative perspective in design and development. More Than a Text: This new edition is much more than the sum of its parts; the case studies, readings, and exercises are integrated into three modules that have an underlying pedagogical logic that is explained in module notes. These materials (module notes, teaching notes & plans, presentation material) are made available to all adopting instructors.

Product Development: Managing Flexibility in Uncertain Environments. Case: Developing Products on Internet Time: A Process Design Exercise. Article: Developing Products on Internet Time. Case: BMW AG: The Digital Car Project. Article: The Effect of `Front-Loading' Problem-Solving on Product Development Performance. Case: Bush Boake Allen. Article: Customers as Innovators: A New Way to Create Value. Module Three: Managing Development Networks. Module Overview. Case: Microsoft Office: Finding the Suite Spot. Note: Learning from Projects: Note on Conducting a Postmortem Analysis. Case: We've Got Rhythm! Medtronic Corporation's Cardiac Pacemaker Business. Article: Creating Project Plans to Focus Product Development. Case: Siemens AG: Global Development Strategy. Article: Building Effective R&D Capabilities Abroad. Case: Project Dreamcast: Serious Play at Sega Enterprises Ltd. Article: Increasing Returns and the New World of Business. Case: Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Article: Mastering the Value Chain: An Interview with Mark Levin of Millennium Pharmaceuticals

International Edition

PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3rd Edition

By Clifford Gray and Erik Larson of Oregon State University 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312699-9 / MHID: 0-07-312699-3 (with Student CD and MS Project CD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124446-6 / MHID: 0-07-124446-8 [IE with Student CD and MS Project CD]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/graylarson3e This text approaches Project Management from a holistic, balanced perspective. The text is developed around a philosophy of a project-driven organization committed to continuous improvement and organizational learning. The text is holistic--it directs attention to the needed linkage between projects and organizational strategy. Many project management textbooks emphasize the technical aspects of the subject, while providing scant attention to the human element in projects. This text succeeds in redressing the balance by treating both the technical and the behavioral aspects of the subject in nearly equal parts. Such a balance is possible because of the complementary backgrounds of the authors: Gray, a specialist in project management systems with an operations background, provides strong technical coverage of project management. Larson, whose professional background is in organizational behavior, brings a distinctive behavioral perspective to the subject. CONTENTS

Brief Contents / Preface / 1. Modern Project Management 2. Organization Strategies and Project Selection 3. Organization: Structure and Culture 4. Defining the Project 5. Estimating Project Times and Costs 6. Developing a Project Plan 7. Managing Risk 8. Scheduling Resources 9. Reducing Project Duration 10. Leadership: Being an Effective Project Manager 11. Managing Project Teams 12. Partnering: Managing Interorganizational Relations 13. Progresses and Performance Measurement and Evaluation 14. Project Audit and Closure 15. International Projects 16. The Process of Project Management and the Future / Acronyms / Appendix Computer Project Exercises / Glossary / Project Management Equations / Index

CONTENTS

Introduction. Module One: Building Capabilities for Experimentation, Learning and Prototyping. Module Overview. Case: The Final Voyage of the Challenger. Case: Apple Powerbook: Design Quality and Time to Market. Case: IDEO Product Development. Case: Bank of America. Article: R&D Comes to Services: Bank of America's Pathbreaking Experiments. Case: Team New Zealand. Article: Enlightened Experimentation: The New Imperative for Innovation. Case: Eli Lilly & Company: Drug Development Strategy. Module Two: Development Process Design and Improvement. Module Overview. Case: Innovation at 3M. Article: Creating Breakthroughs at 3M Note: Understanding User Needs. Case: Product Development at Dell Computer Corporation. Article: Agile

58

Operations/Decision Sciences

International Edition

INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SYSTEMS PROJECT MANAGEMENT A Systems Approach, 2nd Edition

By David L. Olson, University of Nebraska - Lincoln 2004 / 352 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287270-5 / MHID: 0-07-287270-5 (with Student CD) - Out of Print ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123261-6 / MHID: 0-07-123261-3 [IE]

the key professional organization for project manager. Although perfectly useful as a stand-alone piece of software, this simulation can be bundled with either of any project management books, discounting both bundled items. An especially attractive option is to bundle it with the Second Edition of Project Management: The Managerial Process by Gray and Larson. Great pains were taken to coordinate the revision of this book with the development of Pinto and Parente's simulation. One of the four scenarios used in the simulation has been cast in the form of a continuing case used in the book, thus making a tie in between the book and the simulation.

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/olson2e Olson's Introduction to Project Management, 2/e is a project management text that focuses on "systems" issues. The primary focus is to examine the many issues facing MIS project managers. The revision also now incorporates the Project Management Institute's Body of Knowledge (PMBOK), better preparing users for the PMI certification exam. Olson focuses on traditional project management topics such as project adoption, planning, scheduling, and implementation while encouraging students to view the projects holistically and analytically. Utilizing the most current software and project management tools, he provides students with the most effective strategies for today's IT project managers. CONTENTS

1. Introduction to Project Management 2. Human Aspects of Information Systems Project Management 3. Project Organization 4. Project Selection and Approval 5. Requirements Definition 6. System Development 7. Estimation 8. Quantitative Project Scheduling Methods 9. Probabilistic Scheduling Models 10. Project Implementation 11. Project Control and Assessment / Appendix (Microsoft Project) / PMBOK Cross References

Quality Control /Management

International Edition

NEW

QUALITY PLANNING AND ANALYSIS From Product Development Through Use, 5th Edition

By Frank M Gryna Jr., University of Tampa, Joseph A DeFeo and Richard CH Chua of Juran Institute 2007 (December 2005) / 704 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296662-6 / MHID: 0-07-296662-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125421-2 / MHID: 0-07-125421-8 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/gryna Through four editions, Juran's Quality Planning and Analysis has provided students and professionals with an authoritative treatment of the subject that goes beyond statistical techniques. The fifth edition of this highly regarded classic book on managing for quality, Juran's Quality Planning and Analysis for Enterprise Quality, combines the pioneering concepts of Dr. Joseph M. Juran and the teachings of the late Dr. Frank M. Gryna with the insights and experience of today's leading trainers and practitioners at the Juran Institute: Dr. Richard Chua, Executive VP and Joseph A. DeFeo, President & Executive Coach. The trademark Juran Institute approach has been retained, developing the viewpoint that the achievement of quality products and services requires the application of managerial, technological, statistical, and behavioral actions throughout all functions of an organization. With real-world problems provided in each chapter, students are faced with realities that confront managers, designers, engineers, marketers, operations personnel, users, and others involved in enterprise quality. This text will challenge readers to make assumptions, estimate economics, reach data-driven conclusions, and adapt themselves to the imperfect world of the practitioner. Students and professionals will also find this book useful as they prepare for various certifications such as the Certified Quality Engineer, Reliability Engineer, Quality Manager, Six Sigma Green Belt and Black Belt. NEW TO THIS EDITION

A Road Map for Enterprise Quality to provide guidance to organizations on how to achieve and sustain breakthrough results. Modular organization of topics into four parts-Foundation, Managerial Concepts, Functional Applications, and Statistical Techniques-to enable instructors (and the reader) to customize topic coverage easily for different classes. New and expanded topics, including: Six Sigma Improvement, Design for Six Sigma, Lean, Value Stream Management, Mass Customization, Quality Function Deployment, and Strategic Deployment. Actual Six Sigma and Lean project examples and presentations.

International Edition

SIM'S PROJECT PLAYER'S MANUAL AND ACCESS CODE

By Jeffrey K. Pinto and Diane H. Parente 2003 / 250 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293215-7 / MHID: 0-07-293215-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124169-4 / MHID: 0-07-124169-8 [IE with CD and Access Code]

With the rapid rise of computers and advanced technology in the classroom have come new pedagogical approaches to teaching. One of the most powerful of these approaches is the use of computer simulations to demonstrate real world business practices, the inter-relatedness of various business functions, and the role of competitive decision-making in business. Computer simulations encourage team development, collaboration, global thinking, and a predilection to consider the ramifications of decisions and their effect on the bottom line in other words, many of the skills that are useful to project managers and team members in business. The purpose of this simulation is to tie together many of the salient challenges of project management in order to give students the deepest possible understanding of the complexities involved in undertaking a project. The goal of the simulation will be to have students manage a project from initiation to completion. Within this framework the student will need to employ and develop skills pertinent to personnel selection and training, motivation, conflict management, and stakeholder management. Students will be required to use planning and scheduling techniques, such as work breakdown structures, PERT/CPM, scope development, and risk analysis. The topical coverage will have approximate coincidence with the Project Management Institute's Body of Knowledge (PMBOK), insuring that the students gain exposure to those topics recognized by

59

Operations/Decision Sciences

A fuller treatment of Hypothesis Testing, including a hypothesis testing roadmap, to guide students on the choice of statistical tests. Updated references and supplementary readings with descriptions of the citations, based on online searches of the latest literature-books, conferences, and journals. Use of MINITAB software to analyze data and solve problems. Worked examples using MINITAB are featured and data sets for exercises are provided on the website. New examples and exercises expanded to include: medical devices, service sector, pharmaceuticals, food, and software industries. Integration of ASQ style exam questions throughout chapters and updated in the Appendix. 25% new figures.

International Edition

QUALITY MANAGEMENT 3rd Edition

By Howard Gitlow, University of Miami, Rosa Oppenheim, Rutgers University, Alan Oppenheim, Montclair State University and David Levine 2005 / 767 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299983-9 / MHID: 0-07-299983-7 (with Student CD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112338-9 / MHID: 0-07-112338-5 [IE with Student CD]

CONTENTS

Introduction: A Roadmap for Change Part I: Foundation 1. Basic Concepts 2. Companywide Assessment of Quality 3. Quality Improvement and Cost Reduction 4. Operational Quality Planning and Sales Income 5. Quality Control Part II: Managerial Concepts 6. Process Management 7. Organization for Quality 8. Strategic Quality Management 9. Developing a Quality Culture Part III: Functional Applications 10. Understanding Customer Needs 11. Designing for Quality 12. Supply Chain Management 13. Operations-Manufacturing Sector 14. Operations-Service Sector 15. Inspection, Test, and Measurement 16. Quality Assurance Audits Part IV: Statistical Techniques 17. Basic Concepts of Statistics and Probability 18. Statistical Tools for Analyzing Data 19. Statistical Tools for Designing for Quality 20. Statistical Process Control Appendix I: Supplementary Problems Using Minitab Appendix II: Study Guide Examples Appendix III: Tables

Quality improvement is now recognized as an essential function of any organization's survival. Leading corporations have demonstrated that improved quality raises profits, reduces costs, and provides competitive advantage. This is no minor task, it requires vast knowledge, training on the proper tools and effective methods and strategies. In comes, Quality Management, 3/e, this text presents a comprehensive approach to quality improvement, using Dr. W. Edwards Deming's philosophy of quality, productivity, and competitive position. Attention is given to modern inspection policies (Deming's kp rule) as opposed to traditional acceptance sampling procedures, integrated with the author's effective use of quality improvement stories, many examples and mini-case studies to help students better understand and appreciate the concept of Quality Management and Improvement. CONTENTS

Part One: Foundations of Quality Management 1 Fundamentals of Quality 2 Fundamentals of Statistical Studies 3 Defining and Documenting a Process Part Two: Tools and Methods of Analytic Studies 4 Basic Probability and Statistics 5 Stabilizing and Improving a Process with Control Charts 6 Attribute Control Charts 7 Variables Control Charts 8 Out-Of-Control Patterns 9 Diagnosing a Process 10 Specifications 11 Process Capability and Improvement Studies 12 Taguchi Methods-Quality Improvement in Product and Process Design 13 Inspection Policy Part Three: Administrative Systems for Quality Management 14 Management Commitment to Transformation 15 Management's Intellectual and Emotional Education 16 Daily Management 17 Cross Functional Management 18 Policy Management (Hoshin Kanri) Part Four: Some Current thinking About Statistical Studies and Practice 19 Some Current thinking about Statistical Studies 20 "Six Sigma" Management

WHAT IS DESIGN FOR SIX SIGMA

By Peter Pande, Robert Neuman and Roland Cavanagh of Pivotal Resources 2006 / 96 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-142389-2 / MHID: 0-07-142389-3

A Professional Reference Title

What Is Design for Six Sigma? reveals how to use DFSS to design new products, services, and processes so that quality problems can be solved before they ever start. Topics include:

How The

to design new products and processes

DMADOV implementation process (Define, Measure, Analyze, Design, Optimize, and Verify) to redesign existing processes and services

International Edition

JURAN'S QUALITY CONTROL HANDBOOK 5th Edition

How

By Joseph Juran and A. Godfrey 1999 / 1872 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-034003-9 / MHID: 0-07-034003-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116539-6 / MHID: 0-07-116539-8 [IE]

A Professional Reference Title

CONTENTS

(International Edition is not for sale in Japan)

Part I: Managerial. Part II: Functional. Part III: Industries. Part IV: International. Part V: Statistical.

60

Operations/Decision Sciences

International Edition

STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL 7th Edition

CONTENTS

Part I:UNDERSTANDING SERVICES Chp. 1 The Role of Services in an Economy Chp. 2 The Nature of Services Chp. 3 Service Strategy Part II: DESIGNING THE SERVICE ENTERPRISE Chp. 4 New service Development Chp. 5 Technology in Services Chp. 6 Service Quality Chp. 7 The Service Encounter Chp. 8 The Supporting Facility Chp. 9 Service Facility Location Chp. 10 Managing Projects Part III: STRUCTURING MANAGING SERVICE OPERATIONS Chp. 11 Forecasting Demand for Services Chp. 12 Managing Capacity and Demand Chp. 13 Managing Waiting Lines Chp. 14 Capacity Planning and Queuing Models Chp. 15 Service Supply Relationships Chp. 16 Managing Facilitating Goods Chp 17 Growth and Globalization of Services Appendix A: Areas of a Standard Normal Distribution Appendix B: Uniformly Distributed Random Numbers [0,1] Appendix C: Values of Lq for The M/M/c Queuing Model Appendix D: Equations for Selected Queuing Models

By Eugene Grant, Stanford University, and Richard Leavenworth, University of Florida 1996 / 764 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-844354-1 / MHID: 0-07-844354-7 (with 3.5" disk) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116320-0 / MHID: 0-07-116320-4 [IE]

CONTENTS

1 Introduction and Overview 2 Directions for Simple X and R Charts 3 Why the Control Chart Works; Some Statistical Concepts 4 Why the Control Chart Works; Some Examples 5 Some Fundamentals of The Theory of Probability 6 The Control Chart for Fraction Rejected 7 The Control Chart for Nonconformities 8 Rational Subgrouping 9 Statistical Analysis of Process Capability and for Process Improvement 10 Some Special Process Control Procedures 11 Some Fundamental Concepts in Scientific Sampling 12 An AQL System for Lot-by-Lot Acceptance Sampling by Attributes 13 Other Procedures for Acceptance Sampling by Attributes 14 Systems for Acceptance Sampling from Continuous Production 15 Systems for Acceptance Sampling by Variables 16 Some Aspects of Life Testing and Reliability 17 Some Economic Aspects of Quality Decisions 18 Some Significant Events in the Development of Statistical Quality Control 19 Models for Quality Management and Problem Solving 20 Demonstrating the Operation of Systems of Chance Causes / Appendixes

FLYING HIGH IN A COMPETITIVE INDUSTRY Cost Effective Service Excellence at Singapore Airlines

By Loizos Heracleous, Nitin Pangarkar and Jochen Wirtz 2005 / 168 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124964-5 / MHID: 0-07-124964-8

An Asian Publication A Professional Reference Title

This book aims to answer a simple but intriguing question: How has Singapore Airlines managed to make healthy profits every year, in an industry whose performance over the years has been dismal? SIA's profitability on the other hand has been exceptional, superior in the long term than any competitor in its peer group. The authors' purpose in writing this book is to answer this question, based on in-depth research on the airline industry and SIA, and derive some general lessons for managers in other industries. CONTENTS

1 Introduction 2 The Airline Industry: Trends, Economics, Performance and Strategic Imperatives 3 Key Drivers of SIA's Performance: Strategic Choices and Resource Deployment Decisions 4 Achieving Cost Effective Service Excellence at Singapore Airlines 5 Innovation as a Key to Sustain Key Excellence 6 Managing People Effectively to Deliver Sustained Service Excellence 7 How to Win in Cut Throat Industries / Lessons from Singapore Airlines

Service Operations Management

International Edition

SERVICE MANAGEMENT Operations, Strategy, Information Technology, 5th Edition

By James A Fitzsimmons, University of Texas at Austin 2006 / 624 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298230-5 / MHID: 0-07-298230-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312258-8 / MHID: 0-07-312258-0 (with Student CD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124440-4 / MHID: 0-07-124440-9 [IE]

International Edition

PROFESSIONAL SERVICES Text and Cases

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/fitzsimmons5e Balancing conceptual and applied coverage of all aspects of the management and operation of services, this book has maintained the position as market leader through four previous editions. It is the most comprehensive and widely used introduction to service operations on the market, written by one of the top authorities on the subject and is designed to develop students' skills in both strategic and operational issues pertaining to services. New material on service out-sourcing highlights the importance of supply chain issues with services. In addition, discussion on the balanced scorecard and Six Sigma gives students the latest, most wide-ranging techniques for ensuring quality and evaluating long-term strategy planning. Coverage spans both qualitative and quantitative aspects of service management and offers flexibility in courses offering widely varying approaches to the study of service operations. The ancillary package includes student CD-ROM and Website that includes self-test quizzes, video clips, ServiceModel Software, and the Mortgage Service Game.

By Thomas DeLong and Ashish Nanda of Harvard Business School 2004 / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255920-0 / MHID: 0-07-255920-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121326-4 / MHID: 0-07-121326-0 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/delongnanda DeLong and Nanda's Managing Professional Services is the first casebook to be published on the management of professional service firms (law firms, architecture, financial services, consulting). It includes a comprehensive selection of case studies that span these industries broadly. Although much has been researched and written about managing service firms generally (e.g., food service, hotels, banking and other consumer services), very little has been compiled on managing professional services. Professional Service firms have a highly educated employee base and these firms offer both consumer and commercial services that involve managing, supporting and improving their clients' intellectual assets. Delong and Nanda have developed this text

61

Operations/Decision Sciences

to demonstrate to students the unique challenges and opportunities attendant upon this market segment of our economy. CONTENTS

Module I: Hambrecht & Quist / AGENCY.COM / Module II: Thomas Weisel Partners / Woodland Partners: Field of Dreams? / Eggrock Partners, LLC / The HBS California Research Center / Casto Travel / Shouldice Hospital Limited Lebenthal and Co., Inc. / The Bridgespan Group / Module III: Morgan Stanley Dean Witter Private Client Services Diamond in the Rough / The Goldman Sachs IPO (A) / Family Feud: Andersen vs. Andersen (A) / The Saga of Prince Jefri and KPMG: Mystery of the Missing Billions / International Profit Associates / Coopers & Lybrand in Hungary / Module IV: The Firmwide 360-degree Performance Evaluation Process at Morgan Stanley / Rob Parson at Morgan Stanley / Strategic Services at Andersen Consulting / Bain & Co., Inc.: Making Partner / Venture Law Group Brainard, Bennis & Farrell / McKinsey & Co.: Managing Knowledge and Learning / San Francisco Bay Consulting / Module V: &Samhoud / The Union Carbide Deal (Abridged) / Jill Greenthal at Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette: The TCI/AT&T Deal (A) / Module VI: Cambridge Consulting Group: Bob Anderson / McDuffy, Arms & Ginsberg / Charlotte Beers at Ogilvy & Mather Worldwide / Lehman Brothers (A): Rise of the Equity Research Department / Alexander Bandelli / Tom Tierney at Bain & Co. / Infosys Technologies, Limited / NYPD New / Module VII: Tim Hertach at GL Consulting (A) / Professionals' Quandaries / Tradeoffs: Juggling Careers in PSFs with Private Life / The First Six Months: Launching a PSF Career / Appendix / Note on E-Consulting / Note on Investment Banking

Purchasing and Supply Chain Management

International Edition

NEW

DESIGNING AND MANAGING THE SUPPLY CHAIN 3rd Edition

By David Simchi-Levi, Mass Institute of Tech, Sally Kaminsky, College of Staten Island and Edith Simchi-Levi, Logic Tools Inc., 2008 (February 2007) / 460 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298239-8 / MHID: 0-07-298239-X ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124477-0 / MHID: 0-07-124477-8 [IE]

International Edition

MANAGING SERVICES Using Technology to Create Value

As the most up-to-date, cutting-edge supply chain management book on the market, the Third Edition of Designing and Managing the Supply Chain discusses the problems, models and concepts derived from issues related to effective supply chain management. While many core supply chain management issues are interrelated, the authors have tried to make each chapter as self-contained as possible so that the reader can refer directly to chapters covering topics of interest. Each chapter utilizes case studies and numerous examples. Mathematical and technical sections can be skipped without loss of continuity. Most textbooks do not include models and decision support systems robust enough for industry, but that is not true of this new edition. The accompanying CD-ROM also features the return of two simulations, the Computerized Beer Game and the Risk Pool Game and a computerized tool. These simulations help users develop and execute supply chain contracts while also illustrating many of the concepts discussed in the text. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Improved and Integrated Coverage of Technology: This edition reflects a more realistic approach to incorporating technology in today's companies and this in-depth integration allows readers to better understand how technology implementation, new trends, and customers can affect the design and management of a supply chain. New and Updated Cases: Thanks to reviewer feedback, whenever possible single cases have been replaced with multiple cases giving readers even more opportunities to realistically study of how supply chain management is utilized in real companies better preparing them to be successful managers. More Comprehensive and Complete Ancillary Package: With improved, stronger PowerPoint presentations, and improved teaching notes on the Instructor CD, even instructors without a background in supply chain or those teaching the course for the first time will have their start-up costs reduced and their pool of instructional resources increased by these improved ancillaries. New "Supply Contracts" Tool on Student CD-ROM: Besides the computerized versions of "The Beer Game" and the "Risk Pool Game," there will be a newly developed electronic tool dealing with supply contracts. Now students have even more support to help them conceptualize strategic supply chain management.

By Mark Davis, Bentley College and Janelle Heineke, Boston University 2003 / 480 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285819-8 / MHID: 0-07-285819-2 (with Student CD-ROM) - Out of Print ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119477-8 / MHID: 0-07-119477-0 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/davisheineke CONTENTS

PART I: THE CONTEMPORARY SERVICE ENVIRONMENT / 1. Introduction / 2. Understanding Customers and the Marketplace / 2Supplement Collecting Data About Customers / 3. The Role of Technology / 4. The Integration of Manufacturing and Services / PART II: STRATEGY AND SYSTEM DESIGN / 5. Defining Service Strategies / 6. Project Management / 7. Designing Service Business Processes / 8. Designing Service Facilities / PART III: MANAGING SERVICES / 9. Managing the Workforce / 10. Measuring Performance: Efficiency and Effectiveness / 11. Defining Service Quality / 11Supplement Quality Tools / 12. Customer Focused Service / 13. Managing Demand and Capacity / 14. Yield Management / 15. Waiting Time Management / 16. Workforce Scheduling

FEATURES

Strong Coverage of E-commerce: By incorporating the latest insights into the most current practices related to the Supply Chain and E-commerce, students get an up-to-date view of supply chain management. Expanded Discussion of Forecasting: Thanks to reviewer suggestions, readers now have more coverage of the quantitative strategies involved in effectively managing a supply chain. Broad Introduction to Supply Chain Management Issues: The topics discussed range from a basic discussion of inventory management, logistics network design, distribution systems, and customer value, to more advanced discussions of strategic alliances, the value of informa-

62

Operations/Decision Sciences

tion in the supply chain, information technology and decisions support systems, and international issues in supply chain management. Case Studies: Each chapter contains at least one or more case study. These case studies offer real examples of supply chain challenges and provide readers numerous opportunities to apply their knowledge to a strategic question or set of questions involving supply chain management. Authorship: The authors have taught a variety of students and their book is written to appeal to many types of readers. Appropriate for undergraduate and graduate business students as well as for engineers and engineering students, this text will also appeal to customers in the professional market that are seeking a reference book on supply chain management.

International Edition

NEW

SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT 2nd Edition

By Donald Bowersox, David Closs and M. Bixby Cooper of Michigan State University--East Lansing 2007 (November 2005) / 464 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294788-5 / MHID: 0-07-294788-8 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125414-4 / MHID: 0-07-125414-5 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bowersox2e Supply Chain Logistics Management is exciting, and promises to bolster traditional logistics courses and invigorate supply chain management courses. By examining traditional logistics issues within the context of the supply chain, this text captures the current trends in Supply Chain Management and Supply Chain Strategy. Most textbooks approach this subject from a limited perspective, studying only internal functions of an organization to the exclusion of issues that relate to the entire supply chain in an integrated enterprise. Supply Chain Logistics Management provides a solid foundation that clearly describes the role of logistics within the supply chain, portraying a complete view of the subject and extending to show how all the pieces fit together. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Important new topics on supply chain added: process integration, relationship management, supply chain security and sustainability, globalization, and the impact of the new consumer economy on supply chain management and design. New, integrated treatment of technology, including ERP and advanced

International Edition

NEW

PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT

By W C Benton 2007 (June 2006) / 800 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352514-3 / MHID: 0-07-352514-6 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110630-6 / MHID: 0-07-110630-8 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/benton07 Purchasing and Supply Management, 1/e, by W.C. Benton, offers insights into the theory, practice, and implementation of supply management issues. A step-by-step approach helps students and professionals gain analytical purchasing skills. Many actual case studies and exercises help students transform purchasing theory into purchasing practice and implementation. Some of the topics include purchasing business processes, price cost analysis, professional services, transportation purchasing, global purchasing, and healthcare purchasing. FEATURES

Introduces innovative and recent concepts in purchasing and supply chain management, such as supply chain power and e-purchasing systems concepts. Includes coverage of pricing, price discrimination, and an appendix on the Robinson-Putman act. Covers special topics of interest to majors: equipment and leasing, healthcare purchasing, service procurement, and legal issues in purchasing and supply management. Contains over 25 case studies, all original to this text.

planning and scheduling systems.

The

book has been shortened and reorganized to facilitate a better teaching and learning pace, and a leaner presentation.

FEATURES

Technology--Vast coverage of the most current technology in this industry such as Information Networks, Enterprise Resource Planning and Decision Support Systems are covered. . MSU Loga Simulation--This unique simulation stresses a complete range of supply chain decisions.. Authorship--The authors are well-known and respected. Don Bowersox is a well-published author and researcher. He is acknowledged as one of the leading authorities on logistics. David Closs' research in logistics is also well respected, he also has extensive consulting experience and is a roundtable officer of the Council of Logistics Management, Bixby Cooper is the co-author of Marketing Channels along with Bowersox and is very visible as a member of various logistics professional organizations. Their talent will be very well received within the industry.

CONTENTS

Preface. Part 1: Introduction to Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter 1: Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter 2: Purchasing Decisions and Business Strategy. Chapter 3: The Legal Aspects of Purchasing. Part 2: Materials Management. Chapter 4: Materials Management. Chapter 5: Inventory Management. Chapter 6: Just-In-Time (Lean) Purchasing. Chapter 7: Purchasing Procedures, E-Purchasing, and Systems Contracting. Part 3: Fundamentals of Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter 8: Supplier Selection and Evaluation. Chapter 9: Global Sourcing. Chapter 10: Purchasing, Supply Partnerships, and Supply Chain Power. Chapter 11: Total Quality Management (TQM) and Purchasing. Part 4: Price/Cost Analysis and Negotiation Strategies. Chapter 12: Price Determination. Chapter 13: Bargaining and Negotiations. Part 5: Special Purchasing Application. Chapter 14: Purchasing Transportation Services. Chapter 15: Equipment Acquisition and Disposal. Chapter 16: Healthcare Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter 17: Procuring Professional Services. Cases. Glossary. Index

Unique Balanced Approach : The book offers a unique blend of supply chain and logistics.

Extensive

integration of spreadsheet-based solution methods in the text and problem material, for example: Use of Excel Solver to solve linear programming problems (Chapter 10) and reciprocal cost allocation problems (Chapter 14), Use of Excel regression to solve linear regression problems, Use of spreadsheets to perform sensitivity analysis in cost-volume-profit analysis and to prepare process cost reports. Actual Excel screens are used to illustrate the use of the methods to make it easier to replicate the examples and problems, following the illustrated Excel commands

CONTENTS

PART ONE ­ SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT Chapter 1 21st Century Supply Chains Chapter 2 Logistics Chapter 3 Customer Accommodation Chapter 4 Procurement and Manufacturing Chapter

63

Operations/Decision Sciences

5 Information Technology Framework PART TWO ­ SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS OPERATIONS Chapter 6 Inventory Chapter 7 Transportation InfrastructureChapter 8 Transportation Operations Chapter 9 Warehousing Chapter 10 Packaging and Materials Handling Chapter 11 Operational Integration PART THREE ­ SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS DESIGN Chapter 12 Global Strategic Positioning Chapter 13 Network Integration Chapter 14 Logistics Design and Operational Planning PART FOUR ­ SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS ADMINSTRATION Chapter 15 Relationship Development and Management Chapter 16 Operational, Financial and Social Performance/ EPILOGUE

expanded throughout the text, particularly in new chapters on Supply Law and Ethics, Public Supply, and Supplier Relations. While all basic tenets of the purchasing function and cost issues remain, the coverage of the field is state of the art highlighting the supply chain approach. CONTENTS

Chapter 1 ­ Purchasing and Supply Management Chapter 2 ­ Supply Organization Chapter 3 ­ Supply Processes Chapter 4 ­ Information Systems and Technology Chapter 5 ­ Quality, Specification and Service Chapter 6 ­ Quantity and Inventory Chapter 7 ­ Transportation and Delivery Chapter 8 ­ Price Chapter 9 ­ Cost Management, Discounts, and Negotiation Chapter 10 ­ Supplier Selection Chapter 11 ­ Investment Recovery Chapter12 ­ Supply Law and Ethics Chapter 13 ­ Research and Metrics Chapter 14 ­ Global Supply Chapter 15 ­ Public Supply Management Chapter 16 ­ Capital Goods Chapter 17 ­ Services Chapter 18 ­ Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing Chapter 19 ­ Supplier Relations Chapter 20 ­ Strategy in Purchasing and Supply Management CASE INDEX SUBJECT INDEX

International Edition

MATCHING SUPPLY WITH DEMAND An Introduction to Operations Management

By Gerard Cachon and Christian Terwiesch 2006 / 368 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-291899-1 / MHID: 0-07-291899-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124426-8 / MHID: 0-07-124426-3 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cachon_terwiesch The most authoritative, cutting-edge book for operations management and supply chain management. The book demands rigorous analysis on the part of students. When the use of quantitative tools or formal modeling is indicated, it is only to perform the necessary analysis needed to inform and support a practical business solution. CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 The Process View of the Organization Chapter 3 Understanding the Supply Process: Evaluation Process Capacity Chapter 4 Estimating and Reducing Labor Costs Chapter 5 Bathing and Other Flow Interruptions: Set-up Times and the Economic Order Quantity Model Chapter 6 Variability and Its Impact on Process Performance: Waiting Time Problems Chapter 7 The Impact of Variability on Process Performance: Throughput Losses Chapter 8 Fundamentals of Quality and the Toyota Production System Chapter 9 Betting on Uncertain Demand: The Newsvendor Model Chapter 10 Make-To-Order and Quick Response with Reactive Capacity Chapter 11 Service Levels and Lead Times in Supply Chains: The Order up-to Inventory Model Chapter 12 Risk Pooling Strategies to Reduce and Hedge Uncertainty Chapter 13 Revenue Management with Capacity Controls Chapter 14 Supply Chain Coordination / Appendix / Glossary / References / Index of "How to" exhibits / Summary of key equations / Index

International Edition

WORLD CLASS SUPPLY MANAGEMENT The Key to Supply Chain Management with Student CD (Cases), 7th Edition

By David N. Burt, University of San Diego and Donald W. Dobler, Colorado State University, Emeritus 2003 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283156-6 / MHID: 0-07-283156-1 (with CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123627-0 / MHID: 0-07-123627-9 [IE with CD-ROM]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/burt7e CONTENTS

I The Foundation: 1. World Class Supply Management / 2. Purchasing Becomes Supply Management / 3. Supply Management: An Organization-Spanning Activity / 4. Supply Management: Implementor of Three of the Firm's Social Responsibilities / II. Enabling Concepts: 5. Three Types of Buyer-Supplier Relationships / 6. Cross-Functional Teams / 7. Quality / 8. Total Cost of Ownership / 9. e-Procurement / III. The Requirements Process: 10. New Product Development / 11. Specifications and Standardization / 12. Equipment / 13. Services / IV. Strategic Sourcing: 14. Make or Buy/Outsourcing / 15. Source Selection / 16. Global Supply Management / V. Strategic Cost Management: 17. Pricing / 18. Cost Analysis / 19. Types of Compensation / 20. Negotiation / VI. Relationship Management: 21. Relationship and Contract Management / 22. Supplier Development / 23. Alliance Development / 24. Ethics / 25. Legal / VII. Integrating the Supply Chain: 26. Demand Management / VIII. Institutional and Government Procurement: 27. Supply Management in Institutions / 28. Government Procurement / IX. Supply Chain Management: 29. World Class Supply Management (sm) : The Key to Supply Chain Management.

International Edition

PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT 13th Edition

By Michael Leenders and P Fraser Johnson of University of Western Ontario, Anna Flynn, Vice president of Institute of Supply Management and Harold E Fearon, Center for Advanced Purchasing Studies, Emeritus 2006 / 588 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287379-5 / MHID: 0-07-287379-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124966-9 / MHID: 0-07-124966-4 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/leenders13e The Leenders' text provides a comprehensive introduction to the purchasing and supply chain management field, supported by 50 case studies. Cases cover purchasing and supply chain issues in a variety of settings, from process industries to high tech manufacturing and services as well as public institutions. Supply Management concepts, both strategic and tactical, have been

64

Operations/Decision Sciences

International Edition

PROFITABLE PURCHASING STRATEGIES

By Paul Steele and Brian Court 1996 / 228 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709214-6 / MHID: 0-07-709214-7 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116625-6 / MHID: 0-07-116625-4 [IE] Can be purchased, at a discounted price, with other McGraw-Hill/ Irwin texts in Operations Management. Heavily illustrated with graphics and annotated screen shots.

CONTENTS

Preface. Part 1 Understanding Enterprise Software. Chapter 1 Overview. Chapter 2 Navigation and Systems Operation. Chapter 3 Application Modules. Chapter 4 Businesses Processes. Chapter 5 Web Application Server. Chapter 6 Internet Enabled Solutions. Chapter 7 Configuration. Chapter 8 Implementation Framework. Chapter 9 Organization Structure. Chapter 10 Customizing Tools. Part 2 Displaying SAP R/3 Information. Chapter 11 Exploring System Capabilities. Part 3 Processing SAP R/3 Transactions. Chapter 12 Customer Order to Cash Cycle Processes. Summary. Appendix Quick Check Answers

McGraw-Hill UK Title A Professional Reference Title

CONTENTS

1 What is Purchasing. 2 Building a Purchasing Strategy. 3 Strategic Purchasing. 4 Understanding the Basics of Purchasing. 5 Supply Positioning. 6 Suppliers Preferences. 7 Vulnerability Management. 8 Influencing the Supply Market. 9 Specific Requirements Identification and the Buyer/Supplier Interface. 10 Options for Supplier Relationships. 11 Partnership Outsourcing. 12 Monopolies and Cartels. 13 Organizing for Impact. 14 Measurement, Audit and Benchmarking.

Data Mining

International Edition

Enterprise Resource Planning

NEW

SAP R/3 ENTERPRISE SOFTWARE An Introduction

By Roger Hayen, Central Michigan University 2007 (May 2006) / 304 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299067-6 / MHID: 0-07-299067-8

NEW

INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS DATA MINING

By David Olson and Yong Shi of University of Nebraska-Omaha 2007 (November 2005) / 288 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295971-0 / MHID: 0-07-295971-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124470-1 / MHID: 0-07-124470-0 [IE]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/olson1e Introduction to Business Data Mining was developed to introduce students, as opposed to professional practitioners or engineering students, to the fundamental concepts of data mining. Most importantly, this text shows readers how to gather and analyze large sets of data to gain useful business understanding. A four part organization introduces the material (Part I), describes and demonstrated basic data mining algorithms (Part II), focuses on the business applications of data mining (Part III), and presents an overview of the developing areas in this field, including web mining, text mining, and the ethical aspects of data mining. (Part IV). The author team has had extensive experience with the quantitative analysis of business as well as with data mining analysis. They have both taught this material and used their own graduate students to prepare the text's data mining reports. Using real-world vignettes and their extensive knowledge of this new subject, David Olson and Yong Shi have created a text that demonstrates data mining processes and techniques needed for business applications. FEATURES

Coverage of business applications: This text focuses on the value of data analyses to business decision making while also exploring concepts such as lift, customer relationship management, market segmentation, and more. Straightforward explanation of methods, demonstrated with examples: Short vignettes are used throughout showing how specific concepts have been applied in actual business situations. References to data mining software and websites are also featured. Major software addressed: The text's appendices show how major software projects support various aspects of data mining. Also, the text reviews popular data mining software to help students become familiar with the software options available in data mining.

This text is written by Dr. Roger Hayen, a SAP R/3 instructor at Central Michigan University, one of three universities in the U.S. to offer SAP R/3 certification for students in an SAP University Alliance program, called "Process Integration Certification Academy". Hayen's extensive familiarity with the subject provides a useful introduction to the essential concepts of the SAP R/3 System, with the opportunity for hands-on implementation of those concepts. The text's succinct, yet thorough coverage makes it versatile, so that it is appropriate for both student instruction and professional training and reference. FEATURES

The core text is organized into three distinct main parts--Understanding Enterprise Software, Displaying SAP R/3 Information, and Processing SAP R/3--for easy readability and enhanced functionality. Includes helpful "Quick Checks" for student review of concepts after each chapter. Class-tested at Central Michigan University by undergraduate students; also used by SAP R/3 for its own training programs. Hands-on, up-to-date exercises using SAP's IDES training data, SAP R/3's own help files, and the 4.6 R/3 release--critical to the understanding and application of the software. Frees instructors' time, as they would otherwise have to create the data for students' exercises themselves. Also ensures students will be market-ready for SAP R/3 user companies. Flexibility of the hands-on exercises. Provided in two formats: local, `read-only' ones and web-based activities with a `live client' simulating a `real world' SAP/R3 implementation.

65

Operations/Decision Sciences

Concepts of data mining introduced early: Concept overviews precede the discussion of data mining algorithms, allowing readers to understand the importance of techniques by seeing how they are applied before they actually learn them.

CONTENTS

Part I: INTRODUCTION Chapter 1: Initial Description of Data Mining in Business Chapter 2: Data Mining Processes and Knowledge Discovery Chapter 3: Database Support to Data Mining Part II: DATA MINING METHODS AS TOOLS Chapter 4: Overview of Data Mining Techniques Chapter 4 Appendix: Enterprise Miner Demonstration on Expenditure Data Set Chapter 5: Cluster Analysis Chapter 5 Appendix: Clementine Chapter 6: Regression Algorithms in Data Mining Chapter 7: Neural Networks in Data Mining Chapter 8: Decision Tree Algorithms Appendix 8: Demonstration of See5 Decision Tree Analysis Chapter 9: Linear Programming-Based Methods Chapter 9 Appendix: Data Mining Linear Programming Formulations Part III: BUSINESS APPLICATIONS Chapter 10: Business Data Mining Applications Applications Chapter 11: Market-Basket Analysis Chapter 11 Appendix: Market-Basket Procedure Part IV: DEVELOPING ISSUES Chapter 12: Text and Web Mining Chapter 12 Appendix: Semantic Text Analysis Chapter 13: Ethical Aspects of Data Mining

Stochastic Single-Period Model for Perishable Products / Supplement 2 to Chapter 18 Stochastic Periodic-Review Models / Supplement 1 to Chapter 20 Variance-Reducing Techniques / Supplement 2 to Chapter 20 Regenerative Method of Statistical Analysis / 21 The Art of Modeling with Spreadsheets / 22 Project Management with PERT/CPM / 23 Additional Special Types of Linear Programming Problems / 24 Probability Theory / 25 Reliability / 26 The Application of Queueing Theory / 27 Forecasting / 28 Examples of Performing Simulations on Spreadsheets with Crystal Ball / Appendix 6 Simultaneous Linear Equations

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH 2nd Edition

By Richard Bronson, Fairleigh Dickinson College and Goovindasami Naadimuthu of Fairleigh Dickinson University 1998 / 456 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-008020-1 / MHID: 0-07-008020-8

A Schaum Professional Reference Title

Tackling the broad range of allocation problems that actually confront engineers, programmers and analysts in today's business and industrial worlds, this book takes readers step-by-step through all the mathematical programming techniques--including the trailblazing Karmarkar algorithm--needed to excel in any operations research course. It's easy to see why the first edition of this invaluable study guide sole more than 35,000 copies! It cuts down study time while it builds essential skills.

Operation Research

International Edition

INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS RESEARCH 8th Edition

Global Operations Management

International Edition

GLOBAL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

By Therese Flaherty, The Wharton School, University of Pennsylvania 1996 / 608 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-023716-2 / MHID: 0-07-023716-6 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114215-1 / MHID: 0-07-114215-0 [IE]

By Frederick Hillier, Stanford University and Gerald Lieberman (Deceased) 2005 / 1088 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321114-5 / MHID: 0-07-321114-1 (with Revised CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123828-1 / MHID: 0-07-123828-X [IE with CD-ROM and OLC]

Website: www.mhhe.com/hillier The 8th edition of Introduction to Operations Research remains the classic operations research text while incorporating a wealth of state-of-the-art, user-friendly software and more coverage of business applications than ever before. The hallmarks of this edition are: the solid, classic coverage that has continued through seven editions; top-notch, easy-to-use tutorial software; state-of-the-practice operations research software--especially as used in conjunction with examples from the text; and a variety of spreadsheet tools. This edition will also feature thorough coverage of practical applications of operations research. CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Overview of the Operations Research Modeling Approach Chapter 3: Introduction to Linear Programming Chapter 4: Solving Linear Programming Problems: The Simplex Method Chapter 5: The Theory of the Simplex Method Chapter 6: Duality Theory and Sensitivity Analysis Chapter 7: Other Algorithms for Linear Programming Chapter 8: The Transportation and Assignment Problems Chapter 9: Network Optimization Models Chapter 10: Dynamic Programming Chapter 11: Integer Programming Chapter 12: Nonlinear Programming Chapter 13: Metaheuristics Chapter 14: Game Theory Chapter 15: Decision Analysis Chapter 16: Markov Chains Chapter 17: Queueing Theory Chapter 18: Inventory Theory Chapter 19: Markov Decision Processes Chapter 20: Simulation / Appendixes / Supplements on the CD-ROM and the Online Learning Center / Additional Cases / Supplement to Appendix 3.1 More about LINGO / Supplement to Chapter 7 Linear Goal Programming and Its Solution Procedures / Supplement to Chapter 8 A Case Study with Many Transportation Problems / Supplement 1 to Chapter 18 Derivation of the Optimal Policy for the

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Operations in Global Business Strategy Chapter 3: Improving International Operations Performance Chapter 5: Exploring Global Product and Process Opportunities

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected]

Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg

66

Operations/Decision Sciences

Logistics & Supply Chain Management

(Professional References)

THE SUPPLY MANAGEMENT HANDBOOK 7th Edition

By Joseph Cavinato 2006 (June 2006) / 1000 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144513-9 / MHID: 0-07-144513-7

dation, and customization. The cost of warehousing should be commensurate with the contribution of warehousing to overall logistics performance--typically between 2% and 5% of corporate revenue. In world-class warehousing these costs are minimized while also improving customer service. The principles and systems described in this book are common denominators of world-class warehousing. The principles have been developed over a decade of logistics research, education and consulting project experience. World-Class Warehousing and Material Handling can be used to develop a warehouse master plan to support the corporation's overall logistics strategy.

A Professional Reference Title

Turn to the collective wisdom of the field's top experts to understand and solve even the most complex supply management issue. For more than three decades, The Supply Management Handbook (formerly The Purchasing Handbook) has been vital for purchasing and supply professionals in every field and industry. This latest edition comprehensively updates and revises this classic to encompass the ongoing shift from simple purchasing to a new, more technology-based imperative--identifying and managing supply chain sources and strategies. Addressing every essential issue from outsourcing to total cost of ownership to negotiations and contract management, an international team of supply management experts offers the authoritative, practical coverage you need to survive and thrive in today's ever-changing supply management environment. Topics include: What key organizations are doing now to develop and implement next-generation supply methodologies An organization's duty to and interaction with society, and insights for addressing the evolving concept of social responsibility in the supply arena A five-step best practices framework for implementing total cost of ownership in supply management Logistics considerations for the supply management professional Supply management in a risk-sensitive environment Sharpening your supply management skills Dramatic social and technological changes have brought new roles, responsibilities, and challenges to supply managers--along with exciting new opportunities. This definitive reference is the most trusted and efficient way to prosper in this ever-changing field.

Project Management

(Professional References)

PROJECT MANAGEMENT 5th Edition

By David Cleland, University of Pittsburgh and Lewis Ireland, President of the American Society 2007 (August 2006) / 688 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-147160-2 / MHID: 0-07-147160-X

A Professional Reference Title

Today's Most Effective Guide for Applying Project Management to Implement Organizational Strategies -- Now Updated and Expanded! Project Management: Strategic Design and Implementation delivers complete guidance on applying the theory, processes, practices, and techniques of project management to support strategic planning. Written by two world-renowned project management leaders, this new edition presents the latest methods for using flexible teams to implement organizational strategies -- especially changes to products, services, and processes. Designed for use in both large and small organizations, this updated classic ranges from the project management process...to project planning, monitoring, evaluation, and control...to continuous improvement through projects. This resource offers new material on project portfolio management, earned value, project management maturity, nontraditional teams, project partnering, project management outsourcing, and much more. The Fifth edition of Project Management: Strategic Design and Implementation features: Detailed coverage of all advances in project management theory and practice Helpful sections added to each chapter, including chapter summary, additional sources of information, discussion questions, project management principles, case study, assignment, and checklist

International Edition

WORLD-CLASS WAREHOUSING AND MATERIAL HANDLING

By Edward Frazelle, The Logistics Institute at Georgia Tech 2002 / 280 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-137600-6 / MHID: 0-07-137600-3 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122686-8 / MHID: 0-07-122686-9 [IE]

Updated examples and exercises on key project management topics A larger format with sidebars to highlight major issues This new material: chapters on "The Evolution of Project Management" and "Successful Project Teams" CONTENTS

PREFACE / ACKNOWLEDGMENTS / INTRODUCTION / Part 1: Introduction Chapter 1: The Evolution of Project Management Chapter 2: Why Project Management? Chapter 3: The Project Management Process Part 2: The Strategic Context of Projects Chapter 4: When to Use Project Management Chapter 5: The Strategic Context of Projects Chapter 6: The Board of Directors and Major Projects Chapter 7: Project Stakeholder Management Chapter 8: Strategic Issues in Project

A Professional Reference Title

Warehousing continues to play a critical role in assuring high levels of customer service and overall logistics performance. Efficient warehousing can minimize the effects of supply chain inefficiencies; can improve logistics accuracy and inventory management; and can allow for product accumulation, consoli-

67

Operations/Decision Sciences

Management Part 3: Organizational Design for Project Management Chapter 9: Organizing for Project Management Chapter 10: Project Portfolio Management Chapter 11: Project Authority Chapter 12: Project Management Maturity Part 4: Project Operations Chapter 13: Project Planning Chapter 14: Project Management Information System Chapter 15: Project Monitoring. Evaluation, and Control Chapter 16: The Project Earned Value Management System Chapter 17: Project Termination Part 5: Interpersonal Dynamics in the Management of Projects Chapter 18: Project Leadership Chapter 19: Project Communications Chapter 20: Successful Project Teams Part 6: The Cultural Elements Chapter 21: Continuous Improvement Through Projects Chapter 22: Cultural Considerations in Project Management Part 7: New Prospects Chapter 23: Alternative Project Teams / INDEX Part 4: Management of the Project-Oriented Company Chapter 18. Management of the Project-Oriented Company; Chapter 19. Project Portfolio Score Card Chapter 20. Partnering in Projects Chapter 21. Business Process Management in the Project-Oriented Company Part 5: National Project Management Chapter 22. Project Management in Austria: Analysis of the Maturity of Austria as a Project-Oriented Nation Chapter 23. A Brief Insight of Project Management in the Mainland of China Chapter 24. Project Management in Australia Chapter 25. Project Management in Romania Chapter 26. Japanese Project Management Practices on Global Projects

THE BUSINESS SAVVY PROJECT MANAGER GLOBAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT HANDBOOK Planning, Organizing and Controlling International Projects, 2nd Edition

By Gary R Heerkens, Management Solutions Group 2006 / 350 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144307-4 / MHID: 0-07-144307-X

A Professional Reference Title

To make the leap from average to superior, you must develop the skills to manage each project like a small business. The Business-Savvy Project Manager thoroughly explains key concepts, principles, and tools for project managers to provide organizations with superior return-oninvestment and top performance. From portfolio management and strategic alignment to calculation of economic metrics and effective use of both financial and nonfinancial criteria in project proposals, it gives you the business savvy for top-level performance and certain career success.

By David Cleland, University of Pittsburgh and Roland Gareis, Vienna University of Economics and Business Administration 2006 / 575 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146045-3 / MHID: 0-07-146045-4

A Professional Reference Title

Learn and apply successful international project management techniques. Contributors from 20+ nations reveal how current project management concepts and techniques can be successfully applied in different political, cultural, and geographical settings. Learn how project management is carried out in major countries such as Canada, China, Russia, Germany, France, England--and how these techniques can be applied globally. Case histories from around the world provide lessons on the international application of project management 16 completely new chapters including ones on the rebuilding of Iraq, project management in outsourcing initiatives, and developing multinational teams NEW TO THIS EDITION

Financial Planning for Large Multinational Projects Describes how project management is carried out in representative major countries of the world, including the United States, Canada, China, Singapore, Hong Kong, Australia, Romania, Japan, France, England, Austria, and Denmark Numerous International Models included Role of the World Bank in Financing International Projects

PROJECT PLANNING, SCHEDULING AND CONTROL 4th Edition

By James Lewis, The Lewis Institute, Inc 2006 / 550 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146037-8 / MHID: 0-07-146037-3

A Professional Reference Title

Project Planning, Scheduling, and Control has been the standard guidebook for project managers for more than 15 years. Addressing the key issues you face every day, Jim Lewis's benchmark book brings the subject alive with accessible, nontechnical questions, step-by-step guidelines, and real-world examples and applications. This revised, updated, and expanded fourth edition provides an applications-oriented understanding of the issues you must confront and important tips for passing the Project Management Professional (PMP®) exam.

CONTENTS

Part 1: State of the Art Global Project Management Chapter 1.The Evolution of Project Management Chapter 2. Project Management: A Business Process of the Project-Oriented Company Chapter 3. The Future of Project Management: Mapping the Dynamics of Project Management Field in Action Chapter 4. Total Life-Cycle System Management Chapter 5. Developing Multinational Project Teams Chapter 6. Risk Identification and Assessment for International Construction Projects Chapter 7. Program Management and Project Portfolio Management Part 2: Competency Factors in Project Management Chapter 8. Competencies of Project Managers Chapter 9. Managing Risks and Uncertainty in Major Projects in the New Global Environment Chapter 10. Managing Human Energy in the Project-Oriented Company Chapter 11. Managing Project Management Personnel and Their Competencies in the Project-Oriented Company Chapter 12. Lessons Learned: Rebuilding Iraq in 2004 Chapter 13. Project Critical Success Factors: The ProjectImplementation Profile Part 3: Management of Global Programs and Projects Chapter 14. Project Management for Outsourcing Decisions Chapter 15. Project Quality Management in International Projects Chapter 16. Success Factors in Virtual Global Software Projects Chapter 17. Managing Global Projects Over a Collaborative Knowledge Framework

COMPLIMENTARY COPIES

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog.

Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com

68

2007-2008 NEW Business Statistics Titles

Business Statistics ~ Contents

2007 New Titles

BOWERMAN Business Statistics in Practice, 4e ............................71

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297747-9 / MHID: 0-07-297747-7

Business Forecasting ....................................................... 75 Business Research Method ............................................. 76 Business Statistics - Supplements .................................... 74 Business Statistics - Textbook .......................................... 70 Linear Statistics / Regression ........................................... 77 Others ............................................................................ 78

DOANE Applied Statistics in Business and Economics with Student CD-ROM ............................................72

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321575-4 / MHID: 0-07-321575-9

ORRIS Basic Statistics Using Excel and MegaStat ...............72

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321158-9 / MHID: 0-07-321158-3

WILSON Business Forecasting, 5e ..........................................75

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320398-0 / MHID: 0-07-320398-X

2008 New Titles

BOWERMAN Essentials of Business Statistics, 2e ......................... 70

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297748-6 / MHID: 0-07-297748-5

LIND Basic Statistics Using Excel for use with Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e .......................................................74

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303026-5 / MHID: 0-07-303026-0

LIND Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e ....................................................... 70

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327296-2 / MHID: 0-07-327296-5

69

Business Statistics

Business Statistics - Textbook

NEW

ESSENTIALS OF BUSINESS STATISTICS 2nd Edition

NEW

STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 13th Edition

By Bruce Bowerman and Richard O'Connell of Miami University of Oh-Oxford, Burdeane Orris, Butler University 2008 (December 2006) / 640 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297748-6 / MHID: 0-07-297748-5

By Douglas Lind, Coasta Carolina University, William Marchal, University of Toledo and Samuel Wathen, Coastal Carolina University 2008 (October 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327296-2 / MHID: 0-07-327296-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128575-9 / MHID: 0-07-128575-X [IE with Student CD]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lind13e The new edition of Lind's Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics is a perennial market best seller due to its comprehensive coverage of statistical concepts and methods delivered in a student-friendly, step-by-step format. The text is non-threatening and presents concepts clearly and succinctly with a conversational writing style. All statistical concepts are illustrated with solved applied examples immediately upon introduction. Self reviews and exercises for each section, and review sections for groups of chapters also support the student learning steps. Modern computing applications (Excel, Minitab, and MegaStat) are introduced, but the text maintains a focus on presenting statistics concepts as applied in business as opposed to technology or programming methods. The thirteenth edition continues as a students' text with increased emphasis on interpretation of data and results. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Z Versus T: The division between the z and t distributions is based sigma known or unknown rather than on sample sizes Multiple Regression: Treatment now includes an investigation of the theory behind the linear model along with tests for the violation of each assumption. Robust Technology Package: Lind 13e features additional detail in the software sections, is available with Homework Manager/Homework Manager Plus, and is available as a Zinio eBook. Excel, MegaStat, and Minitab are integrated throughout the text, in enough detail to support students. The comprehensive, user-friendly Student CD includes MegaStat, Visual Statistics, ScreenCam tutorials and additional study resources.

The new edition of Essentials of Business Statistics delivers clear and understandable explanations of core business statistics concepts, making it ideal for a one term course in business statistics. Containing continuing case studies that emphasize the theme of business improvement, the text offers real applications of statistics that are relevant to today's business students. The authors motivate students by showing persuasively how the use of statistical techniques in support of business decision-making helps to improve business processes. A variety of computer centered examples and exercises, and a robust, technologybased ancillary package are designed to help students master this subject. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Business Improvement ­ `Business Improvement' theme, connecting statistical analysis and business decision making, is highlighted and called out with BI icons in the book. The Z vs T Decision--The Z versus T decision is governed by sigma known-unknown rather than by sample size. This is a reasonably significant change reflecting a new and widely accepted direction in this course area Hypothesis Testing ­ Hypothesis testing is approached using a new stepped method, which makes the material easier to learn. This new method received outstanding reviews.

CONTENTS

1. An Introduction to Business Statistics 2. Descriptive Statistics 3. Probability 4. Discrete Random Variables 5. Continuous Random Variables Distribution 6. Sampling Distributions 7. Confidence Intervals 8. Hypothesis Testing 9. Statistical Inferences Based on Two Samples 10. Experimental Design and Analysis of Variance 11. Chi Square Tests 12. Simple Linear Regression Analysis 13. Multiple Regression and ModelBuilding 14. Process Improvement Using Control Charts (On CD ROM) Appendix A. Statistical Tables Appendix B. Covariance and Correlation Appendix C (1) Counting RulesAppendix C (2) The Hypergeometric Appendix D The Normal Probability Plot Appendix E Two-Way Analysis of Variance (On CD-ROM)

CONTENTS

1 What Is Statistics? 2 Describing Data: Frequency Tables, Frequency Distributions, and Graphic Presentation 3 Describing Data: Numerical Measures 4 Describing Data: Displaying and Exploring Data 5 A Survey of Probability Concepts 6 Discrete Probability Distributions 7 Continuous Probability Distributions 8 Sampling Methods and the Central Limit Theorem 9 Estimation and Confidence Intervals 10 One-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 11 Two-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 12 Analysis of Variance 13 Linear Regression and Correlation 14 Multiple Regressions and Correlation Analysis 15 Index Numbers 16 Time Series and Forecasting 17 Nonparametric Methods: Chi-Square Applications 18 Nonparametric Methods: Analysis of Ranked Data 19 Statistical Process Control and Quality Management 20 An Introduction to Decision Theory : MegaStat for Excel / Visual Statistics 2.0 / Appendixes / Photo Credits / Index

70

Business Statistics

Thorough integration of Megastat: The Megastat Excel add-in package,

International Edition

NEW

BUSINESS STATISTICS IN PRACTICE 4th Edition

available on the CD of the previous edition of the book, has now been thoroughly integrated into the text. As the authors do with Excel and Minitab, instruction in the use of Megastat, complete with step-by-step screen captures, is offered at the conclusion of most every chapter of the book providing students with clearer direction. tutorials and exercises highlight real work applications and give students practice in gathering and using real data.

By Bruce L Bowerman and Richard T O'Connell of Miami University--Oxford 2007 (December 2005) / 912 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297747-9 / MHID: 0-07-297747-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325291-9 / MHID: 0-07-325291-3 (with CD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110837-9 / MHID: 0-07-110837-8 [IE with Student CD]

Internet

Consistent theme of business improvement through statistical analysis. Since this is the ultimate goal for statistical analysis in business (to improve business processes), this is B & O's motto in the book. This theme is the foundations for the many case studies and examples found in the text. Unique

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bowerman4e The new edition of Business Statistics in Practice delivers clear and understandable explanations of business statistics concepts through the use of continuing case studies and an emphasis on business improvement. The cases and examples show real applications of statistics relevant to today's business students. The authors motivate students by showing persuasively how the use of statistical techniques in support of business decision-making helps to improve business processes. A variety of computer centered examples and exercises, and a robust, technologybased ancillary package are designed to help students master this subject. Acknowledging the importance of spreadsheets and statistical software in their statistical instruction, the authors continue to integrate Excel and Minitab output throughout the text. In addition, a new enhanced version of MegaStat, an Excel add-in program designed to optimize Excel for statistical application, is available free on the Student CD. For students and instructors who want to explore statistical concepts from a graphical perspective, Visual Statistics is again available on the Student CD. New Business Improvement icons are integrated throughout the text to illustrate the `BI' theme. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Several new continuing case examples, with new data sets, have been added to the Fourth Edition. Where an example of a statistical technique is applied to reach a business solution, such instances are highlighted by an icon. Certain

use of case studies that integrates different statistical areas. Many of BOH's unique case studies span not only within chapters, but also groups of chapters. This leads to additional student relevance, as they become familiar with the real decisions businesses face. 1 and continues throughout the book. The practical, continuing case studies that permeate the book are consistently used to highlight this reality.

real emphasis on the importance of variation. This starts in Chapter A

Utilization of a flexible topic flow that facilitates different topic choices and encourages different teaching approaches. Modern

use of the latest versions of Minitab, Excel.

CONTENTS

1. An Introduction to Business Statistics 2. Descriptive Statistics 3. Probability 4. Discrete Random Variables 5. Continuous Random Variables 6. Sampling Distributions 7. Confidence Intervals 8. Hypothesis Testing 9. Statistical Inferences Based on Two Samples 10. Experimental Design and Analysis of Variance 11. Simple Linear Regression Analysis 12. Multiple Regression and Model Building 13. Time Series Forecasting 14. Process Improvement Using Control Charts 15. Nonparametric Methods 16. Chi-Square Tests 17. Decision Theory / Appendix A: Statistical Tables Appendix B: Covariance Between Two Variables Appendix C: · Part I: Counting Rules · Part II Hypergeometric Distribution Appendix D: Normal Plots On CDROM: Appendix E: · Part I: Properties of the Mean and the Variance of a Random Variable, and the Covariance Between Two Random Variables · Part II: Derivations of the Mean and the Variance of the Sample Mean and of the Mean and the Variance of the Sample Proportion Appendix F: · Part I: Stratified Sampling · Part II: Cluster Sampling and Ratios Estimation

chapters and sections have been abbreviated and generally tightened up, delivering a more concise, digestable presentation to students. greater number of basic exercises have been added, at the request of reviewers and users.

A

Output and instruction for SPSS has been selectively incorporated into the Fourth Edition, alongside Excel, Minitab, and Megastat. Techiques in Hypothesis Testing have been re-cast in "steps" for greater student accessibility. Chapters

on Simple and Multiple Regression have been revised for a clearer and more concise presentation.

FEATURES

Latest

version of Megastat Excel-add-in package: The coverage and capabilities of the Megastat add-in package, included on the CD ROM that accompanies the book, have been greatly expanded to enhance calculation capabilities. Among the topics now handled by Megastat are: (for descriptive statistics): stem-and-leaf; dot plot; auto histograms; (for hypothesis testing) empirical idea for tolerance intervals, group comparison for unequal variance; comparison of means with unequal variances; test of equal variances; (for ANOVA): Factorial ANOVA; simultaneous inference; one-way design for ANOVA; (for Regression) residual plots; normal plots; outlying influence and observation diagnostics; variance inflation factors; model-building: all possible regressions; step-wise selection; (for NonParametrics) sign test; (for Time Series) decomposition method.

COMPLIMENTARY COPIES

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog.

Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com

71

Business Statistics

International Edition

NEW

International Edition

NEW

APPLIED STATISTICS IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS WITH ST CD-ROM

BASIC STATISTICS USING EXCEL AND MEGASTAT

By J Burdeane Orris, Butler University 2007 (March 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321158-9 / MHID: 0-07-321158-3 (with CD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125431-1 / MHID: 0-07-125431-5 [IE with Student CD]

By David P Doane, Oakland University and Lori E Seward, Leeds College of Business 2007 (January 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321575- 4 / MHID: 0-07-321575-9 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110814- 6 / MHID: 0-07-110814-9 [IE with Student CD] ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321498-0 / MHID: 0-07-321498-1 (Instructor's Edition with CD-ROM)

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/orris1e This new text offers an Excel-focused approach to using statistics in business. All statistical concepts are illustrated with applied examples immediately upon introduction. Modern computing tools and applications are introduced, and the text maintains a strong focus on presenting statistical concepts as applied using Excel, enhanced by MegaStat, the Excel add-in created by the author and used as a standard for all McGraw-Hill/Irwin Business Statistics textbooks. The text enables students to take full advantage of Excel to develop and drive problem-solving skills. As a one-color paperback, it is also a competitive low-cost alternative to most of the higher-priced books in the market. FEATURES

· Concise but complete text with coverage appropriate for one-semester and most two-semester courses. The book is relatively short, but not "easy." It covers the "real thing" but avoids getting overly theoretical or mathematical. · Modern in that it avoids computational calculator equations and emphasizes computer use. It is the author's belief that Excel is a wonderful learning tool as a super-calculator. The book includes the Excel add-in MegaStat, but is not a book about MegaStat. The focus is always on learning statistics--MegaStat is one tool students can use to do so. · Learning Activities that guide learning and encourage experimentation are interspersed throughout the text. Most of the Learning Activities work through computations and concepts manually and then verify with MegaStat. · Chapter "Modules," which contain practical material that supports the concepts introduced in the main text of the chapter, are placed at the end of chapter so that instructors can easily skip or include the material at their own discretion. · Text references to animated, narrated Tutorials housed on the Student CD, which will help the student understand a particular tool or topic better. These include two Excel "primer" tutorials and MegaStat setup and introduction tutorials, as well as 14 tutorials on various statistical subjects. · End-of-Chapter problems presented in a table that lists the chapter's Exercises, which are contained on a Excel spreadsheet on the Student CD. The book has approximately 150 Exercises including more than 350 individual problems.

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/doane1e This new text offers an Excel focused approach to using statistics in business. All statistical concepts are illustrated with applied examples immediately upon introduction. Modern computing tools and applications are introduced, and the text maintains a strong focus on presenting statistical concepts as applied in business--as opposed to providing programming methods used to find a mathematical solution. Interpretation is heavily emphasized, enabling students to take full advantage of Excel to develop and drive problem-solving skills. FEATURES

Applied Statistics in Business and Economics covers all the basic topics in the standard Business Statistics course, both undergraduate and MBA, using real and realistic data sets and modern technology. Visual Statistics, Learning Stats, and MegaStat are integrated within the text and included in the package. Examples, case studies, and problems are almost completely from published research or real applications. Two key example data sets are a health care management data and a midwest bank collection on Automated teller machines. Exercises are placed at the ends of chapters-keeping the chapter text `clean and concise'. There are plenty of examples within the chapters, and virtually all of those are available in a technology form on CD. The exercises do often include `encouragement' of experimentation and alternative analysis. Though approx 800 pages in length- the text is concise in it's treatment. Much of the length is due to the heavy use of graphics and illustrative material. The text is also decidedly non-mathematical- in both `look and feel' and in substance. All but the simplest proofs and deriviations are eliminated. The text integrates many real world data sets, including two large sets featuring health care management and banking/financial data. The treatment of confidence intervals and inference emphasizes proportions because they are more important in business applications. The text also thoroughly integrates p-value interpretations of all tests. Hypothesis Testing chapters and all examples are presented following a consistent five step format

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Introduction. Chapter 2 Descriptive Statistics. Chapter 3 Frequency Distributions. Chapter 4 Probability Concepts. Chapter 5 Discrete Probability Distributions. Chapter 6 Normal Distribution. Chapter 7 Sampling and Sampling Distributions. Chapter 8 Confidence Intervals. Chapter 9 Hypothesis Testing Concepts. Chapter 10 Hypothesis Testing Applications. Chapter 11 Analysis of Variance. Chapter 12 Linear Regression Analysis. Chapter 13 Multiple Regression. Chapter 14 Chi-Square Applications. Chapter 15 Time-Series Analysis. Chapter 16 Summary and Integration. Appendix A: Excel Statistical Functions. Appendix B: Hypothesis Test Summaries. Appendix C: Glossary and Key Equations. Appendix D: Tables. Appendix E: Tutorial List

CONTENTS

Chapter One: Overview of Statistics Chapter Two: Data Collection Chapter Three: Describing Data Visually Chapter Four: Descriptive Statistics Chapter Five: Probability Chapter Six: Discrete Distributions Chapter Seven: Continuous Distributions Chapter Eight: Sampling Distributions and Estimation Chapter Nine: Hypothesis Testing: One Sample Chapter Ten: Hypothesis Testing: Two Sample Tests Chapter Eleven: Analysis of Variance Chapter Twelve: Bivariate Regression Chapter Thirteen: Multiple Regression Chapter Fourteen: Time Series Analysis Chapter Fifteen: Chi-Square Tests Chapter Sixteen: Nonparametric Tests Chapter Seventeen: Quality Management

72

Business Statistics

International Edition

COMPLETE BUSINESS STATISTICS 6th Edition

Correlation Analysis 15 Chi-Square Applications Appendixes Answers to Odd-Numbered Chapter Exercises

By Amir Aczel, Bentley College and Jayavel Sounderpandian 2006 / 800 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286882-1 / MHID: 0-07-286882-1 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312698-2 / MHID: 0-07-312698-5 (with Student CD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124416-9 / MHID: 0-07-124416-6 [IE with Student CD]

BUSINESS STATISTICS 2nd Edition

By G C Beri, Professor of University of Baroda 2005 (July 2005) / 692 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-059946-8 / MHID: 0-07-059946-7

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/aczel6e Statistical integrity with a complete Excel solution, this new edition of Complete Business Statistics offers revised sections on regression analysis and updated cases highlighting companies across the globe. CONTENTS

Working with Templates / 1. Introduction and Descriptive Statistics 2. Probability 3 Random Variables 4. The Normal Distribution 5. Sampling and Sampling Distributions 6. Confidence Intervals 7. Hypothesis Testing 8. The Comparison of Two Populations 9 Analysis of Variance 10. Simple Linear Regression and Correlation 11. Multiple Regression and Correlation 12. Time Series, Forecasting, and Index Numbers 13. Quality Control and Improvement 14. Nonparametric Methods and Chi-Square Test 15. Bayesian Statistics and Decision Analysis /Appendices A: References B: Answers to Most Odd-Numbered Problems C: Statistical Tables / On the CD 16. Sampling Methods / 17. Multivariate Analysis

Tata McGraw-Hill Title

The author has given lucid exposition of the statistical methods with illustrations. There are few books even today which cover the subject in such a detailed vigorous manner. The design of the book, viz., the easy-to-follow presentation, chapter prerequisites, chapter objectives, glossary, list of formulae will be very much useful to the management students and also make the book reader friendly. CONTENTS

1. Introduction 2. Classification of Data 3. Graphic Presentation of Data 4. Diagrammatic Presentation of Data 5. Measures of Central Tendency 6. Measures of Dispersion 7. Skewness, Moments and Kurtosis 8. Probability 9. Probability Distributions 10. Sampling and Sampling Distributions 11. Estimation 12. Testing Hypotheses 13. Chi-Square Distribution 14. Analysis of Variance 15. Regression Analysis 16. Correlation 17. Multiple Regression and Correlation Analysis 18. Time Series Analysis and Forecasting 19. Non-Parametric Tests 20. Index Numbers 21. Decision Theory 22. Quality Control

International Edition

BASIC STATISTICS FOR BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 5th Edition

International Edition

PRACTICAL BUSINESS STATISTICS 5th Edition

By Douglas Lind, Coastal Carolina University, William G Marchal of University of Toledo and Robert D Mason, Coastal Carolina University 2006 / 576 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312165-9 / MHID: 0-07-312165-7 (with Student CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124461-9 / MHID: 0-07-124461-1 [IE with Student CD]

By Andrew F Siegel, University of Washington 2003 / 180 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282125-3 / MHID: 0-07-282125-6 (with Student CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121338-7 / MHID: 0-07-121338-4 [IE with CD-ROM]

Website: http:www/mhhe.com/lindbasics5e Lind/Marchal/Wathen: Basic Statistics for Business and Economics 5e is a derivative of the best-selling STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS, 12/e offering the essential topics of statistical tools and methods delivered in a student friendly, step-by-step format. The text presents concepts clearly and succinctly with a conversational writing style. All statistical concepts are illustrated with solved applied examples immediately upon introduction. Modern computing tools and applications are introduced, though the text maintains a focus on presenting statistics content as opposed to technology or programming methods, and the fifth edition continues as a `students' text with increased emphasis on interpretation of data and results. CONTENTS

Brief Contents 1 What Is Statistics? 2 Describing Data: Frequency Distributions and Graphic Presentation 3 Describing Data: Numerical Measures 4 Describing Data: Displaying and Exploring Data 5 A Survey of Probability Concepts 6 Discrete Probability Distributions 7 Continuous Probability Distributions 8 Sampling Methods and the Central Limit Theorem 9 Estimation and Confidence Intervals 10 One-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 11 Two-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 12 Analysis of Variance 13 Linear Regression and Correlation 14 Multiple Regression and

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/siegel5e CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction: Defining the Role of Statistics in Business 1. Introduction: Defining the Role of Statistics in Business 2. Data Structures: Classifying the Various Types of Data Sets 3. Histograms: Looking at the Distribution of Data 4. Landmark Summaries: Interpreting Typical Values and Percentiles 5. Variability: Dealing with Diversity Part 2: Probability 6. Probability: Understanding Random Situations 7. Random Variables: Working with Uncertain Numbers Part 3: Statistical Inference 8. Random Sampling 9. Confidence Intervals: Admitting that estimates are not exact 10. Hypothesis Testing: Deciding between reality and confidence Part 4: Regression and Time Series 11. Correaltion and Regression: Measuring and predicting relationships 12. Multiple Regression: Predicting oen factor from several others 13. Report Writing: Communicating the results of a multiple regression 14. Time Series: Understanding Changes over time Part 5: Methods and Applications 15. Anova: Testing for Differneces among many samples, and much more. 16. Nonparametrics: Testing with Ordinal Data or Nonnormal Distributions 17. Chi-Squared Analysis: Testing for Patterns in Qualitive Data 18. Quality Control: Recognizing and Managing Variation / Appendix A: Employee Database Appendix B: Donations Database Appendix C: Self-Test: Solutions to selected problem and database exercises Appendix D: Statistical Tables Appendix E: Statpad Quick Reference Guide

73

Business Statistics

International Edition

STATISTICS A First Course, 6th Edition SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING STATISTICS 2nd Edition

By Larry J. Stephens, University of Nebraska, Omaha 2006 / 416 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145932-7 / MHID: 0-07-145932-4

By Donald Sanders, Education Consultant and Robert Smidt, California Polytechnic State University - San Luis Obispo 2000 / 704 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-233217- 9 / MHID: 0-07-233217-4 (with CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116984-4 / MHID: 0-07-116984-9 [IE with CD-ROM]

A Schaum Professional Reference Title

This study tool is ideal if you wish to master the basics for an introductory course or solo study. This new edition includes output from Excel, SAS, SPSS, STATISTIX, and MINITAB, all of which are now in general use for college courses on statistics at this level. It will also include up-to-date statistical examples taken from the latest media sources.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Let's Get Started Chapter 2: Thinking Critically about Data: Liars, Liars, and a Few Statisticians Chapter 3: Descriptive Statistics Chapter 4: Probability Concepts Chapter 5: Probability Distributions Chapter 6: Sampling Concepts Chapter 7: Estimating Parameters Chapter 8: Testing Hypotheses: One Sample Procedures Chapter 9: Inference: Two-Sample Procedures Chapter 10: Analysis of Variance Chapter 11: Chi-Square Tests: Goodness-of-Fit and Contingency Table Methods Chapter 12: Linear Regression and Correlation Chapter 13: Non parametric Statistical Methods Appendices 1: Selected Values of the Binomial Probability Distribution 2: Areas under the Standard Normal Probability Distribution 3: A Brief Table of Random Numbers Distribution 4: Areas for t Distributions Distribution 5: Distribution Tables Distribution 6: Chi-Square Distribution Distribution 7: Critical Values of a=.05 and a=.01 in the Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test Distribution 8: Distribution of U in the Mann-Whitney Test Distribution 9: Critical Values for r in the Runs Test for Randomness Distribution 10: Selected Values of the Poisson Probability Distribution Distribution 11: Entering and Editing Data in Minitab Distribution 12: Answers to Odd-Numbered Exercises

International Edition

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF BUSINESS STATISTICS 4th Edition

By Leonard J. Kazmier, Arizona State University 2004 / 432 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-141080-9 / MHID: 0-07-141080-5 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123679-9 / MHID: 0-07-123679-1 [IE]

A Schaum Professional Reference Title

Conforming to the current business statistics curriculum, this fourth edition of Schaums Outline of Business Statistics reflects recent changes in the course as well as in general practice, including new sections in each chapter on the application of Excel--the most used program in offices throughout the world--making this the first book to address this change in the curriculum. The fourth edition continues to provide a direct and effective tool for learning the fundamentals of business statistics without the technical verbiage.

Business Statistics Supplements

NEW

BASIC STATISTICS USING EXCEL FOR USE WITH STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 13th Edition

By Douglas Lind, Coasta Carolina University, William Marchal, University of Toledo and Robert Mason 2008 (October 2006) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303026-5 / MHID: 0-07-303026-0

SCHAUM'S EASY OUTLINE OF BUSINESS STATISTICS

By Leonard J. Kazmier, Arizona State University 2003 / 160 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-139876-3 / MHID: 0-07-139876-7

A Schaum Professional Reference Title

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Analyzing Business Data / Chapter 2: Statistical Presentations and Graphical Analysis / Chapter 3: Describing Business Data: Measures of Location / Chapter 4: Describing Business Data: Measures of Variability / Chapter 5: Probability / Chapter 6: Probability / Distributions for Discrete Random Variables / Chapter 7: Probability Distributions for Continuous Random Variables / Chapter 8: Sampling Distributions and Confidence Intervals for the Mean / Chapter 9: Other Confidence Intervals / Chapter 10: Testing Hypotheses Concerning the Value of the Population Mean / Chapter 11: Testing Other Hypotheses / Chapter 12: The Chi-Square Test / Chapter 13: Analysis of Variance / Chapter 14: Linear Regression and Correlation Analysis / Chapter 15: Multiple Regression and Correlation / Chapter 16: Time Series Analysis and Business Forecasting / Chapter 17: Index Numbers for Business and Economic Data / Chapter 18: Decision Analysis: Payoff Tables And Decision Trees / Chapter 19: Decision Analysis: The Use of the Sample Information / Chapter 20: Statistical Process Control / Chapter 21: Nonparametric Statistics / Appendices

(Details unavailable at press time)

74

Business Statistics

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF STATISTICS AND ECONOMETRICS 2nd Edition

By Dominick Salvatore and Derrick Reagle of Fordham University 2002 / 256 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-134852-2 / MHID: 0-07-134852-2

A Schaum Professional Reference Title

CONTENTS

Introduction. / Descriptive Statistics. / Probability and Probability Distributions. / Statistics Inference: Estimation. / Statistical Inference: Testing Hypothesis. / Statistics Examination. / Simple Regression Analysis. / Multiple Regression Analysis. / Problems in Regression Analysis. / Further Techniques and Applications in Regression Analysis. / SimultaneousEquations Methods. / Time Series Econometrics. / Statistics Examination. / Bionomial Distribution. / Poisson Distribution. / Standard Normal Distribution. / Table of Random Numbers. / Student t Distribution. / Chi-Square Distribution. / F Distribution. / Durbin-Watson Statistics. / Critical Values of Runs in the Run Tests.

theory and math are held to a minimum. This edition focuses on the most proven, acceptable methods used commonly in business and government such as regression, smoothing, decomposition, and Box-Jenkins. This new edition continues to integrate the most comprehensive software tool available in this market, Forecast X. With the addition of ForeCastX, this text provides the most complete and up-to-date coverage of forecasting concepts with the most technologically sophisticated software package on the market. This Excel-based tool (which received a 4 point out 5 rating from PC Magazine, Oct. 2, 2000 issue) effectively uses wizards and many tools to make forecasting easy and understandable. NEW TO THIS EDITION

Point-of-Sale (POS) Data featured: With new POS data, readers will be learning about an important issue to many businesses attempting to improve their long and short term planning. Supply Chain Issues discussed: The coverage of forecasting as it relates to supply chain issues has been increased to cover cutting-edge companies, such as Wal-Mart, and how they are establishing strong supply chain relationships and operations. New and Updated Data Mining coverage: Data Mining is shown to help deliver more accurate forecasts, resulting in better operations and marketing processes and practices. Updated Version of Forecast X Software: Developed by John Galt Solutions, Inc. for professional applications, FORECAST X has been updated with the new edition. This software adds a level of realism to the course and students appreciate having to learn software that is actually used in the business community.

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS 2nd Edition

By Murray R. Spiegel (Deceased), John J Schiller and R Alu Srinivasan 2000 / 408 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-135004-4 / MHID: 0-07-135004-7

A Schaum Professional Reference Title

CONTENTS

Part I: Probability. / Chapter 1: Basic Probability. / Chapter 2: Random Variables and Probability Distributions. / Chapter 3: Mathematical Expectation. / Chapter 4: Special Probability Distributions. / Part II: Statistics. / Chapter 5: Sampling Theory. / Chapter 6: Estimation Theory. / Chapter 7: Tests of Hypotheses and Significance. / Chapter 8: Curve Fitting, Regression, and Correlation. / Chapter 9: Analysis of Variance. / Chapter 10: Nonparametric Tests. / Appendices. / Index. / Index for Solved Problems.

FEATURES

Real-World Data used: This text consists almost entirely of real-world examples, showing readers how to deal with real-life problems and difficulties in a realistic environment. Extended Examples used in each chapter: Two examples are used demonstrate the progression of techniques needed to solve each issue, these examples provide a realistic illustration of the concepts that are relevant to the student used in the text. One example is sales data from The Gap, while the other example uses domestic car sales data. Excel Data is presented: Excel is the leading calculation software used in business, and by consistently providing all the data in Excel, students recognize how easy it is to use with FORECAST X software. Screenshots of problems help students better conceptualize the problems: The edition includes many screenshots of actual problems; the data for each of these examples and problems is included on the accompanying CD.

Business Forecasting

International Edition

NEW

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Introduction to Business Forecasting. Chapter 2 The Forecast Process, Data Considerations, and Model Selection. Chapter 3 Moving Averages and Exponential Smoothing. Chapter 4 Introduction to Forecasting with Regression Methods. Chapter 5 Forecasting with Multiple Regressions. Chapter 6 Times-Series Decomposition. Chapter 7 ARIMA (Box-Jenkins) ­ Type Forecasting Models. Chapter 8 Combining Forecast Results. Chapter 9 Forecast Implications

BUSINESS FORECASTING 5th Edition

By J Holton Wilson, Central Michigan University, Barry Keating, University of Notre Dame and John Galt Solutions Inc 2007 (December 2005) / 416 pages Jan 2005 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320398-0 / MHID: 0-07-320398-X (with Forecast X Software and Student CD-ROM) Oct 2005 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297967-1 / MHID: 0-07-297967-4 (Text only) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124494-7 / MHID: 0-07-124494-8 [IE ­ Text only]

The Fifth Edition of Business Forecasting is the most practical forecasting book on the market with the most powerful software--Forecast X. This new edition presents a broad-based survey of business forecasting methods including subjective and objective approaches. As always, the author team of Wilson and Keating deliver practical how-to forecasting techniques, while

75

Business Statistics

International Edition

FORECASTING, PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATION

By Stephen Delurgio, University of Missouri - Kansas City 1998 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-561120-2 / MHID: 0-07-561120-1 (with Disk)-Out of Print ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115998-2 / MHID: 0-07-115998-3 [IE]

Business Research Method

International Edition

BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS 9th Edition

CONTENTS

Part I Foundations of Forecasting Chapter 1 Planning and Forecasting Chapter 2 Statistical Fundamentals for Forecasting Appendix A Expected Values Appendix B Statistics for White noise Chapter 3 Introduction to Regression Analysis Supplement Cross Correlation Functions Part II Univariate Methods Chapter 4 Simple Exponential Smoothing Chapter 5 Decomposition and Census II Methods Chapter 6 Trend-Seasonal Smoothing Supplement Fourier Series Analysis Part III Univariate ARIMA Methods Chapter 7 ARIMA Introduction Appendix A Useful Statistical Definitions Appendix B White noise and Stationarity Appendix C Theoretical ACF's for an ARIMA (1,1,0) Process Appendix D Theoretical ACF's for an ARIMA (0,0,1) Process Appendix E Checking Bounds of Invertibility and Stationarity Appendix F Example ARIMA data sets Appendix G Partial Autocorrelations and the Yule-Walker Equations Chapter 8 ARIMA Applications Chapter 9 ARIMA Forecast Profiles Part IV Multivariate/Causal Methods Chapter 10 Multiple Regression of Time Series Appendix Deriving Normal Equations Chapter 11 Econometric Methods Chapter 12 ARIMA Intervention Analysis Chapter 13 Multivariate ARIMA - Transfer Functions Appendix Estimating Impulse Response Weights Part V Cyclical, Qualitative, and Artificial Intelligence Methods Chapter 14 Cyclical Forecasting Methods Chapter 14A Supplement-Some general Theories explaining Cycles Chapter 15 Qualitative and Technological Forecasting Methods Chapter 16 Expert Systems, Neural Networks, and Genetic Algorithms Part VI Combining, Validation, and Managerial Issues Chapter 17 Combining, Control, and validation Methods Chapter 18 Method Characteristics, Accuracy, and Data Sources Appendices: A Forecasting Data Sources B Outlier Detection and Adjustment Procedures

By Donald Cooper, Florida Atlantic University - Boca Rator and Pamela Schindler, Wittenberg University 2006 / 864 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297923-7 / MHID: 0-07-297923-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321487-0 / MHID: 0-07-321487-6 (with CD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124430-5 / MHID: 0-07-124430-1 [IE with CD]

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cooper9e Cooper and Schindler's Business Research Methods offers students and instructors thorough coverage of business research topics backed by solid theory. The authors are successful marketing research consultants and that is evident in the rich and realistic case studies found in the text. Managerial decision making is the underlying theme, topics and applications are presented and organized in a manner that allow students to thoroughly understand business research topics and functions. Consequently, the structure of the text encourages and supports completion of an in-depth business research project during the semester. CONTENTS

Part I Introduction to Business Research 1 Research in Business 2 Thinking Like a Researcher 3 The Research Process 4 Business Research Requests and Proposals Appendix 4a: Covering Kids RFP 5 Ethics in Business Research Part II The Design of Research 6 Research Design: An Overview 7 Secondary Data Searches 8 Qualitative Research 9 Observation Studies 10 Surveys 11 Experiments and Test Markets Appendix 11a: Complex Experimental Designs Part III The Sources and Collection of Data 12 Measurement 13 Measurement Scales 14 Questionnaires and Instruments Appendix 14a: Crafting Effective Measurement Questions Appendix 14b: Pretesting Options and Discoveries 15 Sampling Concepts Appendix 15a: Determining Sample Size Part IV Analysis and Presentation of Data 16 Data Preparation and Analysis Appendix 16a: Describing Data Statistically 17 Exploring, Displaying, and Examining Data 18 Hypothesis Testing 19 Measures of Association 20 Multivariate Analysis: An Overview 21 Presenting Insights and Findings: Written and Oral Reports / case abstracts / appendices A Focus Group Discussion Guide B Nonparametric Significance Tests C Selected Statistical Tables / References and Readings / Glossary / Photo Credits / Index

International Edition

DECISION MAKING AND FORECASTING

By Kneale Marshall, U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, and Robert Oliver, University of California-Berkeley 1995 / 384 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048027-8 / MHID: 0-07-048027-3 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113970-0 / MHID: 0-07-113970-2 [IE]

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected]

Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg

76

Business Statistics

BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS

By Boris Blumberg, University of Maastricht, Donald Cooper and Pamela Schindler 2005 / 650 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710742-0 / MHID: 0-07-710742-X

International Edition

BUSINESS INFORMATION Finding and Using Data in the Digital Age

McGraw-Hill UK Title

Business Research Methods, European edition is a rigorous, up-to-date and engaging text that introduces students to the concepts, processes and practices of good business research. Designed to lead readers through the entire research process from start to finish, the text is divided into three parts:

By Jay Zagorsky 2003 / 288 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250770-6 / MHID: 0-07-250770-5 (Out of Print) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119959-9 / MHID: 0-07-119959-4 [IE]

CONTENTS

Chapter 1. Introduction Chapter 2. Information Basics Chapter 3. Quick Information Statistical Compendia Chapter 4. Demographic Information Chapter 5. Income Chapter 6. Consumer Spending Chapter 7. People Details Chapter 8. Industry Information Chapter 9. Company Information Chapter 10. Prices Chapter 11. Human Resources Chapter 12. Labor Market Information Chapter 13. Tax Information Chapter 14. Information on the Economy Chapter 15. Exporting and Importing Chapter 16. Conclusion Appendix 1:What Is An Index Appendix 2:Census and Survey Details Appendix 3:Answers to Practice Questions

Essentials of Research: this section introduces students to the whys of research, outlines the process and the proposal stage, and finally explores the ethics involved with all research undertakings.

Research

Set-Up: now readers are familiar with the research process, this section introduces the different types of research. Beginning with a chapter on qualitative and quantitative research, this part also features chapters on sampling strategies, interviews, surveys, observational research, ethnography and ends with a chapter on experiments.

Conducting the Research: this third section illustrates how best to conduct research, exploring the theory and practice of secondary data, measurements, field work and questionnaires. The text ends with a chapter that explains how best to write and present your research once it is complete, an essential skill for any good researcher!

Linear Statistics / Regression

International Edition

APPLIED LINEAR STATISTICAL MODELS 5th Edition

A fourth part of the book is made available to readers on a CDROM that comes free with every copy of Business Research Methods, which covers the Statistical Background of research. Designed to be used easily in conjunction with the text by those that need a more statistical perspective on research, the CD includes chapters on exploring, displaying and examining data, testing hypothesis, measuring association and an overview on multivariate analysis. Providing integrated coverage of advanced statistical methods, techniques and analysis, these chapters provide the perfect add-on for those that need it. Indexed and page numbered, it can be used easily in conjunction with the rest of the text. CONTENTS

Part I Essentials of Research Ch. 1 The nature of business and management research Ch. 2 Research process and proposal Ch. 3 Research Ethics Part II Research Approaches Ch. 4 Quantitative and qualitative research Ch. 5 Literature review Ch. 6 Sampling strategies: From one case to the whole population Ch. 7Survey Research Ch. 8 Observational, action and ethnographic research Ch. 9 Experiments Part III Conducting the Research Ch. 10 Secondary data, archival sources and content analysis Ch. 11 Measurements and scales Ch. 12 Field work: Questionnaire and responses Ch. 13 Writing and presenting research outcomes Part IV Statistical background (on CD-Rom) Ch. 14 Data preparation and description Ch. 15 Exploring, displaying and examining data Ch. 16 Hypothesis testing Ch. 17 Measure of association Ch. 18 Multivariate analysis: an overview

By Michael H Kutner, Emory University, Chris J Nachtsheim, University of Minnesota, John Neter, University of Georgia and William Li, University of Minnesota 2005 / 1344 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310874-2 / 0-07-310874-X (with Student CD) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112221-4 / MHID: 0-07-112221-4 [IE with Student CD]

Applied Linear Statistical Models 5e is the long established leading authoritative text and reference on statistical modeling, analysis of variance, and the design of experiments. For students in most any discipline where statistical analysis or interpretation is used, ALSM serves as the standard work. The text proceeds through linear and nonlinear regression and modeling for the first half, and through ANOVA and Experimental Design in the second half. All topics are presented in a precise and clear style supported with solved examples, numbered formulae, graphic illustrations, and "Comments" to provide depth and statistical accuracy and precision. Applications used within the text and the hallmark problems, exercises, and projects and case studies are drawn from virtually all disciplines and fields providing motivation for students in virtually any college. The Fifth edition provides an increased use of computing and graphical analysis throughout, without sacrificing concepts or rigor. In general, the 5e uses larger data sets in examples and exercises, and the use of automated software without loss of understanding. CONTENTS

Part1: Simple Linear Regression 1: Linear Regression with One Predictor Variable 2: Inferences in Regression and Correlation Analysis 3: Diagnostics and Remedial Measures 4: Simultaneous Inferences and Other Topics in Regression Analysis 5: Matrix Approach to Simple Linear Regression Analysis Part 2: Multiple Linear Regression 6: Multiple Regression I 7: Multiple Regression II 8: Building the Regression Model I: Models for Quantitative and Qualitative Predictors 9: Building the Regression Model II: Model Selection and Validation 10: Building the Regression Model III: Diagnostics 11: Remedial Measures and Alterna-

77

Business Statistics

tive Regression Techniques 12: Auto-correlation in Time Series Data Part 3: Nonlinear Regression 13: Introduction to Nonlinear Regression and Neural Networks 14: Logistic Regression, Poisson Regression, and Generalized Linear Models Part 4: Single Factor Studies 15: Introduction to Analysis of Variance and the Design of Experiments 16: Single-Factor ANOVA: Model and Tests 17: Analysis of Factor Level Effects in Single Factor Studies 18: ANOVA Diagnostics and Remedial Measures Part 5: Multifactor Studies and Blocking 19: Two-Factor Studies--Equal Sample Sizes 20: Two-Factor Studies--One Case per Cell 21: Randomized Complete Block Designs 22: Analysis of Covariance 23: Two -Factor Studies--Unequal Sample Sizes 24: Multifactor ANOVA Model and Tests 25: Random and Mixed-Effects Models Part 6: Special-Purpose Experimental Designs 26: Nested Designs, Subsampling, and Partially Nested Designs 27: Repeated Measures and Related Designs 28: Latin Square, Balanced Incomplete Block, and Related Designs 29: Exploratory Experiments-Two-Level Factorial and Fractional Factorial Designs 30: Response Surface Experiments

Others

HOW TO PREPARE FOR DATA INTERPRETATION 2nd Edition

By Arun Sharma 2005 / 356 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-060057-7 / MHID: 0-07-060057-0

Tata McGraw-Hill Title

FEATURES

New section on Logical Reasoning Nearly 250 new practice questions in the Logical Reasoning section in varying levels of difficulty Nearly 1900 questions (including 650 new questions) in the Data Interpretation section

International Edition

APPLIED LINEAR REGRESSION MODELS 4th Edition

Explanatory notes to difficult questions

CONTENTS

Part 1: Basic Modes of Data Interpretation. Chapter 1: Data Interpretation: An Overview. Chapter 2: Tables. Chapter 3: Bar Charts. Chapter 4: X-Y Charts (Also known as line graphs). Chapter 5: Pie Charts. Chapter 6: Cases. Part 2: DI Exercises (Without Options). Part 3: Ten Minutes Test Papers. Part 4: Full Length Sectional Test Papers. Part 5: Model Test Papers. Section II: Logical Reasoning. Part 6: Theory and Concepts. 1. Important Concepts in Logical Reasoning. Part 7: Logical Reasoning Exercises. 1. Level of Difficult (LOD) ­ 1. 2. Level of Difficult (LOD) ­ 2. 3. Level of Difficult (LOD) ­ 3

By John Neter, University of Georgia, Michael H Kutner, William Wasserman, and Chris Nachtsheim, University of Minnesota 2004 / 672 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301466-1 / MHID: 0-07-301466-4 (with Student CD-ROM) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123252-4 / MHID: 0-07-123252-4 [IE]

Kutner, Neter, Nachtsheim, Wasserman, Applied Linear Regression Models, 4/e (ALRM4e) is the long established leading authoritative text and reference on regression (previously Neter was lead author.) For students in most any discipline where statistical analysis or interpretation is used, ALRM has served as the industry standard. The text includes brief introductory and review material, and then proceeds through regression and modeling. All topics are presented in a precise and clear style supported with solved examples, numbered formulae, graphic illustrations, and "Notes" to provide depth and statistical accuracy and precision. Applications used within the text and the hallmark problems, exercises, and projects are drawn from virtually all disciplines and fields providing motivation for students in any discipline. ALRM 4e provides an increased use of computing and graphical analysis throughout, without sacrificing concepts or rigor by using larger data sets in examples and exercises, and where methods can be automated within software without loss of understanding, it is so done. CONTENTS

Part 1 - Simple Linear Regression 1 Linear Regression with One Predictor Variable 2 Inferences in Regression and Correlation Analysis 3 Diagnostics and Remedial Measures 4 Simultaneous Inferences and Other Topics in Regression Analysis 5 Matrix Approach to Simple Linear Regression Analysis Part 2 - Multiple Linear Regression 6 Multiple Regression I 7 Multiple Regression II 8 Building the Regression Model I: Models for Quantitative and Qualitative Predictors 9 Building the Regression Model II: Model Selection and Validation 10 Building the Regression Model III: Diagnostics 11 Remedial Measures and Alternative Regression Techniques 12 Autocorrelation in Time Series Data Part 3 - Nonlinear Regression 13 Introduction to Nonlinear Regression and Neural Networks 14 Logistic Regression, Poisson Regression, and Generalized Linear Models

COMPLIMENTARY COPIES

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog.

Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com

78

2007-2008 NEW Business Math Titles

Business Math ~ Contents

2007 New Titles

NELSON Essential of Math with Business Applications, Student Edition, 7e.............................80

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298599-3 / MHID: 0-07-298599-2

Business Math ................................................................ 80 Business Math Software .................................................. 81

79

Business Math

Business Math

NEW

ESSENTIAL OF MATH WITH BUSINESS APPLICATIONS Student Edition, 7th Edition

International Edition

PrACTICAL BUSINESS MATH PrOCEDUrES 8th Edition

By Marceda Nelson 2007 (May 2006) / 528 pages ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298599-3 / MHID: 0-07-298599-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328388-3 / MHID: 0-07-328388-6 (Instructor's Edition to accompany Essentials of Math)

By Jeffrey Slater, North Shore Community College 2006 / 672 pages ISBN-13 978-0-07-296713-5 / MHID: 0-07-296713-7 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313308-9 / MHID: 0-07-313308-6 (with DVD, Business Math Handbook, and Wall Street Journal Insert MP) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111733-3 / MHID: 0-07-111733-4 [IE with DVD, Business Math Handbook, and Wall Street Journal Insert MP] ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313309-6 / MHID: 0-07-313309-4 (Brief Edition, with DVD and Business Math Handbook)

McGraw-Hill/Glencoe Publication

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/slater8e Practical Business Math Procedures is a comprehensive introduction to the concepts and applications of mathematics to personal and commercial business problems. The text uses basic arithmetic and problem solving techniques and illustrates their use in retailing, interest and loans, banking, payroll, taxes, investments, insurance, and a variety of other business situations. The text is well known for the motivating integration of interesting real world examples and photos from the Wall Street Journal, Kiplinger's, and many other business journals. PBMP's is the most popular and widely used book for this course and is carefully written and developed to support students with little math experience with practice quizzes, thousands of exercises, color coded procedures and diagrams, supporting tutorial videos on DVD, and the highest standards of reliability and cleanliness. CONTENTS

1. Whole Numbers: How to Dissect and Solve Word Problems 2. Fractions 3. Decimals 4. Banking 5. Solving for the Unknown: A How-To Approach for Solving Equations 6. Percents and Their Applications 7. Discounts: Trade and Cash 8. Markups and Markdowns; Insights into Perishables 9. Payroll 10. Simple Interest 11. Promissory Notes, Simple Discount Notes, and the Discount Process 12. Compound Interest and Present Value 13. Annuities and Sinking Funds 14. Installment Buying, Rule of 78, and Revolving Charge Credit Cards 15. The Cost of Home Ownership 16. How to Read, Analyze, and Interpret Financial Reports 17. Depreciation 18. Inventory and Overhead 19. Sales, Excise, and Property Tax 20. Life, Fire, and Auto Insurance 21. Stocks, Bonds, and Mutual Funds 22.Business Statistics Appendix A: Complete set of Additional Practice Quizzes Appendis B: Additional Homework Assignments by Learning Unit Appendix C: Check Figures Appendix D: Glossary Appendix E: Metric Sytsem

McGraw-Hill/Glencoe Publication

Website: http://www.mhhe.com/nelson7e This text is organized into 60 distinct Skill Builders meant to prepare students with the skills and competencies they will need to enter the workforce or to go into business careers. Students gain real-world math skills by working business problems and applications involving interest, discounts, payroll, depreciation, retail selling, and checking accounts. NEW TO THIS EDITION

New Instructor's CD will contain the Instructor's Resource Manual, PowerPoint slides, and test bank in two formats­a printable Word version and an EZTest version­for ultimate course flexibility. New, four-color, contemporary design to keep students' interest and facilitate learning. Additional and updated Skillbuilders and new USA Today articles to keep on the forefront of today's business math trends.

FEATUrES

Student Success Hints in the margins give students advice on how to study, take notes and ask for help. Calculator Hints and Math Tips provide instruction and shortcuts for students. Activities Pages at the end of each Skillbuilder that include Graph Activities that feature a USA Today graph and application and Challenge Activities that provide practice using critical thinking skills. Instructor's Annotated Edition makes teaching easier and saves valuable instructor time.

CONTENTS

Unit 1 Whole Numbers: Addition and Subtraction Unit 2 Whole Numbers: Multiplication and Division Unit 3 Decimals: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division Unit 4 Working with Fractions Unit 5 Percents and Other Tools of Mathematical Analysis Unit 6 Business and Consumer Math Unit 7 Interest and Discounts

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing manuscript for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected]

Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg

80

Business Math

Business Math Software

ALEKS FOr BUSINESS MATH USEr GUIDE AND ACCESS CODE

By ALEKS Corporation 2006 ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288513-2 / MHID: 0-07-288513-0 (Mandatory Package, Stand-Alone) ISBN-13: 978-0-07-308064-2 / MHID: 0-07-308064-0 (Bundle)

FEATUrES

Using

a sophisticated adaptive questioning system, ALEKS targets precisely what students are prepared to learn next.

ALEKS builds learning momentum, accelerates student preparedness, and significantly improves student retention.

COMPLIMENTARY COPIES

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. Kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the Examination Copy Request Form available on the back pages of this catalog.

Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.com

81

Title Index

a

Advanced Macroeconomics, 3e, Romer ................................43 Aleks for Business Math User Guide and Access Code, ALEKS Corporation ......................................................81 Annual Editions: Economics, 34e, Cole .................................17 Annual Editions: Labor-Management Relations 05/06, Overby .............................................................................41 Applied Linear Regression Models, 4e, Neter .......................78 Applied Linear Statistical Models, 5e, Kutner ......................77 Applied Statistics in Business and Economics with Student CD-ROM, Doane ................................................72

E

Econometric Methods, 4e, Johnston ......................................36 Econometric Models and Economic Forecasts, 4e, Pindyck ............................................................................36 Econometrics, Cameron.........................................................35 Econometrics, Schmidt ..........................................................35 Economic Growth and Development, Van Den Berg ............44 Economics, 8e, Begg...............................................................15 Economics, 6e, Colander .......................................................14 Economics, 17e, McConnell ..................................................11 Economics, 16e, McConnell ..................................................16 Economics, 8e, Slavin ............................................................11 Economics, 18e, Samuelson...................................................16 Economics for Business, 2e, Begg..........................................28 Economics is Everywhere, 2e, Hamermesh ..........................17 Economics of European Integration, 2e (The), Baldwin ........45 Economics of Organizations and Strategy (The), Richard ....33 Economics of Social Issues, 17e, Sharp ................................29 Economics of War (The), Poast ..............................................18 Economics Study Workbook, 8e, Begg...................................18 Economy Today, 10e (The), Schiller ......................................15 Elements of Dynamic Optimization, Chiang .........................37 Environmental Economics, 4e, Field ......................................34 Essential of Math with Business Applications, Student Edition, 7e, Nelson ...........................................................80 Essentials of Business Statistics, 2e, Bowerman ...................70 Essentials of Econometrics, 3e, Gujarati...............................34 Essentials of Economics, Brue ...............................................26 Essentials of Economics, 6e, Schiller.....................................26 European Union (The), Nello .................................................45 Experiments with Economic Principles: Microeconomics 2e, Bergstrom ..................................................................18

b

Basic Econometrics, 4e, Gujarati ..........................................35 Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, 5e, Lind ..........73 Basic Statistics Using Excel and MegaStat, Orris .................72 Basic Statistics Using Excel for use with Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e, Lind .........74 Business Dynamics, Sterman ................................................49 Business Forecasting, 5e, Wilson ...........................................75 Business Information, Zagorsky ............................................77 Business Research Methods, Blumberg.................................77 Business Research Methods, 9e, Cooper ...............................76 Business Savvy Project Manager (The), Heerkens ................68 Business Statistics, 2e, Beri ....................................................73 Business Statistics in Practice, 4e, Bowerman ......................71

C

Complete Business Statistics, 6e, Aczel .................................73 Contemporary Labor Economics, 7e, McConnell .................41

f

Factory Physics, 2e, Hopp ......................................................57 Flying High in a Competitive Industry, Heracleous ..............61 Forecasting, Principles and Application, Delurgio.................76 Foundations of Economics, 3e, Begg .....................................27 Foundations of Inventory Management, Zipkin .....................57 Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics, 4e Chiang ..............................................................................36

D

Decision Making and Forecasting, Marshall .........................76 Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e Simchi-Levi ......................................................................62

G

Global Operations Management, Flaherty.............................66 Global Project Management Handbook, 2e, Cleland .............68 A Guide to the Web for Economics, Bellamy ........................18

H

A History of Economic Theory and Method, 4e Ekelund ............................................................................40 Hong Kong Economy (The), Li ..............................................46 How to Prepare for Data Interpretation, 2e, Sharma .............78

82

Title Index

I

Industrial Economics and Organization, 2e, Jacobson ..........40 Interactive Models for Operations and Supply Chain Management, Finch..........................................................52 International Economics, 5e, Appleyard ...............................39 International Economics, 4e, Cherunilam .............................39 International Economics, 13e, Pugel ......................................38 International Economics, Van Den Berg................................40 International Trade and Investment, 2e, Gionea.....................39 Introducing Advanced Macroeconomics, Sorensen ...............44 Introduction to Business Data Mining, Olson ........................65 Introduction to Information Systems Project Management, 2e, Olson...........................................................................59 Introduction to Management Science, 3e, Hillier ..................54 Introduction to Management Science, 2e, Hillier ..................55 Introduction to Management Science, Stevenson ..................54 Introduction to Operations Research, 8e, Hillier....................66 Issues in Economics Today, 3e, Guell ....................................28 Micro Economy Today, 10e, (The), Schiller ..........................25 Money, Banking and Financial Markets, Cecchetti ...............37

O

Operations and Supply Management, Jacobs.........................50 Operations Management, 5e, Davis ........................................52 Operations Management, 7e, Knod ........................................52 Operations Management, 3e, Schroeder ................................50 Operations Management, 9e, Stevenson ................................51 Operations Management for Competitive Advantage, 11e Chase ................................................................................51 Operations Management Software Windows, Moses .............54 Operations Management Video Series Vol. XII DVD, 9e Irwin/MH .........................................................................50 Operations Now, 3e, Finch .....................................................49

J

Juran's Quality Control Handbook, 5e, Juran .......................60

P

Power of Macroeconomics CD-ROM (The), Navarro...........17 Power of Microeconomics CD-ROM (The), Navarro ...........17 Practical Business Math Procedures, 8e, Slater .....................80 Practical Business Statistics, 5e, Siegel ..................................73 Principles of Economics, Frank .............................................14 Principles of Economics, 3e, Frank .......................................12 Principles of Macroeconomics, Bernanke .............................22 Principles of Macroeconomics, 3e, Frank .............................20 Principles of Microeconomics, 3e, Frank ..............................23 Production, Sipper..................................................................57 Production and Operations Analysis, 5e, Nahmias ................56 Professional Services: Text and Cases, DeLong.....................61 Profitable Purchasing Strategies, Steele..................................65 Project Planning, Scheduling and Control, 4e, Lewis ............68 Project Management, 5e, Cleland ..........................................67 Project Management, 4e, Gray ...............................................57 Project Management, 3e, Gray ...............................................58 Public Finance, 8e, Rosen ......................................................43 Public Finance, 7e, Rosen ......................................................43 Purchasing and Supply Management, Benton........................63 Purchasing and Supply Management, 13e, Leenders ............64

L

Labor Economics, 4e, Borjas .................................................41 Labor Economics, 3e, Borjas .................................................42

M

Macroeconomics, 6e, Colander .............................................21 Macroeconomics, 2e, DeLong ................................................30 Macroeconomics, 2e, Dornbusch ..........................................30 Macroeconomics, 9e, Dornbusch ..........................................31 Macroeconomics, 8e, Jackson................................................21 Macroeconomics, 7e, Jackson................................................23 Macroeconomics, 18e, Samuelson .........................................22 Macroeconomics, 8e, Slavin.................................................. 19 Macro Economy Today, 10e (The), Schiller ..........................22 Managerial Economics, 9e, Thomas ......................................32 Managerial Economics, 8e, Thomas ......................................34 Managerial Economics and Business Strategy, 5e, Baye .......33 Managerial Economics and Organizational Architecture, 4e, Brickley ......................................................................32 Managerial Spreadsheet Modeling and Analysis, Hesse ........55 Managing Project and Service Development: Text and Cases, Thomke .................................................................58 Managing Services, Davis ......................................................62 Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems, 5e Vollmann ..........................................................................57 Matching Supply with Demand, Cachon .........................51, 64 Microeconomics, 6e, Colander ..............................................25 Microeconomics, 7e, Jackson ................................................26 Microeconomics, 3e, Katz ......................................................32 Microeconomics, Morgan ......................................................31 Microeconomics, 8e, Slavin ...................................................23 Microeconomics, 19e, Samuelson .........................................25 Microeconomics and Behavior, 6e, Frank .............................31 Microeconomics Demystified, Depken ..................................21

Q

Quality Management, 3e, Gitlow ...........................................60 Quality Planning and Analysis, 5e, Gryna .............................59 Quantitative Methods for Business, 2e, Dewhurst.................56 Quantitative Techniques in Management, 3e, Vohra..............55

83

Title Index

S

SAP R/3 Enterprise Software, Hayen...............................53, 65 Schaum's Easy Outline of Business Statistics, Kazmier .......74 Schaum's Easy Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics, Dowling ........................................................36 Schaum's Outline of Beginning Statistics, 2e, Stephens .......74 Schaum's Outline of Business Statistics, 4e, Kazmier ..........74 Schaum's Outline of Easy Outline of Principles of Economics, Salvatore ......................................................18 Schaum's Outline of International Economics, 4e Salvatore ..........................................................................40 Schaum's Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics, 3e, Dowling...................................................37 Schaum's Outline of Macroeconomics, 3e, Diulio .................19 Schaum's Outline of Microeconomic Theory, 4e Salvatore ..........................................................................44 Schaum's Outline of Operations Management, 2e, Monks....53 Schaum's Outline of Operations Research, 2e, Bronson .......66 Schaum's Outline of Principles of Economics, 2e Salvatore ..........................................................................19 Schaum's Outline of Probability and Statistics, 2e, Spiegel ..............................................................................75 Schaum's Outline of Statistics and Econometrics, 2e Salvatore ....................................................................35, 75 Service Management, 5e, Fitzsimmons .................................61 Sim's Project Player's Manual and Access Code, Pinto.........59 Statistical Quality Control, 7e, Grant ....................................61 Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e Lind ..................................................................................70 Statistics, 6e, Sanders.............................................................74 Structure of Economics, 3e (The), Silberberg .......................37 Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e, Bowersox .............63 Supply Management Handbook, 7e (The), Cavinato.............67

T

Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial Economics Issues, 12e, Bonello ...................................... 29

U

Urban Economics, 6e, O'Sullivan..........................................42 Using Statistics in Economics, Thomas .................................46

W

What is Design for Six Sigma, Pande ....................................60 World Class Supply Management, 7e, Burt ...........................64 World-Class Warehousing and Material Handling Frazelle.............................................................................67

84

author Index

a

Aczel: Complete Business Statistics, 6e .................................73 ALEKS Corporation: Aleks for Business Math User Guide and Access Code ....................................................81 Appleyard: International Economics, 5e ...............................39

D

Davis: Managing Services ......................................................62 Davis: Operations Management, 5e........................................52 DeLong: Macroeconomics, 2e ...............................................30 DeLong: Professional Services: Text and Cases ....................61 Delurgio: Forecasting, Principles and Application ................76 Depken: Microeconomics Demystified ..................................21 Dewhurst: Quantitative Methods for Business, 2e ................56 Diulio: Schaum's Outline of Macroeconomics, 3e.................19 Doane: Applied Statistics in Business and Economics with Student CD-ROM .....................................................72 Dornbusch: Macroeconomics, 2e ..........................................30 Dornbusch: Macroeconomics, 9e ..........................................31 Dowling: Schaum's Easy Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics..................................................36 Dowling: Schaum's Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics, 3e ............................................37

b

Baldwin: Economics of European Integration, 2e (The) .......45 Baye: Managerial Economics and Business Strategy, 5e .......33 Begg: Economics, 8e ..............................................................15 Begg: Economics for Business, 2e .........................................28 Begg: Economics Study Workbook, 8e ..................................18 Begg: Foundations of Economics, 3e .....................................27 Bellamy: A Guide to the Web for Economics ........................18 Benton: Purchasing and Supply Management .......................63 Bergstrom: Experiments with Economic Principles: Microeconomics, 2e ..........................................................18 Beri: Business Statistics, 2e ...................................................73 Bernanke: Principles of Macroeconomics .............................22 Blumberg: Business Research Methods ................................77 Bonello: Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial Economics Issues, 12e ..................................................... 29 Borjas: Labor Economics, 4e .................................................41 Borjas: Labor Economics, 3e .................................................42 Bowerman: Business Statistics in Practice, 4e ......................71 Bowerman: Essentials of Business Statistics, 2e ...................70 Bowersox: Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e ............63 Brickley: Managerial Economics and Organizational Architecture, 4e.................................................................32 Bronson: Schaum's Outline of Operations Research, 2e .......66 Brue: Essentials of Economics...............................................26 Burt: World Class Supply Management, 7e...........................64

E

Ekelund: A History of Economic Theory and Method, 4e.......................................................................................40

f

Field: Environmental Economics, 4e .....................................34 Finch: Interactive Models for Operations and Supply Chain Management ...........................................................52 Finch: Operations Now, 3e .....................................................49 Fitzsimmons: Service Management, 5e .................................61 Flaherty: Global Operations Management ............................66 Frank: Microeconomics and Behavior, 6e .............................31 Frank: Principles of Economics ............................................14 Frank: Principles of Economics, 3e.......................................12 Frank: Principles of Macroeconomics, 3e .............................20 Frank: Principles of Microeconomics, 3e..............................23 Frazelle: World-Class Warehousing and Material Handling ...........................................................................67

C

Cachon: Matching Supply with Demand .........................51, 64 Cameron: Econometrics ........................................................35 Cavinato: Supply Management Handbook, 7e (The) ............67 Cecchetti: Money, Banking and Financial Markets ...............37 Cherunilam: International Economics, 4e.............................39 Chiang: Elements of Dynamic Optimization .........................37 Chiang: Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics, 4e ...................................................................36 Chase: Operations Management for Competitive Advantage, 11e .................................................................51 Cleland: Global Project Management Handbook, 2e ............68 Cleland: Project Management, 5e ..........................................67 Colander: Economics, 6e.......................................................14 Colander: Macroeconomics, 6e .............................................21 Colander: Microeconomics, 6e..............................................25 Cole: Annual Editions: Economics, 34e.................................17 Cooper: Business Research Methods, 9e ...............................76

G

Gionea: International Trade and Investment, 2e ....................39 Gitlow: Quality Management, 3e ...........................................60 Grant: Statistical Quality Control, 7e ....................................61 Gray: Project Management, 4e ..............................................57 Gray: Project Management, 3e ..............................................58 Gryna: Quality Planning and Analysis, 5e.............................59 Guell: Issues in Economics Today, 3e ....................................28 Gujarati: Basic Econometrics, 4e ..........................................35 Gujarati: Essentials of Econometrics, 3e ..............................34

85

author Index

H

Hamermesh: Economics is Everywhere, 2e ..........................17 Hayen: SAP R/3 Enterprise Software ..............................53, 65 Heerkens: Business Savvy Project Manager (The) ...............68 Heracleous: Flying High in a Competitive Industry ..............61 Hesse: Managerial Spreadsheet Modeling and Analysis ........55 Hillier: Introduction to Management Science, 3e ..................54 Hillier: Introduction to Management Science, 2e ..................55 Hillier: Introduction to Operations Research, 8e ...................66 Hopp: Factory Physics, 2e......................................................57

M

Marshall: Decision Making and Forecasting.........................76 McConnell: Contemporary Labor Economics, 7e .................41 McConnell: Economics, 17e ..................................................11 McConnell: Economics, 16e ..................................................16 Monks: Schaum's Outline of Operations Management, 2e ...53 Morgan: Microeconomics......................................................31 Moses: Operations Management Software Windows .............54

N I

Irwin/MH: Operations Management Video Series Vol. XII DVD, 9e ..............................................................50 Nahmias: Production and Operations Analysis, 5e................56 Navarro: Power of Macroeconomics CD-ROM (The) ..........17 Navarro: Power of Microeconomics CD-ROM (The) ...........17 Nello: European Union (The) ................................................ 45 Nelson: Essential of Math with Business Applications, Student Edition, 7e............................................................80 Neter: Applied Linear Regression Models, 4e .......................78

J

Jackson: Macroeconomics, 8e ...............................................21 Jackson: Macroeconomics, 7e ...............................................23 Jackson: Microeconomics, 7e ................................................26 Jacobs: Operations and Supply Management ........................50 Jacobson: Industrial Economics and Organization, 2e ..........40 Johnston: Econometric Methods, 4e .....................................36 Juran: Juran's Quality Control Handbook, 5e .......................60

O

Olson: Introduction to Business Data Mining ........................65 Olson: Introduction to Information Systems Project Management, 2e ................................................................59 Orris: Basic Statistics Using Excel and MegaStat .................72 O'Sullivan: Urban Economics, 6e .........................................42 Overby: Annual Editions: Labor-Management Relations 05/06 .................................................................................41

K

Katz: Microeconomics, 3e .....................................................32 Kazmier: Schaum's Easy Outline of Business Statistics .......74 Kazmier: Schaum's Outline of Business Statistics, 4e ..........74 Knod: Operations Management, 7e .......................................52 Kutner: Applied Linear Statistical Models, 5e ......................77

P

Pande: What is Design for Six Sigma ....................................60 Pindyck: Econometric Models and Economic Forecasts, 4e .....................................................................36 Pinto: Sim's Project Player's Manual and Access Code ........59 Poast: Economics of War (The)..............................................18 Pugel: International Economics, 13e......................................38

L

Leenders: Purchasing and Supply Management, 13e ............64 Lewis: Project Planning, Scheduling and Control, 4e ............68 Li: Hong Kong Economy (The)..............................................46 Lind: Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, 5e .........73 Lind: Basic Statistics Using Excel for use with Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e ...................74 Lind: Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e.....................................................................................70

R

Richard: Economics of Organizations and Strategy (The) ....33 Romer: Advanced Macroeconomics, 3e ................................43 Rosen: Public Finance, 8e ......................................................43 Rosen: Public Finance, 7e ......................................................43

86

author Index

S

Salvatore: Schaum's Outline of Easy Outline of Principles of Economics ...................................................18 Salvatore: Schaum's Outline of International Economics, 4e ...................................................................40 Salvatore: Schaum's Outline of Microeconomic Theory, 4e .........................................................................44 Salvatore: Schaum's Outline of Principles of Economics, 2e ...................................................................19 Salvatore: Schaum's Outline of Statistics and Econometrics, 2e.........................................................35, 75 Samuelson: Economics, 18e ..................................................16 Samuelson: Macroeconomics, 18e ........................................22 Samuelson: Microeconomics, 19e .........................................25 Sanders: Statistics, 6e ............................................................74 Schiller: Economy Today, 10e (The)......................................15 Schiller: Essentials of Economics, 6e ....................................26 Schiller: Macro Economy Today, 10e (The) ..........................22 Schiller: Micro Economy Today, 10e, (The) ..........................25 Schmidt: Econometrics ..........................................................35 Schroeder: Operations Management, 3e................................50 Sharma: How to Prepare for Data Interpretation, 2e .............78 Sharp: Economics of Social Issues, 17e ................................29 Siegel: Practical Business Statistics, 5e ..................................73 Silberberg: Structure of Economics, 3e (The) .......................37 Simchi-Levi: Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e ...........................................................................62 Sipper: Production .................................................................57 Slater: Practical Business Math Procedures, 8e .....................80 Slavin: Economics, 8e ........................................................... 11 Slavin: Macroeconomics, 8e ................................................. 19 Slavin: Microeconomics, 8e ...................................................23 Sorensen: Introducing Advanced Macroeconomics...............44 Spiegel: Schaum's Outline of Probability and Statistics, 2e.......................................................................................75 Steele: Profitable Purchasing Strategies .................................65 Stephens: Schaum's Outline of Beginning Statistics, 2e .......74 Sterman: Business Dynamics ................................................49 Stevenson: Introduction to Management Science ..................54 Stevenson: Operations Management, 9e ................................51

V

Van Den Berg: Economic Growth and Development ............44 Van Den Berg: International Economics ...............................40 Vohra: Quantitative Techniques in Management, 3e .............55 Vollmann: Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems, 5e .......................................................................57

W

Wilson: Business Forecasting, 5e ...........................................75

Z

Zagorsky: Business Information ............................................77 Zipkin: Foundations of Inventory Management ....................57

T

Thomas: Managerial Economics, 9e ......................................32 Thomas: Managerial Economics, 8e ......................................34 Thomas: Using Statistics in Economics.................................46 Thomke: Managing Project and Service Development: Text and Cases ..................................................................58

87

Information

88 pages

Find more like this

Report File (DMCA)

Our content is added by our users. We aim to remove reported files within 1 working day. Please use this link to notify us:

Report this file as copyright or inappropriate

1251948


You might also be interested in

BETA
Eco Fin - UoS Coordinators - Semester 2 2010.xls
UT063_Principles Economics Bklt.qxp
Re: Solution Manual, Instructor Manual, Test Bank COLLECTION
FLORIDA NATIONAL COLLEGE